Home

View - ADTRAN Support Community

1. Routing Rule Original Digits 27 Because you are specifying the called number below Suffix to add in this case Jane s cell phone number Jane is not required to enter the called number to answer a call from her cell phone Description Enable Jane to answer her cell phone from her extension Priority 25 Destination Gateway Host pbxservices Call next member after X seconds 0 Digit Manipulation Digits to skip 3 The dialed digits 27 are skipped Prefix to add connectpickup Accesses the connected call pickup feature Suffix to add 6135551111 Adds Jane s cell phone number automatically as the called number Options Transport udp Source Pattern 2602 Jane s extension number followed by refers to any calls originating from Jane s extension 2602 The dial plan entry above allows Jane to pickup calls to her cell phone number 613 555 1111 from her extension 2602 Jane can pickup calls in this manner even though connected call pickup has been disabled for all other users using the previous dial plan example Routing Calls to Queues Call queuing allows you to route incoming calls to a specific queue The queued calls are then answered by a person who belongs to a certain group For example a call to the sales department can be routed to a sales queue and then answered by any sales agent 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 59 Routing and
2. 125 7 Managing User Extensions and Identities 127 OVENS Weni a Reda eme ae Seats D auc as aces acta ae ahaa acters 127 Userin anie a dune dns a a Gating ot Sita den Stade ee ee tae ee 130 Auto Attendant Identities 133 Ring and Hunt Group Identities 136 Configuring Identities Using the Identities Pane 139 Configuring the Global Phone Directory 140 8 Installing and Configuring SIP Phones 143 Installing SIP Phones using Automatic Configuration 143 Installing SIP Phones Manually 143 Configuring SIP Phones 146 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 5 Table of Contents ECS BAS Administrator Guide Reducing Loss of Phone Service 150 9 Configuring Classes of Service 151 Configuring a User COS 151 Configuring a Phone COS 159 10 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server 165 Configuring Gateways
3. 339 Using Database Elements 343 6 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Table of Contents 19 Importing and Exporting 353 OVEIVICW S ER Re ent nee aya nee fat ayy Petey diet vitor aye Meare ee 353 Starting the Import Export Wizard 353 Importing and Exporting Items 353 20 Maintaining the NetVanta UC Server 355 Backing up the NetVanta UC Server 355 21 Troubleshooting 0 000 eee eens 357 Overview ice iid e a aa Dada whl Gees tat Bed ee AE Bee ae c an 357 Troubleshooting Playback and Recording 357 Troubleshooting Voicemail 358 Troubleshooting Message Waiting Indicators 359 Troubleshooting the NetVanta UC Server 360 Troubleshooting Performance Issues with Exchange Server 361 Using the NetVanta UC Server Logs 362 Enabling Diagnostic Information 368 Accessing Documentation and Training 369 Accessing Tec
4. 165 Configuring Ports a as aa aa a teens 166 Configuring Servers 169 Configuring Communication Systems 185 Configuring Licenses 190 11 Using SIP Telephones 193 Customizing Your Phone 193 Using SIPPhones iici natai tua nee dae ped paies en eae 194 12 FAXING RS eile Gas Sed Gee de a Rea 205 OVEIVIOW as odor done a A a wae i tae ed Cee ee loge sends 205 Sending Faxes gt ere de Ganeisy Lia wee eae dh tae AU Dea mu RE er 206 RECEIVING Faxes renner ede Gans eee iad Gala Se dee ew dale te ede te ee ee 230 13 Creating Distribution Lists 233 OVEIVIOW seas ween ted Gee aise bia vada ne eee dh Saal ee EL Sn ER S a ie 233 Using System Distribution Lists 233 Using Personal Distribution Lists 233 14 Using Advanced Features 235 Using the Outbound Dialer 235 Customizing System Announcements on the Server 250 15 Creating Custom Call Answering Services 253 OVERVIEW ELLE ies RE EA
5. For Help press F1 Connected as Admin Communication systems types The Communication Systems options allow the installer to integrate the NetVanta UC Server with the communication system depending on the hardware installed on the NetVanta UC Server Below are some of the communication system types that are possible e Avaya Definity and Multivantage e IP Office e Avaya Merlin Magix and Legend e Cisco CallManager e Generic Analog e Generic PBX via Gateway A variety of PBXs can be connected to the NetVanta UC Server through a menuic Media Gateway For Generic PBX via Gateway gateway configuration information refer to the Configuring the menuic Media Gateway technical note available from the ADTRAN Support Community https supportforums adtran com For a list of compatible PBXs and PBX configuration information refer to the menuic website at www menuic com The advanced configuration allows you to program the feature codes to correspond to what is currently configured on the communication system Configuring message waiting indicator activation and de activation codes makes sure that the communication system turns on or off the message waiting indicator The message indicator activation code activates the message waiting indicator for user extensions The 186 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server message waiting indicator is lit when
6. S Service Name This refers to the NetVanta UC Server service to run when a call is completed The value must be the name of a service that belongs to the owned user profile for the authentication that the utility logs in as The service name should be a full path name including any folders the user has defined The path is assumed to start from the Services folder and thus only any subfolders and the service name need to be included in the path The service path should be from the user s NetVanta UC Server Client For example OutService Shared OutService2 My Folder Some Service Note Forward or reverse slashes may be used The following is a list of optional parameters 242 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D Using Advanced Features ECS BAS Administrator Guide Table 14 2 Optional Parameters Parameter Value Description u Login Name Valid NetVanta UC Server login name If this parameter is specified the pw parameter login password must also be specified Specifying u and not specifying pw causes an error Both values u and pw are used to login to the server If both parameters are omitted the utility attempts to connect using single sign on pw Login Password Valid NetVanta UC Server login password If this parameter is specified the u parameter login name must also be specified Specifying pw and not specifying u causes an error Both values u and pw are u
7. New I Unlisted key on ft z In the example above the caller first hears the main auto attendant menu The caller is then prompted to enter an extension number or select from a list of menu options If the caller enters a valid extension number then the caller is transferred to the voicemail of the selected extension where their message is recorded If the caller enters a single digit then the caller is transferred to the menu mode that corresponds with that digit for example Press 1 to speak with an operator 290 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services To transfer caller s to an assistant s mailbox Voice Mail 1 a ES Fetch Assistant d 2 Data al Mailbox Source 4 Select Extension pra 19 5 By prompting caller Mailbox From Selected Extension ias Called Extension v be My Assistant WHERE My Extension Called Id F Play status message Mber gt 3 Fetch Assistant Da gt F Play status message Add Menu Item Valid extension Add Menu Item al a TE One row fetched F On single digit Otherwise Many rows fetched No rows fetched re Otherwise In the example above callers call into a direct line to a user s voicemail and are routed to that user s assistant s mailbox For example You have reached the
8. shaun wells 2004 Summary Topics Pane Navigation Pane Services Det ail Announcements Pane Navigation Distribution Lists Bars Fares Logs The Admin user profile does not have any associated identities Identitites Pane For Help press F1 Connected as Admin Customizing the NetVanta UC Server Configuring system call options You can configure system wide call options such as playing background music when a caller is on hold You can also configure what callers hear if an error occurs during a call When the Play warning prompts mode is enabled then a voice prompt plays to tell the caller that the system is unable to complete the call When this mode is disabled the caller hears a tone pattern when a call is not completed You can set the call park or pickup communication system feature which allows a user to park a caller on their phone and allows another user to pick up that caller on their phone The two modes for this feature are System and Extension System The System mode applies the services options to a attendant service When a call is parked 99 with this mode selected every call receives a unique park identifier The park ID is announced to the user parking the call at the time the call is parked for example extension 800 parks a call and to pick up the user dials 98 lt unique identifier gt System is the default mode Extension The Extension
9. 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Select Routing Routing and Restricting Calls 4 Inthe Dial Plan table select the plus button 5 Inthe Dial Plan Entry menu enter any of the following information that you want to include in the dial plan entry Routing Rule Original Digits This corresponds to the digits used to dial the queue for example 2170 or 5000 Description Enter a description that identifies the call queuing entry Priority Enter a priority of 10 Priority determines the matching priority between different or conflicting dial plan entries The priority must be set below 30 Destination Host Enter pbxservices Call next member after X seconds Digit Manipulation Digits to Skip Prefix to Add If you want to strip any digits out of the called number for example the called number is 80061321 70 but you want to map it to 2170 you can skip the first 6 digits by entering 6 in Digits to Skip Enter queue so the dial plan recognizes that the entry is routing calls to a queue Suffix to Add Leave blank Options Transport UDP Source Pattern 6 Select OK Planning call queuing You can use services to determine overflow behavior and to direct calls to a queue Using a dial plan entry you can route incoming calls from specified numbers directly to a queue This is useful when a company does not need to filter types of
10. 4 Inthe Body field enter the body of the email or use the value selector gt to select a value Refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 to select a dynamic value for the To email address Subject Body or Attach field You can enter only one dynamic value 5 Inthe Attach field select a database value audio or fax fax announcement greeting or temporary recording Send Fax element The Send Fax element allows you to send a list of faxes to a specified fax number Send You can enter the fax number to which you want to send a fax message Latest Fax in Mailbox gt A cover page can accompany your fax message and you can select the To amp fax documents to include in the list You can choose to send a list of faxes the latest fax in your mailbox all faxes in your mailbox or all unread faxes in your mailbox 3 E ap From Called Extension To specify a fax number for the Send Fax element 1 On the Send Fax element select the telephone button 2 Inthe Enter phone number field enter the fax number where you want the fax messages sent to 3 Ifyou want to specify an account code enable the Use account code check box and enter an account code in the field 4 Select OK Refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 to Lu select a dynamic value for the element For information about contact address book synch
11. An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and an In Band Signalling key is missing a match pattern i e the value after the An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and the reason code i e the value before the for an In Band Signalling key is missing The Definity PBX configuration file NetVanta UC Server Data System Definity Definition cfg in use has been edited manually and an error was encountered in parsing a display format entry A PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and in band signaling protocol definition was added that is not yet supported Verify that Caller ID is available when attempting to send a pager notification which includes sending the Caller ID Verify that you have enough ports or application server channels licensed To verify the licensing navigate to Help gt Licensing Information to refer to the existing licensing capabilities Contact your ADTRAN reseller to purchase additional ports or application server media channels Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Log Entry The data source s referenced in the element s is unknown The specified number was disallowed by dialing restrictions Unable to communicate with remote agent s
12. ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options indicate that they have finished entering their fax number or to cancel the operation You can specify the number of times callers are allowed to attempt to enter their fax number as well as the interval between attempts You can also specify the number of simultaneous faxes that the user can send ore For more information on faxing refer to Faxing on page 205 To set the minimum and maximum number of digits for local fax on demand services 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Fax on demand tab 3 Inthe Local phone number boxes select the minimum and maximum digits for fax on demand services 4 Select OK To make fax on demand services available to long distance callers 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Fax on demand tab 3 Check the Enable long distance phone numbers check box 4 Select the minimum and maximum number of digits for Fax on demand services for long distance phone numbers 5 Select OK To specify keys to signal the end of caller input and to cancel a fax on demand request 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Fax on demand tab 3 Select Advanced to open the Advanced Fax on demand Options menu box 4 From the End of input drop down menu select the key that callers can pr
13. Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin 2 From the OutDial command line utility enter the following command line OutDial c u lt username gt pw lt password gt h lt host gt ph lt phone number list gt s lt service gt pm lt parameters gt help The parameters listed function as they do when running the OutDial utility In the command above the c cancels the outbound call request The parameters may be used in any order and the optional parameters are shown in square brackets The parameters are shown on separate lines for ease of reading only Customizing System Announcements on the Server The NetVanta UC Server is configured with system announcements which are professionally recorded audio files used within the application and play to the user over the telephone System announcements are general system prompts that are used throughout the application for example for end of menu prompts However if you want to change the system announcements you can customize the announcements file on 250 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Advanced Features the server The changes that you make are maintained during NetVanta UC Server software upgrades There are three files on the server that the NetVanta UC Server uses for system announcements English U S Male English U S Female and French CA Female You can customize these files If you want th
14. 2 Select the fax documents folder containing the document that you want to rename The folder s contents are listed in the summary pane 214 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing 3 Right click the fax document that you want to rename and select Rename 4 Enter a new name for the fax document To copy a fax document 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the fax documents folder containing the document that you want to copy The folder s contents are listed in the summary pane 3 Right click the fax document that you want to copy and select Duplicate A copy of the fax document appears in the summary pane with the words Copy of before its name You can rename the copied document To delete a fax document 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the fax documents folder containing the document that you want to delete The folder s contents are listed in the summary pane Q Faxes Folder 3 Right click the fax document that you want to delete and select Delete 4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion When you create a fax document for transmission at an undetermined time you can save it to a fax documents folder That makes it easy to find the fax when you open the Faxes menu and schedule its transmission To create a folder for fax documents 1 Right click anywhere in the summary pane 2 Select New gt
15. As system administrator you are responsible for managing announcements and incorporating them into the services that you assign to identities The Announcements navigation pane presents folders used to store announcements Select a folder to view its contents in the summary pane Select an announcement to view its waveform representation in the detail pane A variety of convenient prerecorded announcements are available You can also create custom announcements using the Audio Editor For more information on using the Audio Editor refer to 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 313 Using Announcements in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Recording Announcements on page 317 Le NetVanta UC Client eel File Edit View Tools Help K s g tH ao amp Be xX gt e aG Tabs Admin John Jeffries John Roebuck Administration Name Length Size SERIES D After The Tone 29s 23KB Summary Topics ae Announcement 0 0s OKkB Pane i English U S Male Area Code Fax on Deman 46s 37KB E a Sample UCNS Audio File CallCannotBeConnected 33s 26KB amp En Shared ClosedforArmedForcesDay 33s 27KB ClosedforColumbusDay 3 0s 24KB ClosedforEasterholidays 33s 27KB X lk Cae Jon PATA IES EL ola Fd Navigation Pane PERE F Navigation m 2 oo Detail Bars Distribution Lists Pane Faxes Logs ne NV7100 Direct Voice
16. Delete Data element on page 348 This allows a caller to delete data from a specified data source Update Data element on page 349 This updates the data contained in a specified data source Move Current Row element on page 350 This allows callers to modify which row is the current row in a multi row set retrieved by either the Fetch Data or Dial for Data elements Prompt for Current Row element on page 351 Using a series of prompts this allows callers to use the keypad to select which row becomes the current row 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 343 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Fetch Data element The Fetch Data element allows you to specify a data source using the Data Source Selector and query the data source so that the NetVanta UC Server fetches the data that you want Use a second Fetch Data element to further filter or sort the results of the first a third to further filter or sort the results of the second and so on For example a real estate service is set up to access a database of real estate listings A Fetch Data element is specified to fetch all rows that match a certain price range If several rows are fetched that match that criterion the call moves through the Many rows fetched connector pin to another Fetch Data element that further searches those listings and fetches rows based on the number of bedrooms until it finds the singl
17. ECS BAS Administrator Guide Routing and Restricting Calls e 1 877 657 7689 e 1 888 768 3546 Second line prevents any calls not matched by the previous rule from accessing the PSTN gateway trunks which blocks other users from making toll calls over the PSTN trunks Restricting long distance calls You can control user access to long distance numbers To do this enter a rule that gives unrestricted access to one extension and then all the other extensions have only local and toll free access First line enables extension 1112 unrestricted access to the PSTN gateway Second line allows any unregistered SIP phone to make local or toll free calls on the PSTN gateway Dialed numbers similar to following are allowed by this rule e 9 123 4567 e 123 2345 e 1 800 234 4567 e 1 866 546 5678 e 1 877 657 7689 e 1 888 768 3546 Third line prevents any call not matching the previous rule from accessing the PSTN gateway trunks To add a new toll restriction 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane double click Communication Systems to open the communication system options Double click the communication system to which you want to add a new toll restriction Select Routing Right click anywhere in the Toll Restrictions summary pane Select Add Enable the Allow these types of calls check box So OV ON pet 22 D Enter the information that you want in any of the following boxes e Calling number e Called number e Priority
18. Editing an Existing Phone CoS If you would like to make changes to an existing phone CoS follow these steps to open and edit a phone CoS 1 From the Administration tab select the Administration navigation bar to access the Administration navigation pane 2 Select the Classes of Service topic from the list 160 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Classes of Service 3 Inthe summary pane double click on the phone CoS that you would like to edit The Edit Phone Class of Service menu appears Edit Phone Class of Service A phone class of service can be applied to one or more phones and defines some common attributes for those phones Name Phone Class of Service Use as default for new phones Advanced connection options __ Enable secondary registration if secondary server exists Proxy Type lt None gt M OK Cancel 4 You can select OK to save the phone CoS with the default settings or you can continue to edit the Advanced connection options For more information on configuring the Advanced connection options refer to Configuring the Advanced Connection Options 5 After you have finished configuring the phone CoS settings select OK to save the phone CoS Configuring the Advanced Connection Options In order to provide Business Continuity failover support phones must be able to redirect to the secondary NetVanta UC Server in the event the prim
19. Table 14 3 Outbound Dialer Return Codes Using Advanced Features Return Code Description 0 Success 1 Unknown failure 2 Unsupported command 3 Communication error 4 License key error 5 Invalid number to dial 6 Specified service not found 7 Subsystem not available 8 Service fails validation 9 Failed to activate service 10 Failed to open line 11 System busy 12 Permission denied 13 Nothing to do 14 Invalid object 15 Invalid parameters 16 Invalid path 17 Not logged in 18 Data store failure 19 File already exists 20 Mailbox list is empty 21 Object does not exist 22 User not available to the server 23 Invalid password 24 Client using an out of date version 25 PBX program error 26 Not licensed or license limit exceeded 27 Cannot delete active service 28 Still in use 29 Authentication has been disabled You can use the OutDial exe to query any outstanding outbound call requests using the command line shown below The utility then connects to the server and logs in as usual A request is sent to the server that returns a summary of each outbound call request that has not yet been processed that is the request is still in the queue for the given user The utility returns a message describing each request including the time it was submitted the service the parameters and the number of attempts so far 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 249 Using
20. W ARNING life Below is a list of naming conventions used in this document The first example shows the naming convention used for the first occurrence the second example shows the naming convention used for subsequent occurrences Type Convention Example Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system version R2 or later or Windows Server 2008 R2 or later Server Software NetVanta Unified Communications Server software or NetVanta UC Server software NetVanta Unified Communications Live Attendant Server or Live Attendant Server Client Software Hardware NetVanta Unified Communication Products NetVanta Unified Communications Client software or NetVanta UC Client software NetVanta ucCompanion Desktop Presence client software or ucCompanion NetVanta ucCompanion Live Attendant or Live Attendant NetVanta ucCompanion Soft Phone or Soft Phone Server computer the computer on which the server software is installed Client computer the computer on which the client software is installed NetVanta Unified Communications Server or NetVanta UC Server NetVanta Business Communications System or NetVanta BCS NetVanta Enterprise Communications Server or NetVanta ECS NetVanta Business Application Server or NetVanta BAS NetVanta UC Live Attendant Server or Live Attendant Server 619510001 1D Other operating systems may be mentioned in this document They will follow a format sim
21. 28 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Voice Mail tab Select a key from the Enter skip out of voicemail when drop down menu Enable the Allow transfer from greeting check box if you want callers to be able to transfer out of a user s greeting before leaving a message Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options 5 Enable the Allow transfer after record check box if you want callers to be able to access another user s voicemail after they record a message 6 Select OK Setting Assisted Transfer Options The Assisted Transfer element is used in call answering services You can specify the maximum number of seconds that the NetVanta UC Server waits for an answer before recalling an assisted transfer attempt The default is 20 seconds Wor For information on the Assisted Transfer element refer to Assisted Transfer element on page 279 To change the assisted transfer timer mode 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 From the General tab enter or select the number of seconds to wait before recalling an assisted transfer attempt Setting Fax Message Delivery Options Fax specifications relate to outgoing fax transmissions from your workplace and to Fax on demand elements that you add to services You can specify the number of times that the NetVanta UC Server attempts t
22. Area Code Subscriber Number In North America the following is an example of a canonical telephone number 1 613 555 1212 Audio The value of the field in valid wav format PropertyDescription wav Fax The value of the field in valid tif format Data Sheet tif Day of Year A date without a year for example January 1 is New September 16 Year s Day 09 16 Sep 16 Date A date that includes the day month and year September 16 2007 Valid formats include YY MM DD YYYY MM DD and text Sep 16 2007 versions as illustrated in the examples 07 09 16 2007 09 16 Day of Week The full day name in English as a string The strings can Sunday also be in abbreviated formats Sun Time of Day A time that includes the hour minutes and seconds 2 00 PM optional Valid formats include HH MM AM PM The AM PM is optional however AM is assumed unless the hour is greater than or equal to 12 For example 12 02 means 12 02 PM Time Range Two times of day separated by a hyphen which indicates 2 00 PM 4 00 PM a time range Valid formats are HH MM AM PM HH MM AM PM with AM PM being optional As above AM is assumed unless the hour is greater than or equal to 12 For example 1 00 means 1 00 AM Voice A string of characters containing the name of a NetVanta English U S Male UC Server system voice Valid voices are all voices currently enabled on the system and System Default Voice 338 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 61
23. Deliver Messages Notify Pager and Send Fax elements e The Send Email element e The Text To Speech element e The Compare Data element e The Create Log Entry element e The Select Extension 262 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Creating Custom Call Answering Services Note that parameters can be used to obtain a specific record from a database Parameter Value Description pm Additional Parameters List This is a comma separated list of additional parameters that are passed to the service when it executes These values can be accessed within a service definition as special Text values whose names are Parameter1 Parameter2 and so on The first value in the list becomes the value of Parameter1 and so forth In the service editor parameters are not visible by default Once enabled you can select parameters for the elements that use them To view parameters 1 From the Services navigation bar right click in the summary pane select New gt Service 2 Select the service right click and select Open to open the Service Editor 3 Inthe Service Editor select View gt Parameters to enable the Parameters Once Parameters are enabled then parameter values are available for selection Validating Services After you finish building your service you can validate it The Service Editor inspects the service for logical errors or unresolved aspects of the call flow If there is a problem wi
24. Do either of the following e To shorten or extend the line select one of the boxes at the end of the line and then drag as desired e To reposition a line on the canvas select the line and drag it to a new position 3 Select anywhere on the canvas to cancel the selection To delete a line 1 Select the line you want to delete to select it 2 Press Delete To insert text 1 Select the Lock selector tool 2 Select the Text tool 3 Select where you want to insert the text 4 Drag down and to the right A dotted text box appears on the canvas 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 225 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 Enter the text that you want to insert Choose the font size and style commands on the toolbar to change the text To insert text in a text box 1 Select the lock selector tool 2 Select the text tool Select where you want to insert the text box and then drag to the right and down A dotted text box appears on the canvas Select Format gt Line Fill and Color to open the Line Fill and Color menu box Select the Draw border line check box The text box lines are now solid Select line thickness from the Thickness box on oS Enter the text in the text box Change the font size and style as desired To insert a bitmap 1 Select the Insert bitmap tool to open the Open menu box 2 Select the bitmap that you want to insert 3 Select Open The bitmap is inserted on the canva
25. ECS BAS Administrator Guide Integrating with Active Directory e Single sign on allows users to access network resources without logging on every time e Single management provides a single consistent point of management for users applications and devices Single sign on strengthens system security and provides administrators with consistent tools to manage security services for local users and remote users Active Directory improves security by centralizing management and enforcing role based security which means that users have access to aspects of the system based on roles that are defined by the NetVanta UC Server administrator Single management of resources allows for example one place for managing users including attributes related to the NetVanta UC Server Windows and Exchange You can however create a local user that does not have access to Active Directory Local users must enter a password each time they log on to the system For example creating a local user is useful for the NetVanta UC Server and mailbox accounts that do not have Windows accounts or service accounts The New User Wizard prompts you to specify a password when you create a local user For information about using the New User Wizard to create a user refer to Using the New User Wizard on page 101 Using the Active Directory Users and Computers Console Wor You cannot use the NetVanta UC Server plug in for Active Directory Users and Computers if th
26. Enter a unique name for the gateway This information is for display purposes only on the NetVanta UC Server and in the database 2 Select the communication system for which the gateway is associated The default is the NetVanta UC Server 3 Enter a brief description of the gateway This information is for display purposes only To Edit a Gateway 1 From the Administration Navigation pane select Gateways 2 From the Content pane double click on the gateway you want to edit 3 From the Edit Gateway menu General tab the following gateway information can be edited depending on the gateway provider e Name Enter a gateway name used for display purposes only in the NetVanta UC Server e Description Enter a brief description of the gateway for information only e Host Enter the gateway host name if applicable To Delete a Gateway Deleting a gateway removes the dial plan entries if it is the only gateway configured for the dial plan entry or if it is the last gateway in a gateway group that is the only gateway configured for the dial plan entry 1 From the Administration Navigation pane select Gateways 2 Right click on the gateway you want to delete and select Delete When you delete any communication system configuration category entry you are not dt prompted to confirm the deletion Make sure that you want to delete the entry before doing so Configuring Ports The NetVanta UC Server ports provide a
27. Inthe Data Sources content pane double click the ODBC source that you want to define 2 Select the data source that you want from the ODBC DSN list 3 In the User ID box type the user ID required to access the ODBC data source 4 In the Password box type the password to access the ODBC data if required Some ODBC DSNs contain the user ID and password so you do not have to enter that information 5 Select the Connect button to connect to the ODBC data source You must have the correct user ID and password to successfully connect RE An icon beside the Connect button indicates a successful or unsuccessful connection To define advanced ODBC connection options 1 Inthe Data Sources content pane double click the ODBC source that you want to define 2 Select the Advanced Connection Options button 3 From the Timeout list select the number of seconds that you want ODBC to wait for a connection and successful login The default timeout is 15 seconds 4 Inthe Maximum rows to fetch box type the number of rows that you want the application to fetch during a query The default number of rows is 200 5 Type the Extra Drive Specific Attributes To Be Added To The DSN in the box if required 6 Select OK 330 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services To define ODBC tables and fields 1 In the Data Sources content pane double click the ODBC source that y
28. This includes sending attachments such as announcements greetings temporary recordings faxes or database values for example audio or fax e Custom With Message allows you to send a custom email with the latest mail message Custom notification sends an email notification of calls to a user s mailbox whether ore the caller left a message or not All other types of notifications send email notifications only when a caller leaves a message 2 Inthe To email address field enter the email address where you want the notification sent If you want to enter more than one email address enter them with a semicolon separating each one Refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 if you Lu want to select a dynamic value for the To email address field You can enter only one dynamic value Ensure that you enter a valid email address The NetVanta UC Server does not authenticate email addresses used with the Send Email element 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 281 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide To specify a custom notification 1 From the Send drop down menu select Custom 2 Inthe To email address field enter the email address where you want the notification sent Use a semicolon to separate multiple email addresses 3 Inthe Subject field enter a subject for the email or use the value selector gt to select a value
29. To select the tones to generate Under the Tones field select one of the following value reference controls to indicate the DTMF tones to 304 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide produce Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Database Values Requires licensing for database integration If you have a Database elements tab in addition to the Standard and Advanced elements tabs then you are licensed for database integration Gather Digits Values Use the Gather Digits Element on page 299 prior to the Generate Tones element to enable callers to input digits into their telephone keypad For information on creating services for outbound dialing refer to Creating Outbound Dialing Services on page 244 Queue Outdial element 2S Queue Outdial 1 amp 2 Call number s 1 You can create a service that uses the Queue Outdial element to launch an outdial request after a specified period of time When an outdial element is executed a new outdial request is inserted into the server as if the outdial command had been executed Wor For information on the outbound dialer refer to Using the Outbound Dialer on page 235 You can enter one or more phone numbers manually in the Call number s field or you can use the value selector gt to select phone numbers from a database or contacts list For information on using the v
30. Verify the NetVanta UC Server s service accounts file permissions on the NetVanta UC Server folder Re run the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Wizard The file NetVanta UC Server Data System CalllnfoOverride cfg has been edited manually and one or more of the entries in this file are invalid Consult the inline documentation for details about valid syntax rules The Definity PBX configuration file NetVanta UC Server Data System Definity Definition cfg in use has been edited manually and an error was encountered in parsing a display format entry An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and an In Band Signalling key s match pattern has been duplicated An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and an In Band Signalling key s match pattern cannot be converted to a regular expression The Definity PBX configuration file NetVanta UC Server Data System Definity Definition cfg in use has been edited manually and an error was encountered in parsing a display format entry The Definity PBX configuration file NetVanta UC Server Data System Definity Definition cfg in use has been edited manually and a reason code translation has more than 2 characters in a field fields are separated by a The Definity PBX configuration file NetVanta UC Server Data System Definity Definiti
31. and the phone must be capable of dual registration for this checkbox to be active Proxy Used with Business Continuity The SIP proxy is used to forward SIP packets to the secondary server in case the primary server fails Type Specifies the type Outbound or Stateful of SIP proxy server to which the phone will register Stateful proxy mode is typically used with Business Continuity In stateful proxy mode each phone is registered to the proxy and SIP signaling is sent to the AOS proxy device Outbound SIP proxy only provides local phone survivability in the case of a Primary Server failure e Address Enter the IP address of the SIP proxy server e Port Enter the port on the SIP proxy server to which the phone will register 5 Select OK Configuring SIP Phones Using the Phones summary pane you can change phone information remove a phone from the network restart a phone or reload phone configurations From the Phone menu accessed by double clicking a phone in the Phones summary pane you can assign identites speed dial numbers busy lamp fields BLFs and Park Zone buttons to lines on the phone For information about assigning a SIP phone to a user profile using the New User Wizard refer to Using the New User Wizard on page 101 To change information associated with a phone 1 Inthe Phones summary pane right click the phone that you want to change 2 Select Open from the drop down menu 3 Change the phone s i
32. and then starts to record the caller You may want to use a Play Announcement element before the Record Announcement element to instruct the caller on how to stop the recording The caller must press a telephone key to stop recording Action Key Description Stop recording Plays menu 4 9 0 Stops recording and prompts the caller with the menu options options for 1 2 3 and the key on the telephone keypad If the caller does not subsequently press a key then after repeating the menu options three times the element keeps the current recording and the call flow proceeds If a caller presses keys 4 to 9 or 0 the prompt menu is repeated the first time then subsequently has the same effect as if the 1 key was pressed Listen to the recording 3 Stops recording plays the recorded audio to the caller and then prompts the caller with the menu options Record again 2 Stops recording discards the current recorded audio sends a voicemail prompt tone to the caller and allows the caller to start recording again The caller must press a telephone key to stop the recording Keep the recording cancel 1 Stops recording keeps the recorded audio and the call flow proceeds To enable callers to change a specified announcement using a remote telephone 1 Enable the Specific button 2 Select the value selector gt select Announcements and select the recording that you want The name of the announcement a
33. e Select Phones if you want to add specific phones to the paging group If you have already added a user s identity you do not need to add the corresponding phone MAC address e Select Multicast IP addresses if you want to enter multicast IP addresses to add to the paging group In order to use multicast paging users must be able to receive the page over a phone handset or speaker that supports multicasting For more information refer to Configuring Multicast Paging on page 70 e Select Dialable numbers if you want to add a paging device If you are adding a sound card paging device then add the specified feature access codes for sound card paging devices If you are adding gateway paging to an existing PBX or to a paging controller then ensure that you have already added an appropriate feature access code to the dial plan before adding the feature access code as a dialable number 6 Select Next 7 Inthe Select Identities menu enable any user identities that you want to be included in the paging group using the check boxes next to the identity extension in the Address column and select Next 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 75 Configuring Paging ECS BAS Administrator Guide 10 11 12 13 In the Select Phones menu select the specific phones rather than user identitites to be included as members of the paging group Use the check boxes next to the phone MAC address in the MAC Address column to select the phones
34. for example Excel spreadsheets SQL server or Visual FoxPro database You can edit the field attributes of an ODBC data source For example you can change the name of the field the data type or whether you want the field to be visible to the user Other options include filtering and sorting ODBC data To name a new ODBC data source 1 Right click anywhere in the Data Sources content pane 2 Select New gt ODBC Source 3 Inthe Name box type a name for the data source that you want to define 4 If you do not want to further define the data source you can select OK to save it Lu To use the data source you must define ODBC connection parameters 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 329 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide To change the access status of a data source 1 Inthe Data Sources content pane right click the data source that you want to change the access status of 2 Select Access 3 Select one of the following access types e Disabled does not allow access to the data source e Admin Only allows only the Administrator to access the data source e Everyone allows everyone to access the data source 4 Ifyou selected Everyone select Yes to confirm Make sure that you want to allow all callers to access the data source Allowing everyone to have access to an ODBC data source is a potential security risk UT To define ODBC connection parameters 1
35. gt arrow For more information refer to Deliver Messages element on page 277 3 Specify the Data Source Filter field Equals and Update information using the drop down menus The Advanced Record Announcements allow you to define additional attributes for the recording To change the advanced options select on the show or hide advanced options button You can limit the length of the message that can be recorded and avoid recording silence Enable the corresponding check boxes to allow callers to signal the end of their message enable a beep before recording and enable review message menu To limit the length of a recorded message Enter a number of seconds in the Record for at most field Callers cannot leave a message that lasts longer than the time limit that you specify To avoid recording silence 1 Enable the Stop recording after check box 2 Enter a number of seconds in the field Wor If you set the number of seconds of silence too low callers might be cut off while pausing between phrases or speaking quietly To set Take Message specifications Enable any of the following check boxes Stop when key pressed callers proceed to the next element after they press a key e Beep before recording e Review message menu 294 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Take Message Element Extension refers to the identity originall
36. gt feature available on some elements to specify the following types of values Literal values For example a number or piece of text References to data files For example a fax announcement or greeting References to database values References that have been fetched from a database System values For example caller ID Strings of digits Gathered by a Gather Digits element For example the Play Announcement element allows you to play a dynamic value announcement greeting or temporary recording to a caller that encounters the element in a service Play Play ah Announcement 1 2 Hez 0 Database Values gt Greeting type Announcements r Announcement Greetings gt AT RE Temporary Recordings gt Sample UCNS Audio Files y ay status message Shared gt Stop when key pressed Play entire message The values that are available using the value selector gt depend on how your service and system are set 266 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services up For example to use database values a database element type must be included in the service To specify Gather Digits values a Gather Digits element must be included in the service Wor To use database values and elements your system must be licensed for database integration Allowing Callers to Make Temporary Record
37. lt value 2 gt and so on where the values of the Select on field are from the set of rows associated with the source element The caller is prompted for up to six choices e The element follows with the prompt Press 8 to repeat these choices e Ifthere are more than six rows then it prompts with Press 9 for more choices e Finally the element prompts with Press 0 to start over If the caller enters the number associated with a specific row value the associated row becomes the current row and the element exits through the Source element connector pin e Ifthe caller presses 8 the prompts are repeated e Ifthe caller presses 0 the same prompt for the first group of rows is repeated e Ifthere are more than six rows and the caller presses 9 the element prompts with Press 1 for lt value gt as before but the values are now taken from the next group of rows This prompt is followed by Press 7 for previous choices and the other prompts as noted above Pressing 7 causes the prompt for the previous group of rows to be played The process continues until the caller selects a specific row The caller uses the 7 and 9 keys to move backwards and forwards through the set of rows Key Pressed Results 0 The prompt for the first row set is played 1 6 This selects the associated row value and becomes the current row The element exits through the Source element connector pin 7 If there are previous row sets the prompt is p
38. lt value gt Paging Tone wav lt value gt The PagingTone wav between the lt value gt start tag and lt value gt end tag is the default audio prompt WAV file that issues to alert the recipient of the HFAA page If the default audio prompt WAV file has been changed the filename or absolute path will be different 4 To change the HFAA audio prompt WAV file replace the PagingTone wav value between the tags with the absolute path of the desired WAV file for the HFAA audio prompt Do not add any spaces between the tags and the absolute path For example lt setting name PlayHandsfreeAnnounceTone serializeAs String gt lt value gt C Users Administrator Music Paging Alert wav lt value gt 5 Save the PagingServer exe config file and close the text editor 80 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Paging 6 For changes to take affect you must restart the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server service using the procedure outlined in Restarting the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server Service on page 81 Restarting the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server Service After making changes in the PagingServer exe config file you must restart the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Paging Server service for the changes to take effect To restart the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server service 1 Inthe Start menu of the computer where the NetVanta UC Server software is insta
39. refer to the user documentation for your phone 2 Enter 86 lt Destination mailbox number gt 3 Press Send or Dial depending on the phone type you are using 4 To complete the transfer press the Transfer key again 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 195 Using SIP Telephones ECS BAS Administrator Guide To leave a message directly in a recipient s mailbox 1 Enter 86 lt Destination mailbox number gt 2 Press Send or Dial Using the NetVanta UC Server Conference Bridge The NetVanta UC Server has the ability to support a limited sized conference bridge application The number of participants is limited to the number of licenses available however additional conference expansion licenses can be purchased You can use your SIP phone during the conference to access several options such as muting or adding participants rg The default conference bridge number is 7050 however this number can be changed To change the conference bridge number refer to To edit an existing dial plan on page 52 The conference bridge number is associated with a conference and not a user identity The conference bridge number must be entered in the list of valid identities in order to F allow inbound callers to be transferred to this number For more information refer to Configuring Non user Extensions and Identities on page 37 Any lone user in a conference bridge will hear the sound of crickets which is confirmation t
40. source 4 Inthe Add Button Label box type the title that you want to display on the user add button 5 Select OK to save the changes To add a field in a user data source If you add a new field to an existing table then the value of that field for all existing Lu records in that table will be set to a null value This appears in the user interface as NO VALUE 1 In the Data Sources content pane double click the user data source that you want to add a field to Select the New button Select the Name section of the new field Type a name for the field Select the Data Type section of the new field to obtain a list of data types CL sh Select a data type from the Data Type list Lu The Default Value section changes depending on the data type that you select 7 Repeat steps 3 to 7 until you have added all the fields that you want 8 Select OK To change the order of a field in a user data source 1 In the Data Sources content pane double click the user data source that you want to change 2 Select the field that you want to change the order of 3 Select one of the following buttons e Up moves the selected field up one row in the list of fields Down moves the selected field down one row in the list of fields 334 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services 4 Select OK Wor The field order defines the order in which t
41. system and select Routing 2 From the Dial Plan table select the plus button to open the Dial Plan Entry menu 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 57 Routing and Restricting Calls ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Enter the information in the dial plan entry as described below Routing Rule Original Digits 27 0 9 3 This regular expression refers to any calls starting with 27 followed by any three or more numbers Description Disable connected call pickup for all users Priority 20 Destination Gateway Host prompt 403 pbxservices This results in an error message if a user dials 27 plus any three or more numbers Call next member after X seconds 0 Digit Manipulation Digits to skip 0 Prefix to add Suffix to add Options Transport udp Source pattern S Any user dialing 27 plus three or more numbers now hears an error message and is unable to pickup a connected call To enable connected call pickup for specific users 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane under Communication Systems select the communication system and select Routing 2 From the Dial Plan table select the plus button to open the Dial Plan Entry menu 58 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Routing and Restricting Calls 3 Enter the information in the dial plan entry following the example described below
42. system defined default mailbox Verify the connection and permissions to the message store Serious Error Failed to get server object for user Verify network connectivity oS Verify the NetVanta UC Server s service accounts file permissions on the NetVanta UC Server folder 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 373 Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs Severity Serious Error Serious Error Serious Error Serious Error Fatal Error Log Entry Failed to update Active Directory user s extensions hr 0x 08x Internal error finding the Exchange Server message store System diagnostics has detected a potential problem with port s port displayed as name extension deviceld The minimum disk storage threshold has been exceeded New voice messages will not be saved until the problem is corrected Application Services have been restarted to recover from an error condition In most situations the system will be operating normally after this occurs If this log entry appears regularly or frequently then more investigation is required ECS BAS Administrator Guide Possible Causes and Solutions Verify network connectivity and the connection to Active Directory Verify the NetVanta UC Server s service accounts file permissions on the NetVanta UC Server folder Re run the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Wizard Verify the connection to Microsoft Exchange Server Validate the NetVanta U
43. 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Voices tab 3 In the list of available voices select the voice for which you would like to configure the TTS properties The voice will become highlighted 4 Select the Open button The Edit Voice menu will appear 5 Inthe Edit Voice menu use the Voice Name drop down menu to select the desired TTS voice 6 Enter the desired volume for the TTS voice in the Volume field This value is a percentage of the maximum playback volume for the TTS voice The default value is 80 percent 7 Use the Sample Rate drop down menu to select the sample rate in samples per second Hz Higher values correspond to higher TTS voice quality The default value is 16000 8 Select OK Selecting the Order for Dial by Name Dialing Using the dial by name mode you can specify the order in which callers can enter a name either the first or last name using their telephone keypad and then be connected to a corresponding extension To specify the dial by name mode 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the General tab 36 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options 3 Select one of the following e First name last name e Last name first name 4 Select OK rg For information on the Dial by Name element refer to Dial by Name Element on page 2
44. 2 3 228 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu Select the Cover Pages icon The fax cover pages are listed in the summary pane Right click the cover page that you want to delete Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing 4 Select Delete 5 Select Yes to confirm the deletion To edit a fax cover page 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the Cover Pages icon The fax cover pages are listed in the summary pane 3 Right click the cover page that you want to edit 4 Select Open The fax cover page is displayed in the Fax Cover Page Editor FaxCoverPage 1 fcp UC Client Fax Cover Page Editor File Edit View Insert Format Layout Help S Teo fais ies IE Jles zvu EROOYE DADS S 7 t k Connected as System 770 574 Use the toolbar and menu commands to change the fax cover page 5 Select File gt Save To send a cover page only using Quick Fax The Quick Fax feature allows you to send a one page fax message at any time to as many recipients as you choose When you use Quick Fax you send only a cover page Your messages appear in the subject area 1 On the toolbar select the Quick Fax icon to open the Fax Recipients menu box amp Quick Fax icon 2 Select Addresses to select recipients from your Outlook Contacts list If you are not choosing a recipient from your Outlook Contacts list e
45. 2013 ADTRAN Inc 67 Routing and Restricting Calls 68 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc ECS BAS Administrator Guide 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Paging 4 Configuring Paging The NetVanta UC Server provides paging to overhead paging devices and desktop phones You can send live pages through overhead speakers or page specific users over their phone You can create and select paging groups to determine who receives a page Live and prerecorded pages can be sent from within a call answering service Additionally hands free auto answer HFAA paging allows a single recipient to receive and respond to a page NetVanta UC Server supports various paging devices The paging device you chose depends on a number of factors including your particular system configuration the paging feature required existing paging equipment and the overall cost For more information refer to the following sections e Configuring a Paging Device on page 69 e Creating and Configuring Paging Groups on page 73 e Configuring Hands Free Auto Answer Paging on page 77 e Enabling Users to Access Paging on page 81 Configuring a Paging Device The NetVanta UC Server supports multiple paging devices including SIP phones VoIP speakers VoIP zone paging controllers sound cards and gateway paging to an existing PBX or a paging controller The following sections outline the paging devices e Configuring SIP Phones and VoIP Paging Device
46. 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 319 Using Announcements in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Stop Skip Backwards Skip Forwards 1 KO 4 mh 11 mi me Record Move to End ___ Pause Move to Play Beginning Before you delete part of an announcement or add to it you can listen to it and identify the location on the waveform where you want to make a deletion or insertion If you have selected a part of the waveform audio commands apply only to the selected portion The move and skip commands are used to position the marker within the selection Use the view and select commands to select a portion of the audio Select None Zoom to Fit All mA ia e amp ___ Zoom Out Select All Zoom In The view commands allow you to zoom in and out when you view the waveform so that your selection is as accurate as possible The select commands allow you to select and deselect the entire waveform If you do not select a section of the waveform the changes that you make apply to the whole waveform Use the process commands to adjust the volume of the waveform Decrease Volume vug Increase Volume ____ Maximize Volume 320 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Announcements in Call Answering Services Use the playback commands to specify the playback device to use when playing the announcement within the Audio Editor Computer Speaker
47. Change Voice from the drop down menu Then select the voice folder you would like to display from the submenu El Netvanta UC Client Esta ex File Edit View Tools Help 9 TD e F amp Admin John Jeffries John Roebuck Administration Name Length Size Services AT 11s 10KB BR sample UCNS Audio Files Al Shared gt Change Voice 4 System Default Voice Dennis English U S Male English U S Female Faxes French CA Female rr gt Distribution Lists Logs Connected as Adi Previewing a Prerecorded Announcement Some of the elements that are used to build services include a Browse button that allows you to select an announcement to be played at that particular point in the call flow Before selecting the announcements you want to play while the service runs you can preview them in the Announcements menu To preview a prerecorded announcement follow these steps 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Ifthe appropriate voice folder is not displayed in the Announcements navigation pane select the desired voice folder using the steps in Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 3 From the voice folder select a subfolder to list its contents in the summary pane 4 Inthe summary pane select the announcement that you want to preview 5 Select Download in the detail pane A waveform re
48. Communications Client menu will appear 5 ADTRAN NetVanta Unified Communications Client Setup Custom Setup Select the way you want features to be installed Click the icons in the tree below to change the way features will be installed l Base Files net Framework French Language 3 5 Clients Pack Required for French UC Client Spellchecking Will be installed on local hard drive on your lt Entire feature will be installed on local hard drive el x Entire feature will be unavailable ur gt Disk Usage 6 Inthe Ready to install NetVanta Unified Communications Client menu select Install to begin the installation of NetVanta UC Client 7 Ifyou selected to install the net Framework French Language Pack once NetVanta UC Client has finished installing the net Framework French Language Pack installation wizard will start Follow the directions in this wizard to install the language pack 8 Once the language pack has been installed select Finish in the ADTRAN NetVanta Unified Communications Client Setup Wizard 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 19 Introducing the Administrator Application 20 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc ECS BAS Administrator Guide 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options 2 Setting System Wide Options This chapter explains how the NetVanta UC Server administrator options can be used to configure the beha
49. Data Sources Filter Options Data Source Selector Fier field BY Price REP EF Price X Filter Field Res menus z Filter Less Than Equal SR Many rows fetched Comparison Gather 0 for Max Pr No rows fetched nat Filter Value Otherwise Sort Options To specify a data source for an element 1 Select the arrow in the Source section of the element 2 Select the Data source that you want from the drop down menu 3 Select the Filter field that you want from the drop down menu 4 Select the comparison mode that you want In the example above Less Than Equal was selected Lu If you select Between A and C for example then the values A and C are included 5 Select the value type that you want For example Database values Gather Digits values or System values Lu You can also enter a filter value manually in the filter value field 6 Select a specific value from the value types drop down menu The values that are available depend on the data source the other elements that precede ore the element in the call flow for example a Gather Digits element and the values that you have set up for your system 340 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services 7 Select a sort mode and enable Descending if you wish the results to be sorted in a descending order When you choose a System Value i
50. Download button to get it from a server Announcements Distribution Lists Faxes Logs NV7100 Direct Voicemail amp g Direct Voicemail Transfer NV7100 External Check v B Connected as Admin For Help press F1 2 Double click a service to open it and start the Service Editor 316 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Announcements in Call Answering Services 3 Select a Play Announcement element and then drag it to the canvas Play DORE K My New Announcemer gt Stop when hey pressed C Play entire message Play Announcement element 4 Select the arrow next to the Play field and select Announcements from the submenu to browse the available announcements folders Play E Announcement 1 2 Play de Database Values Greeting type Announcements gt Announcement Greetings gt AT Temporary Recordings gt Sample UCNS Audio Files Play status message HER MERS Shared Stop when key pressed a _ Play entire message 5 Select the announcement you would like to use Recording Announcements You can create custom announcements to be played on call answering services These announcements can also be copied renamed or deleted according to your needs Custom announcements are created using the Audio Editor shown below After The Tone wav UC Client Audio Editor 10 x File Ed
51. ECS BAS Administrator Guide Assigning a User Identity to an Existing Phone To assign a user identity to an existing phone follow these steps 1 In the Identities summary pane right click the user identity that you want to assign to a phone 2 Select Assign to Phone The Assign Identity to Phone menu appears 3 Enable the Assign to an existing phone button list To view all phones on the network enable the Show all phones check box Wor Only telephones that have available buttons are displayed in the existing phones 4 Select the existing phone to which you want to assign the identity Lu Make sure that the existing phone that you select has at least one available button 5 Select OK Changing the Number of Rings for an Identity To change the number of rings for an identity follow these steps 1 Inthe Identities summary pane right click the identity for which you want to change the number of rings 2 Select Open The Identity menu will appear 3 Inthe Identity menu use the Number of rings drop down menu to select the number of rings that you want for the identity The default number of rings is 4 4 Select OK Removing an Identity To remove an identity follow these steps 1 In the Identities summary pane right click the identity that you want to remove 2 Select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion 132 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide
52. Element on page 304 Enables a service to insert a dual tone multi frequency DTMF tone to the current call Queue Outdial element on page 305 Enables a service to launch an outdial request after a specified period of time Execute Program Element on page 307 Enables a service to launch an external program Wait for Silence Element on page 308 Enables an outdialing service to wait for a period of silence Detect Remote Party Element on page 309 Detects whether a call is answered by a person an answering machine or a fax machine typically during an outdial service Change Voice Element on page 310 Changes the voice used by elements in the service s call flow 288 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc ECS BAS Administrator Guide 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services The Select Extension Page Live Page Recorded and Execute Program elements are available to administrators only and not to PBA users However admininistrator users can create shared services that contain these elements and these services can then be assigned by a PBA user to one of their identities Select Extension Element TA The Select Extension element is typically used in services to be shared g Select Extension b l 1 al y several users By prompting caller Callers can be prompted to enter an extension number using their From telephone keypad When a
53. In all other cases this should be disabled Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server 8 For Query optimization technique select the fastest option available for retrieving messages that your IMAP server will support To determine the appropriate query optimization technique for your IMAP server refer to Determining the Appropriate Query Optimization Technique on page 179 Search custom message headers requires This is the default value Select this mode if you are SEARCH HEADER fastest using Lotus Notes with Indexing turned On Search subject and then check message Select this mode if you are using Gmail or headers GroupWise requires SEARCH SUBJECT No query optimization Select this method only if your IMAP server does not use if SEARCH not supported slowest support the other methods available 9 Select OK Select this mode if you are using Lotus Notes with Indexing turned Off Note If this method is selected then users must be informed of the importance of not storing large numbers of messages in their inbox as this delays message retrieval If you are using Gmail GroupWise or Lotus Notes as your IMAP server then a supported method of retrieving messages has already been determined Select the appropriate query optimization technique noted for your server configuration If you are not using Gmail GroupWise or Lotus Notes as your IMAP server then
54. Interactive Voice Response pre screening etc When callers dial in to the system they can access for example a user extension or the auto attendant or a hunt group You can create a fax identity to receive incoming faxes for a user and direct the faxes to the user s Inbox An identity is associated with a communication system using the following formula identity communication system address Typically an identity is a numeric extension however in SIP an identity can also be alphanumeric Wor You can have the same address on different communication systems For example an identity on SIP can equal 2000 and a communication system extension can be 2000 When you create an identity SIP devices require both a SIP authorization and password to successfully register with NetVanta UC Server SIP registration The SIP authorization and password are associated with a user identity Some phones for example Polycom and ADTRAN branded Polycom phones support 128 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Extensions and Identities automatic configuration When configuring an identity on a SIP telephone that does not support automatic configuration consult the ADTRAN integration notes available from the ADTRAN support community at http supportforums adtran com and manufacturer documentation for the specific configuration for your environment The New Identity Wizard steps
55. Invalid disconnect tone spec s Invalid override spec s in key s Key disconnectType not defined s No key is defined in section s No match pattern are defined in key VS No reason code are defined in key s Pattern length d differs from display length d in pattern s Pattern type d not supported yet System did not receive Caller ID information from the modem and hence could not transmit it to your pager Ensure that your phone rings at least twice before answering otherwise you will not receive Caller ID information The current number of ports has exceeded the number of licensed ports 378 ECS BAS Administrator Guide Possible Causes and Solutions An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and the tag disconnectType has a value of disconnectTone However the required corresponding tag disconnectTone is missing from the same configuration file An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and an In Band Signalling key s match pattern is invalid An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and the tag disconnectType is not present An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and all keys are missing from the section In Band Signalling
56. Name field This name is used as a label to distinguish between different message servers and appears in the list of server names Use the Server drop down menu to select an Exchange Server that has been detected by Net Vanta UC Server The server name is the name of the physical Exchange Server to which the NetVanta UC Server is connected If you are adding a Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 server you must select a server with the CAS role Refer to Selecting a Method for Connecting to Microsoft Exchange Server on page 170 for information on selecting the appropriate Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 server In the Mailbox field enter the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox name for the NetVanta UC Server service account This mailbox is the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox that has special access privileges in Exchange Server oe If you change a mailbox name the corresponding Exchange Server account might also need to be configured If the version of the selected Exchange Server differs from the version in the Version field use the drop down menu to select the appropriate version of Microsoft Exchange Server To select the mailbox from which you want email notification sent enable one of the following System mailbox The email notification appears to come from the configured NetVanta UC Server Exchange Server account User mailbox The email notification appears to come from the user s mailbox Wor The sender information for Exch
57. Number are filled in with the called number The Called ID Name is blank however if the service requires the name of the person being called then it can be passed as a parameter in the request If an error results from running the service then the element exits from the Otherwise pin one If values are not provided for one or more parameters then their default value is blank The server knows when a service has started running however it does not know whether the service was run successfully for example whether the person listened to the message before hanging up Additional parameters can be used to determine whether a service was successful For example the person answering the call might be required to press a number to indicate that they have received the message Processing Outbound Call Requests The custom application initiates the OutDial exe which is a command line utility The OutDial exe logs in to the NetVanta UC Server using the authentication provided or using single sign on The OutDial exe initiates a call request to the NetVanta UC Server according to the parameters specified The utility sends a request to the server identifying the service the phone numbers to call and any additional parameters provided The call request is then placed in the Outbound Call Queue When a call request is added to the call queue then an Outbound Call Processor is created for it The Outbound Call Processor calls the first numb
58. Playback 2 4 Handset Playback To select part of the waveform 1 Left click anywhere in the waveform 2 While still holding down the mouse button drag across the portion of the audio that you want to select one Deselect the waveform by clicking anywhere in the waveform To delete part of an announcement 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Ifthe appropriate voice folder is not displayed in the Announcements navigation pane select the desired voice folder using the steps in Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 3 Inthe Announcements summary pane double click the announcement that contains the part you want to delete The Audio Editor displays the announcement as a waveform After The Tone wav UC Client Audio Editor l x File Edit View Command Process PlayBack Tools Help X BBX BN Hh lem ee RAR ton Hew 2 Connected as Sharon Dos Position 0 00 000 Selection 0 00 000 to 0 00 007 4 From the menu bar select View gt Zoom to Fit All 5 From the toolbar select a 6 On the toolbar select gt Listen to the announcement once or twice to pinpoint the portion of the waveform you want to delete 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 321 Using Announcements in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide 7 Select on the toolbar to stop playback at the point before the par
59. SIP communication system you require only one port to handle multiple simultaneous calls To add a new port so that the NetVanta UC Server answers it 1 Right click anywhere in the summary pane Select New to open the Port menu box In the Name field enter a name for the new port 2 3 4 Inthe Extension field enter the extension number associated with the new port 5 Enable the Enable use of port for check box if you want the NetVanta UC Server to answer calls on that port 6 Enable any of the following check boxes to configure port management e Handset call e Pager notification e Message delivery e message waiting indicator changes e Fax transmission e Port audit 7 Select a communication system from the Pbx drop down menu 8 Select a device from the Device drop down menu Devices are channels on the menuic telephony card Lu Information about the port device that you select appears in the Information section 9 If you select a SIP port enter a port number in the Port number field and choose a protocol from the Protocol drop down menu 10 Select OK 168 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server To edit a port 1 Right click the port that you want to edit 2 Select Open to open a Port menu box that has the name of the port 3 If you want to rename a port enter a new name in the Name field Lu You cannot change the extension
60. UC Server sound card or gateway paging devices it may be necessary to create feature access codes and add them to the paging group as dialable numbers A dialable number is a paging group member type used specifically with feature access codes to allow users to page using the NetVanta UC Server sound card or gateway paging device Feature access codes associated with paging devices cannot be added when creating new paging groups however once a paging group has been created you can edit the paging group and add the feature access codes as dialable numbers For more information on adding a dialable number to an existing paging group refer to Adding a Member to a Paging Group on page 75 Adding a Feature Access Code for Sound Card Paging The following feature access codes already appear in the dial plan by default Sending a live page 75 Sending a recorded page 77 To enable users to send pages using the sound card on the NetVanta UC Server computer add the feature access codes above as dialable numbers in a paging group Users in the paging group can then follow the default instructions for sending a live page using feature access code 72 while the page is sent using the sound card on the NetVanta UC Server computer to the external overhead paging system For more information on adding a dialable number to an existing paging group refer to Adding a Member to a Paging Group on page 75 74 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D EC
61. You can specify that the NetVanta UC Server sorts the rows fetched by the Fetch Data or Dial for Data elements by specifying a sort order in a second Fetch Data element Sorting using an explicit sort defined in a Fetch Data element is always done by the NetVanta UC Server To define ODBC filtering and sorting 1 In the Data Sources content pane double click the ODBC source that you want to define 2 From the Filter Field list select the field that you want to test 3 Inthe Filter Value box type the value that you want to compare to 4 From the Sort Field list select the field that you want to sort 5 From the Sort Order list select one of the following e ascending sorts information in ascending order e descending sorts information in descending order 6 Select OK 332 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services Defining user data sources The User Data Source Editor allows you to create user data tables Display options allow you to define how the user data table is displayed for the user Decide which fields you want to include and how they are sorted and retrieved A user data source is defined once and each user including the Administrator has an individual copy of the table User Data Source MLS x Data source properties Name MLS Description MLS Listings Instructions Enter in your personal MLS listings in the ta
62. You must designate a physical server that hosts the CAS role as the Server If for example the CAS role and Mailbox server role are hosted on separate physical servers the server hosting the CAS role should be designated as the Exchange Server If multiple physical servers host the CAS role in a CAS array any one of these servers can be designated as the Server when configuring the connection NetVanta UC Server does not provide failover for Microsoft Exchange Server configurations with CAS arrays If the CAS server designated as the Server fails NetVanta UC Server will not redirect to another CAS server in the array However CAS arrays do provide failover for remote procedure call RPC client connections to Exchange mailbox databases and database availability groups DAGs Selecting the Exchange Server Version when Using a MAPI Connection NetVanta UC Server can connect to several versions of Exchange Server As of version 5 1 0 NetVanta UC Server automatically detects the version of the Exchange Server connected to the NetVanta UC Server and configures the connection settings accordingly However the administrator can manually override the Exchange Server version selected by NetVanta UC Server using the Version drop down menu of the 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 171 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide Microsoft Exchange Server Configuration window Each time NetVanta UC Server connects t
63. a key for operator access This is the number that callers will press to be transferred to a company receptionist Typically the number 0 is used Wore The operator access key cannot be the same as the NetVanta UC Server access key defined in the next section Setting Voicemail Options on page 27 5 Inthe Operator Identity field enter the operator extension to which callers are transferred when they press the operator access key as defined in step 4 above 6 From the Default mailbox drop down menu select an Exchange mailbox This is the mailbox where voice and fax messages are left for the operator This includes incoming faxes that are sent directly to an attendant service using the Play Announcement element or where a service element does not route them to a user extension The configured mailbox can then redistribute the fax to the appropriate person 7 Select OK 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 33 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Voices for System Announcements The NetVanta UC Server administrator can configure the voices that are used for prerecorded announcements voice mailbox management and voicemail behavior for the Voice Mail element and Personal Assistant mode The properties of a voice combine features of language gender and text to speech TTS For example the English U S Female voice provides audio prompts and TTS spoken in American English by a female speak
64. also share services using the Import Export feature For information about the Import Export feature refer to Importing and Exporting on page 353 To create a service or change information associated with it from the Administrator application e Select the Services navigation bar to open the Services menu Services are displayed in the summary 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 253 Creating Custom Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide pane Net anta UC Client _ Ol x File Edit View Tools Help K a 0 ts e e Bleece X gt e gt Tabs gt Admin Eric Wells Shaun Wel Display Name Identities Class of Service _ _ Locked Out Phones Moc FD Users Admin Phones Eric welis 2003 General Voicemail Pers L Paging Groups Jane Doe 6010 General Voicemail Pers Topics Gateways 3ohn Doe 6000 General Voicemail Summary Ports shaun wells 2004 Pane Ep classes of Service FA authentications MA identities GX Data sources Gy Servers User name Admin Communication Systems Most recent GUI access 9 22 2010 12 30 18 PM TA Netvanta 7000 Series J options TA netvants UC Server J Routing J Services Navigation Pane Services Detail Announcements Pane Navigation Distribution Lists Bars Fares Logs The Admin user profile does not have any associated identities Identitites Pane Connected
65. an existing communication system or delete a communication system To manage communication systems select the Communication Systems menu in the Administration navigation pane Configure a NetVanta UC Server communication system using the Routing and Services categories Configure an existing PBX 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 185 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide connected to the NetVanta UC Server through a gateway using the Options category Net anta UC Client _ ol x File Edit View Tools Help sr tes ee loece X gt e gt el Tabs p Admin Eric wels Shaun Welt Administration 1 Users Phones L Paging Groups Gateways Ports Ep classes of Service FA authentications Ay identities GX Data sources ent Servers User name Admin FR Communication Systems Most recent GUI access 9 22 2010 12 30 18 PM TA Netvanta 7000 Series J options TA netvants UC Server J Routing J Services Display Name Identities Class of Service Locked Out Phones Moc Eric welis 2003 General Voicemail Per Jane Doe 6010 General Voicemail Pers 3ohn Doe 6000 General Voicemail shaun wells 2004 Summary Topics Pane Navigation Pane Services Det ail Announcements Pane Navigation Distribution Lists Bars Fares Logs The Admin user profile does not have any associated identities Identitites Pane
66. and change it Sr If there is information in the Summary field that is incorrect you can select Back to 33 Select Submit to create the new user profile You cannot use the same name extension or mailbox number as another user The extension number cannot be the same as a port extension The NetVanta UC Server displays a warning if any of the above conditions exist and the New User Wizard restarts 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 109 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring User Profiles You can change the following types of user profile information depending on the type of user you have configured for the system e Configuring a user s general information e Configuring a user s message storage e Configuring a user s message waiting indicator e Configuring a user s identity e Configuring a user s phone refer to Configuring SIP Phones on page 146 e Configuring a user s authentications The Messaging tab is unavailable for Active Directory Windows users For information about Active Directory refer to Understanding Active Directory on page 84 For information on how to change and delete user profiles from Active Directory refer to Using the Active Directory Users and Computers Console on page 85 Configuring a user s general information You can change the following types of general user information e User name e Including the user in or removing the
67. and then select Next 4 Enable either of the following and then select Next e All logs exports all call logs e Date range exports call logs from within a range of dates that you specify 5 Select the file type for the call log that you want to export 6 Do either of the following and then select Next e Enter a location for the file in the Save exported file as field e Select Browse to find a location for the file 7 If you want to save the configuration enter a name in the field 8 Select Next to export the log 9 Select Close Lu View the call log files using the appropriate application for example Microsoft Excel Enabling Diagnostic Information During the NetVanta UC Server installation one of the prerequisite components installed was the NetVanta UC Server Logging Tools In the event of errors or problems this tool enables the NetVanta UC Server to automatically generate diagnostic information You can configure the NetVanta UC Server so that this 368 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Troubleshooting diagnostic information is automatically sent to the ADTRAN Technical Support team For information on configuring diagnostic information refer to Configuring Diagnostics System Options on page 43 ADTRAN does not take action in response to the emails received but gathers the data for statistical purposes only to aid in one improving the NetVanta UC Server ADT
68. are unacknowledged errors or warnings you cannot archive or clear log items You must accept the notifications first 4 If you enabled Entries created before a specific date enter the date in the field 5 Select OK To archive a log 1 Right click anywhere in the summary pane 2 Select Archive log 3 Select one of the following e Everything e Entries created before today Entries created before the beginning of the month e Entries created before a specific date If there are unacknowledged errors or warnings you cannot archive or clear log items You must accept the notifications first 4 Ifyou enabled Entries created before a specific date enter the date in the field The new archive is put in the navigation pane as a log with a default title based on the current date E 20020701_0 Log archive 5 Select OK To rename a log archive 1 Select the archive that you want to rename 2 Select Edit gt Rename 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 367 Troubleshooting ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Enter a new name for the archive To delete a log archive 1 Select the archive that you want to delete 2 Select Edit gt Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion To export a call log using the Import Export wizard 1 Select File gt Import Export Wizard and then select Next 2 Select Export Activity Report and then select Next 3 Select the types of logs that you want to export
69. be linked with Active Directory For information about Active Directory refer to Understanding Active Directory on page 84 If you want the new user to be exclusive to the NetVanta UC Server select Local User on the User Type Selection menu This mode allows user information and messaging options to be exclusively controlled by the NetVanta UC Server If the user is a SIP user you can assign a phone If you do not assign a phone to a new user you can use the Phones pane to do so later If you assign a new user to a phone that does not have buttons available the last user that was assigned to the phone is no longer associated with it To avoid this problem do not assign new users to telephones that do not have at least one available button 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 101 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide With the New User Wizard you can do the following tasks To 1 2 3 4 To 1 2 Create a new user Create initial passwords for accessing the new user profile either over a telephone or from a computer Associate the user to a message store for voice or fax messages Associate the user with an identifying number for example an extension number Define the call answering behavior start the New User Wizard In the Administration navigation pane select Users Right click anywhere in the Users summary pane Select New Select Next to begin create a Windows user Follow all the steps in T
70. because identities have a display name but not a first and last name an entry s first name and last name are derived from the display name using the following rules e Ifthe display name contains exactly two words the first name will be the first word and the last name will be the second word e Ifthe display name contains only one word the first name will be empty and the last name will be the full display name e Ifthe display name contains three or more words the first name will be all words except the last word and the last name with be the last word 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 141 Managing User Extensions and Identities ECS BAS Administrator Guide For display names ending with the titles Jr or Sr the above rules for deriving the first name and last name may not be ideal For example for the display name John Doe Jr the first name will be John Doe and the last name will be Jr Consequently searching for Doe will not return John Doe Jr To work around this issue the last name used in the display name should be hyphenated for example John Doe Jr Including an Identity in the Global Phone Directory To include an identity in the Global Phone Directory follow these steps 1 In the Identities summary pane select one or more identities and right click on the highlighted identity or identities 2 Select Global Phone Directory gt Include in Global Phone Directory Excluding an Identity in the Glob
71. caller enters a valid extension number the call is routed to the next element in the call flow Valid extension Alternatively an extension number can be selected based on some I On single digit information automatically provided such as the called number or the caller ID number The call information provided is compared to information in a database and the call is routed accordingly The Select Extension element validates the information provided For example if you use the Voicemail element and choose Selected Extension within the Voicemail element then you must have a Select Extension element in the service to provide the selected extension number Otherwise You can use the Select Extension element to change the Select Extension system value to a different identity number The element also changes the Selected User Name system value to the user name associated with the new valid identity number The Select Extension element works with several elements including the Manage Mailbox Verify Password and Take Message elements and generally works with any element that can reference system values You can select an identity number from a Data Source value using the Database Values mode To access this mode first select the From button then select the value selector gt and select Database Values When using this mode you must include a database element for example Fetch Data Dial for Data Move Current Row or Pro
72. callers into specific queues For example if you have dedicated numbers for each of sales and support your dial plan entries can simply direct callers to the appropriate queue based on the number they dialed Use attendant services to route incoming calls to a queue based on information provided by callers which then is gathered by a service This is useful when you want to route callers to a queue based on information the caller provides For example the service can ask the caller to provide a customer number and based on 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 61 Routing and Restricting Calls ECS BAS Administrator Guide that number route the caller to the most appropriate queue particularly when there is a single called number but several queues are available on the system Calls are distributed to the most idle agent When at least one agent is logged into the agent group the caller hears an introductory queue greeting When no agents are logged in the caller hears that agents are currently not available The call waits in the queue for a specified period of time the default is five minutes for an available agent and if an agent does not answer the call the call takes the specified overflow behavior Calls to the queue cannot be recorded or monitored Lu The maximum number of agents that can log in to a queue at the same time is 64 If no agent the call overflows to the NetVanta UC Server Direct into queue 8 appl
73. can assign a fax identity to a new user using the New User Wizard by entering a Direct Inward Dial DID fax number for the user Alternatively you can create a fax identity for an existing user using the New Identity Wizard and selecting the Receive Fax mode Either method has the same result in that the fax number or address entered is configured to receive incoming faxes and incoming faxes are directed to the user s Inbox Wor You cannot configure or delete a user DID fax attendant using the identities menu You must manage fax attendants using the Users menu The options available for an attendant identity depend on the type of user selected Admin and Personal Business Assistant PBA users can be configured to run a service The PBA and Personal Assistant PA users can be configured to receive faxes in their mailbox For information about selecting a voice for system announcements or the order in which Lu callers enter a name either first or last refer to Setting Auto Attendant and System Announcement Options on page 33 Configuring an Attendant Identity To configure an attendant identity follow these steps 1 Right click anywhere in the Identities summary pane 2 Select Create Identity to display the New Identity Wizard menu 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 133 Managing User Extensions and Identities ECS BAS Administrator Guide 10 11 Select Next to proceed In the Select Identity Typ
74. can create dial plan entries that automatically route several 62 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Routing and Restricting Calls called numbers into the same queue For example the called number 2170 is always directed to the support queue The company decides to add a 1 800 support number which also must go to the same queue You can create dial plan entries that route calls from either number into the same queue Decide whether you need an attendant service to route incoming calls to the appropriate queue or if a dial plan entry is sufficient Whether you use an attendant service and a dial plan entry to route calls to a queue or only a dial plan entry you must determine where the call goes when no queue agent is available If there is no service to direct overflow behavior the caller receives an error message that the number entered is invalid Create an attendant identity for overflow calls and then assign a service to it Configuring overflow calls to queues To configure the overflow behavior you must create an attendant identity having the same number as the dial plan used to create the queue and a service for the identity to determine the call flow actions to take For example this service can allow the caller to leave a message in a voicemail box or provide more complex actions such as using caller information or collecting more information from the caller to use database lookups to deter
75. configure gateways ports servers and communication systems from the Administration navigation bar Configuring Gateways The gateways section allows you to define a gateway including its host name or IP address device type and description with each gateway on the system Enter information for each of the gateways that are configured on the communication system server A gateway allows callers to phone people that are external to the NetVanta UC Server through PSTN gateways Internet Telephony Service Providers ITSPs and SIP Peers Gateways are available from many different vendors Wor Make sure to consult ADTRAN integration notes and manufacturers documentation for each gateway on the system To configure PSTN gateways Enter the host name for the PSTN gateway To configure SIP Peers 1 Enter the host name for the SIP Peer This is the current IP address or DNS name of the host 2 Enter the port number This has a default value of 12555 which is suitable for most networks To create a gateway group 1 From the Available gateways list select a gateway and select Add to add the gateway to the gateway group 2 Repeat the step above until you have added all the gateways you want to your gateway group 3 Select Next when you have finished creating your gateway group 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 165 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide To configure the gateway 1
76. domains are domains for which the server supports the creation of Windows users and authentications based on profiles on those domains The server also supports single sign on only for profiles in active domains The server s local domain is always an active domain Active domains must have a trust relationship with the server s local domain A trust relationship is a logical relationship established between domains to allow authentication and authorization to shared resources The authentication process verifies the identity of the user and the authorization process determines what the user is allowed to do on a computer system or network r Active domains are only relevant to systems integrated with Active Directory For more information on Active Directory refer to Integrating with Active Directory on page 83 To specify active domains 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Active Domains tab 3 From the Trusted Domains field select the trusted domain that you want to specify as an active domain 4 Select the Select gt gt button The trusted domain appears in the Active Domains field 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the trusted domains that you want appear in the Active Domains field 6 Select OK To remove an active domain from the list 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Active Domains tab 3 From the Acti
77. down menu select the NetVanta UC Server for which you want to configure this user 2 Check Enable Unified Communications Server for this user to link the NetVanta UC Server user to their Windows Active Directory profile The user profile information is now available Changing user profiles from Active Directory You can change the following types of user profile information depending on the type of user you have configured for the system e General user information e User messaging information e User s phone and identities e User authentications You can change general user information from Active Directory including resetting a user s PIN Users enter a PIN when they access their mailbox using the telephone You can reset a user s PIN if the user forgets it or for added security NetVanta UC Server user profile information includes the first last and display name of the user as well as the option to include the user in the dial by name directory You can specify the call answering mode either Personal Assistant PA or Personal Business Assistant PBA e The PA user is the default call answering mode and includes access to all of the standard voicemail features e The PBA user has access to more advanced features and is for users who want to create personalized services and announcements You can also specify the operator for the user either System or Personal Callers are directed to an operator 619510001 1D Cop
78. e Description 8 Select OK 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 55 Routing and Restricting Calls ECS BAS Administrator Guide To edit an existing toll restriction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 In the Administration navigation pane double click Communication Systems to open the communication system options Double click the communication system for which you want to edit an existing toll restriction Select Routing Right click the toll restriction that you want to edit Select Edit Change the toll restriction information that you want Select OK To delete a toll restriction 1 a Fr oe In the Administration navigation pane double click Communication Systems to open the communication system options Double click the communication system for which you want to delete a toll restriction Select Routing Right click the toll restriction that you want delete Select Delete Allowing and restricting access to paging Access to all types of paging is disabled by default for all users However you can modify toll restrictions using regular expressions to enable selected users to send pages For more information on toll restrictions refer to Allowing and Restricting Long Distance and Other Calls on page 53 For more information on using regular expressions refer to Using regular expressions to route and restrict calls on page 52 The first three examples in the table below show how to allow and restrict access
79. editable and might have a different title 4 Select Close to close the table To change information in a user data table 1 Inthe Data Sources content pane right click the user data source that you want to change Select Edit to open the user data source Select the field value that you want to change to open a new window 2 3 4 Inthe new window type the change 5 Select outside the window to close it 6 Select Close to close the table To delete a row in a user data table 1 Inthe Data Sources content pane right click the user data source in which you want to delete a row 2 Select Edit to open the user data source 3 Select the row that you want to delete 4 Select the Delete button 5 Select Close to close the table 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 337 Using Databases in Call Answering Services Data Type Definitions ECS BAS Administrator Guide Data Type Value Examples Text A string of characters 123 Maple Avenue Number A number with optional sign decimal places and commas 160 000 00 Logical A string whose value can be only true false 1 or 0 The True numbers 1 and 0 correspond to true and false False respectively 1 0 Phone Number Any string that can be parsed as a phone number into 1 613 555 1212 canonical form 6135551212 A canonical telephone number represents a dialable number that can be understood and interpreted around the world for example Country Code
80. ee wee de E 49 Allowing and Restricting Long Distance and Other Calls 53 Routing Calls to QUCUCS 1 teens 59 4 Configuring Paging 2 cee Gauss PU Sav ea Ge feeds Gel ioe da Eee da Ae 69 Configuring a Paging Device 69 Creating and Configuring Paging Groups 73 Configuring Hands Free Auto Answer Paging 77 Enabling Users to Access Paging 81 5 Integrating with Active Directory 83 OVERVIOWS cst a ly head AUN oe cee A eal aan ala oat ene dre ner diam Sakae a aas 83 Understanding Active Directory 84 Using the Active Directory Users and Computers Console 85 6 Managing User Profiles 0 cee ee tenes 97 OVERVIEW SA AU a anc a it dle at dote dde teint A fathers Suit Med 97 Creating User Profiles 2 99 Changing Users to Local or Windows Users 99 Using the New User Wizard 101 Configuring User Profiles 110 Enabling Access to User Profiles using Authentications 123 Managing User Profiles from EBS
81. from the drop down menu 5 Select the New Value column to specify a value for the field 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 347 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide 6 Enter a value or select the value selector gt in the blank new value field 7 Select anywhere outside the new value field 8 Repeat steps 2 to 7 to add more fields to the Field Assignments list To delete a field assignment for the Add Data element 1 Right click the Field column of the field assignment that you want to delete 2 Press Delete Delete Data element The Delete Data element allows callers to delete data in a specified data source Delete Data element If some rows are deleted successfully the caller exits the Source connector pin If no rows are deleted the caller exits the No rows deleted connector pin If any other condition exists the caller exits the Otherwise connector pin For information about specifying data sources filter fields and values refer to Using the Data Source Selector on page 339 For security reasons when including a Delete Data element in a service you might want to put a Verify Password element before it Make sure that you specify exactly the UT data that you want to make available for deletion For example if you do not include a 7 filter field and value all rows are deleted 348 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrat
82. in the Servers summary pane 2 Inthe drop down menu select New gt Trusted UC Server The Trusted UC Server window will appear 3 Inthe Name field enter the desired name for the remote NetVanta UC Server to which you which you want to establish a trusted connection 4 In the Location field enter the IP address or FQDN of the remote NetVanta UC Server to which you want to establish a trusted connection 5 Select OK 6 The Status of the connection will appear in the Servers summary pane as Unauthenticated Click Invite menu item to start authentication You must now invite the remote NetVanta UC Server to establish a trusted connection To invite the Trusted UC Server 1 Inthe Servers summary pane right click the Trusted UC Server entry you created in the previous section 2 Inthe drop down menu select Invite 3 The Status of the connection will appear in the Servers summary pane as Invite sent Waiting for Accept from lt remote UC Server gt where lt remote UC Server gt is the Name you assigned the remote NetVanta UC Server in the previous section The remote server must now accept the invitation in order to establish a trusted connection between the two NetVanta UC Servers To accept an invitation from a remote NetVanta UC Server If the local NetVanta UC Server has received an invitation to establish a trusted connection from a remote NetVanta UC Server the remote server will appear in the Servers summary pane with
83. maximum number of failed attempts during the specified tracking time the user is locked out of the system until the tracking time expires The account lockout feature does not apply to Windows authentications The following table describes the settings available in the Account lockout section of the Security tab Enable automatic lockout Locks users out of their accounts after they exceed the specified number of accounts of failed login attempts By default automatic lockout of accounts is enabled Number of failed attempts Specifies the number of failed login attempts allowed before a lockout before lockout occurs By default lockout occurs after 10 failed attempts The valid attempt range is 1 to 99 Failed attempt tracking Specifies the time period in which failed attempts are logged and counted period minutes against the maximum allowed number of failed attempts When this time period elapses the tracked number of failed attempts is reset and begins again By default login attempts are tracked for 30 minutes The valid tracking range is 1 to 525600 minutes one year Password and PIN Rules Administrators can specify the rules to which users must adhere when configuring their passwords and PINs for logging into their voice mailbox These password and PIN rules revolve around enforcing a certain level of complexity when defining passwords and PINs defining minimum and maximum lengths for both the password an
84. messages the message waiting indicator on their desk phone may continue to flash However mailbox monitoring can however negatively impact system performance Therefore you may want to enable mailbox monitoring only for those users who require it The mailbox monitoring options are as follows Enable mailbox monitoring Opens the Exchange Server mailboxes of selected users at system start up The NetVanta UC Server monitors each mailbox for changes such as a new message has arrived or is read or a message is marked as read or unread This applies only to the Inbox other folders are not monitored When a user accesses messages through Outlook Web Access or a mobile device depending on the message waiting indicator MWI settings selected the MWI turns on or off accordingly Default setting for users If mailbox monitoring is enabled then this mode turns mailbox monitoring for users on or off by default Mailbox monitoring works in conjunction with the MWI options set For example the MWI options determine if the message waiting indicator is turned off when the first message is read or when all new messages have been read For more information refer Lu to Configuring Message Waiting Indicator Options on page 24 For information on troubleshooting message waiting indicators refer to Troubleshooting Message Waiting Indicators on page 359 If mailbox monitoring is enabled you can also configure mailbox monitoring for Lu indivi
85. navigating to Start gt All Programs gt ADTRAN gt NetVanta UC Server Configuration Wizard You will be prompted for your user name and password before you can select the Users wizard 158 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Classes of Service 2 On the wizard Welcome menu select Next Proceed through the steps of the Users wizard entering the appropriate user import method file location etc Regardless of whether you import users from Microsoft Exchange a text based file or manually enter them you have the option to select from a Class of service drop down menu a CoS to apply to the users as you add them Once you have selected the correct CoS for the imported users follow the remaining steps in the Users wizard to add these users to the system When you have completed importing the users their information and CoS type appears in the Users summary pane For more informaiton on using the Users wizard refer to the NetVanta Unified Communications Server Configuration Guide for your version of NetVanta UC Server available from the ADTRAN support community https supportforums adtran com Configuring a Phone CoS The phone CoS feature is used to quickly apply common attributes to one or more phones For example it can be used to configure multiple phones to register with a secondary NetVanta UC Server or a SIP proxy server to allow failover support in Business Continuity installati
86. not make any assumptions about the order For example assume that you have a data source with a Date field and that each row in the data source has a unique date value If the data source defines a sort order based on this Date field and descending order then any Fetch Data element that fetches from the data source will retrieve rows in descending date order In this case the sort order produced by ODBC is the same as the sort order defined by the NetVanta UC Server data type If a Fetch Data element fetches multiple rows then the first row will be the row in the fetched set of rows with the newest value in the Date field Thus another element referencing this Fetch Data element would always reference the newest row Without the sort you cannot predict which row in the retrieved set would be first In another example a data source containing a field defined to be a character string is defined as Day of Week in the ODBC data source A sort order would return the values by character comparison resulting in the following order Friday Monday Saturday Sunday Thursday Tuesday and Wednesday Day of Week in the NetVanta UC Server would return the results in the following order Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday and Saturday Thus the actual sort order as produced by ODBC is not the same as the order that you would get from sorting using the NetVanta UC Server data type Defining a sort order using the NetVanta UC Server
87. note available from the ADTRAN Support Community at https supportforums adtran com Configuring Multicast Paging Multicasting is a method of distributing single streams of audio or video broadcasts to thousands of endpoints simultaneously Multicasting is used in paging applications to conserve bandwidth while distributing audio pages to several endpoints For a large paging deployment with several endpoints multicasting is the recommended method because it reduces PBX performance issues Multicast paging can be used for both phone handset and overhead paging and is typically used for large paging deployments You can send live pages over the phone to a selected group of users who receive the page either over their phone through overhead speakers or both You can also send live or recorded pages from call answering services Multicast support also enables sending pages to multiple paging groups or zones Multicast paging is currently only supported using speakers and phone handsets that support multicasting and requires some manual configuration For information on ore devices that support multicasting refer to the NetVanta UC Server Interoperable SIP Device Features and Comparisons technical note available from the ADTRAN Support Community https supportforums adtran com Lu Multicast paging may require additional licensing Requirements for Multicast Paging across Multiple Subnets In order to forward mul
88. notification settings that are configured for Active Message Delivery Email Notification or Pager Notification The settings of each of these options apply equally for voice and fax messages Personal Business Assistant PBA users can have an identity specifically dedicated to receiving faxes using a direct inward dial DID number and a custom service that defines the behavior when a fax is received Alternatively PBA users can receive faxes on a shared voice and fax identity but they are not automatically notified of incoming faxes In order to receive notifications that a fax has been received a Receive Fax service must be created The user or the administrator can create a Receive Fax service using the Receive Fax element For more information on creating a Receive Fax service refer to Receive Fax element on page 284 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 231 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide 232 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Creating Distribution Lists 13 Creating Distribution Lists Overview You can use the Distribution Lists menu to create and manage system distribution lists Distribution lists allow users to send voice and fax messages to groups of users Users can create their own distribution lists but cannot edit system distribution lists Two folders are included with the Administrator application Everyone and System The Everyone folder contains all the users
89. of parameters to be passed to the application e The computer credentials to be used by the application Refer to the programs sample xml file for more information on how to edit the configuration file RE The NetVanta UC Server monitors the configuration file for changes so any configuration changes are automatically recognized Requirements 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 307 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide The configuration file must be called the following programs xml In order for the file to be used by the Application Services the configuration file must be stored in the following folder Data System If the NetVanta UC Server was installed in the default location then the path is C Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Data System To use the Execute Program element 1 From the Execute Program element select a program to execute from the drop down menu provided If your application does not appear in the drop down menu provided then you must configure the configuration file on the server 2 Enter the command line parameter names and values as required by the program selected Quotes will be inserted if necessary at run time e The call flow exits through the Parameters connector pin if the return code from executing the selected program is zero e The call flow exits through the Execution failure connector pin if the program executes but retur
90. off by default 8 After configuring the Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 SP1 the summary pane shows the connection state of the Exchange Server The connection state will appear as Disconnected if the service account has no mailbox or if the service account lacks permissions to access the Exchange Server For instructions on configuring a NetVanta UC Server service account mailbox refer to Appendix A of the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Guide available from the ADTRAN Support Community https supportforums adtran com For instructions on configuring permissions for the NetVanta UC Server service account refer to Configuring Microsoft Exchange 2007 and 2010 Permissions for Integration with NetVanta UC Server available from the ADTRAN Support Community https supportforums adtran com Configuring IMAP Server IMAP is a method of accessing and storing email messages The NetVanta UC Server can integrate with IMAP version 4 revision 1 servers conforming to RFC 2060 For more information on IMAP version 4 revision 1 refer to www ietf org rfc rfc2060 txt Add an IMAP server when you need to integrate the server with Lotus Notes Lotus Domino Novell GroupWise Google Gmail or other servers The NetVanta UC Server can use mailboxes on an IMAP server to store voice and fax messages in order to provide users with unified messaging functionality In addition users licensed for text to speech TTS can listen to their email messages f
91. on page 165 Before you create a user profile 1 Connect the new user s telephone to the manufacturer s PBX according to the manufacturer s instructions 2 If you want to create a unified communications mailbox then you must first create an email account for the new user for example an Exchange mailbox If you do not want to create a unified communications mailbox then you can create a local mailbox for users After you connect the new user s telephone to the PBX and computer to the server you can create a NetVanta UC Server user profile There are three types of message store for which you can create user profiles local message store Exchange and IMAP IMAP is the preferred configuration for Lotus Notes The New User Wizard is dynamic and prompts you for different information depending on the choices that you make when configuring the new user For example Active Lu Directory authentication extension numbers message store Exchange Integrated Messaging Voice Mail or IMAP4 The procedures below are only a few of the possible wizard menus that you might view when creating a user profile The type of message store that you choose depends on where you want to store the new user s messages Choosing Exchange means that the user s messages and personal contacts are all stored on the Exchange server Choosing local message store means that the user s messages and Outlook contacts are stored locally on the NetV
92. on page 302 To create a paging group 1 In the Administration navigation pane double click on Paging Groups and select New Paging Group 2 Select Next at the Welcome menu The Paging Group Details menu appears 3 Inthe Paging Group Details menu enter a name for the paging group in the Name field for example Everyone 4 Enter a description of the paging group in the Description field for example All employees contractors and service phones 5 Inthe Number field enter a paging number that will uniquely identify the paging group 6 Enter the maximum wait time in seconds in the Maximum wait field This is the amount of time that will elapse after the paging device answers the call before starting the page The default Maximum wait time is 2000 ms 7 Enable the check box if you want an audio prompt sent to paging group members prior to sending a page If you enable this check box then users will hear a beep over their phone or over an overhead speaker prior to hearing a page 8 Select Next The Select Identites menu will appear 9 In the Select Identites menu enable all user identities that you want to be included in the paging group using the check boxes next to the identity extension in the Address column and select Next The Select Phones menu will appear 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 73 Configuring Paging ECS BAS Administrator Guide 10 In the Select Phones menu you can select specifi
93. page 280 Enables you to send a message to a pager number Send Email element on page 280 Allows you to be notified by email when a caller moves successfully through the Send Email element Send Fax element on page 282 Allows you to send a list of faxes Receive Fax element on page 284 Receives a fax and places it in a mailbox Fax on demand element on page 286 Captures a caller s number and faxes the selected document to a caller Ry Hang up Element sr 2 2 268 The Dial by Extension and Dial by Name elements are available only to Administrators and not to Personal Business Assistant PBA users The Hang up element terminates the current incoming call If a call is present this element terminates the call The same result occurs if a call flow leads to an unconnected connector pin Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Play One time Message Element Including the Play One time Message element in a service allows you to leave a personalized message for a specific caller Once a message has played the call flow follows the Message played connection Calls for which there is no customized message follow the No message for current caller connection Enable the Stop when key pressed button to stop the message when the caller presses a key Enable the Play entire message button to make sure that the ca
94. pane right click the user name that you want to add an identity to 2 Select Open to open the User menu box 3 Select the Identities tab 4 Select Add to add an identity to the user profile 5 Select OK To delete an identity from an existing user profile 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name that you want to delete an identity from Select Open to open the User menu box Select the Identities tab Select the trash can qi 2 3 4 Select the identity that you want to delete 5 6 Select OK Configuring a user s authentications An authentication is a means by which a person can access the system for example a user name or password Many user profiles can have many authentications and vice versa Therefore when an authentication is used to access the NetVanta UC Server the user might have access to several user profiles each with several identities For more information about managing authentications using the 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 119 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide Authentications user pane refer to Enabling Access to User Profiles using Authentications on page 123 General Messaging Message Waiting Light Identities Phones Authentication Authentiations EN Select primary authentication salty Wise Admin Authorization for Primary Authentication The primary authentication is the main authentication that owns the user profile W
95. phone to the network the IP address for the phone will automatically appear in the Phones summary pane Description Optional Enter a description for the phone to distinguish it from other phones on the network Phone type Specifies the brand and model of the phone you are configuring Choose a phone type from the options available in the list Number of buttons The number of buttons is displayed automatically based on the phone type that you choose Number of lines The number of lines is displayed automatically based on the phone type that you choose Number of expansion module buttons The number of expansion module buttons is displayed automatically based on the expansion module added to the phone 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 145 Installing and Configuring SIP Phones ECS BAS Administrator Guide Phone class of service The phone class of service CoS to which you want the phone to belong The phone CoS determines whether the phone registers to a secondary NetVanta UC Server if one exists and if the phone is capable of secondary registration or a SIP proxy server Advanced connection The options under this heading are available if the Phone class of service options is set to lt None gt Enable secondary Used with Business Continuity Specifies that the phone will register with registration both the primary and secondary NetVanta UC Servers A secondary server must be configured
96. pickup feature you can pick up that call on your desk phone without the caller being aware that you changed phones rg For more information on mobile twinning refer to Configuring Mobile Twinning Using a Ring Group Identity on page 137 The benefits of using connected call pickup include using one phone number and multiple devices to be accessible to callers while minimizing costs by then transferring calls to your internal extension or to another land line phone To pick up a connected call the called number must go through the NetVanta UC Server That is the call must be transferred forwarded or twinned to your alternate phone number for example e Calls can be made directly from another extension to your alternate phone number e Calls can be transferred by internal users to your alternate phone number e Calls can be transferred using the Transfer Call options available from your Personal Assistant or Personal Business Assistant to your alternate number e Using mobile twinning calls can ring your alternate phone number and your internal extension simultaneously Unless you configured this mode differently you must know the phone number of the phone that answered the call that is the extension number or the external telephone number in order to pickup the connected call Your phone must be able to receive another call that is e A line must be available e Do not disturb DND must be disabled e Call forwardin
97. presents a new call Answer the new call to speak to the parked caller call on system park Wor If no one answers the parked call the call rings the extension that originally put the Parking Calls and Picking up Parked Calls Using Park Zone Button Calls can be parked and picked using park buttons configured on your phone by your system administrator 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 199 Using SIP Telephones ECS BAS Administrator Guide Each park button is assigned to a single Park Zone and Park Zones are shared among users in NetVanta UC Server For example if a user parks a call in Park Zone 1 using either a park button assigned to Park Zone or the 99 access code another user can retrieve the parked call from Park Zone 1 using a park button assigned to Park Zone 1 on their phone re If there is more than one identity is assigned to your phone then Transfer the call instead of putting it on hold Because each park button is assigned to a specific Park Zone users can only use park re buttons to retrieve calls from Park Zones associated with their phone s park buttons For example a park button assigned to Park Zone 1 cannot be used to retrieve a call parked in Park Zone 2 To park a call using a park button During a call press a park button The call will be parked in the Park Zone associated with the park button and the button indicator will change from idle to busy When parking a ca
98. proceed to the following section Determining the Appropriate Query Optimization Technique on page 179 to determine the optimal settings If you select a search method that is not supported for your IMAP server then the NetVanta UC Server first tries the selected method If the selected search method returns an IMAP protocol error to the NetVanta UC Server then the NetVanta UC Server automatically falls back to the No query optimization method and tries again While this method will function with all server configurations IMAP server performance may be affected and message retrieval may be delayed as the selected method is attempted and fails and then the slowest method is implemented Select the fastest method that is supported by your server configuration to minimize message retrieval delays Determining the Appropriate Query Optimization Technique Ry If you are using Gmail GroupWise or Lotus Notes as your IMAP server then a supported method of retrieving messages has already been determined and you do not need to follow the steps below If you are not using Gmail GroupWise or Lotus Notes as your IMAP server then follow the steps below to determine the optimal settings IMAP servers vary in the methods they support for retrieving a user s voice and fax messages and the speed at which they retrieve such messages The procedures below involve selecting the fastest retrieval method first and testing the results to determine whe
99. real time view of the system activity A port represents an active call into the NetVanta UC Server and allows you handle incoming calls and personalized communication services You can view the following types of port activity Incoming calls e voice and fax e includes calling line ID if available 166 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide e Outgoing calls e handset playback e port auditing e Outgoing faxes Configuring the NetVanta UC Server A port represents a physical resource and associated hardware in the attached communication system You can add and manage ports only if a communication system already exists For information about managing communication systems refer to Configuring Communication Systems on page 185 The NetVanta UC Server can connect to multiple communication systems at the same time provided the integration hardware and software components support it For example the NetVanta UC Server can simultaneously support the integrated SIP server and Avaya IP Office To manage ports in the navigation pane select the Ports folder Port names are displayed in the summary MM gt e 0l l pane Net anta UC Client File Edit View Tools Help Tabs Admin Eric wels Shaun Welt Administration FD Users BY Phones L Paging Groups Gateways Topics p Ports I classes of Service FA authentications RA identities Data Sources Gy Servers G Comm
100. request To configure gateway paging 1 Connect the paging system to the gateway 2 Configure the dial plan on the gateway so that calls to the gateway are directed to the FXO or FXS port 3 For FXS gateways create a new identity On the gateway configure registration for the new identity For more information refer to User Identities on page 130 72 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Paging 4 For FXO gateways configure a dial plan on the NetVanta UC Server For more information refer to Routing calls using the dial plan on page 49 For information on configuring gateways refer to the appropriate technical note for one your gateway For the latest technical notes refer to the ADTRAN Support Community at htto supportforums adtran com Creating and Configuring Paging Groups Before sending a page you must create a paging group to indicate who receives the page You can select users to be members of a paging group by selecting identities or by selecting specific phones You can also select multicast IP addresses to be members of a paging group however this is currently only supported using phones and speakers that support multicasting and requires some manual configuration For information on using paging refer to Paging on page 197 For information on Lu sending live or prerecorded pages using services refer to Page Live Element on page 301 and Page Recorded Element
101. ring group When a call comes in the call rings simultaneously at each agent s phone so that any available agent can take the call Hunt Group A hunt group is a group of identities that are contacted in sequential order when a call comes in until the call is answered For example a customer service department might have several agents in a hunt group If the first agent does not answer the call after the specified number of rings then the call is forwarded to the next agent in the group until the call is answered When you add an external number to a group identity it is automatically associated with one of your external gateways To support the feature the external SIP PSTN gateway must provide Answer Supervision Answer Supervision is the ability for the phone company to signal that the remote party has answered the call For information about your gateway s ability to provide Answer Supervision refer to the documentation provided with your gateway If you add an external number to a ring group or hunt group and your gateway does not one support true answer supervision the group stops presenting the call to all the other internal extension numbers and rings only the external telephone number Configuring a New Ring Group or Hunt Group Identity To configure a new ring group or hunt group identity follow these steps 1 Right click anywhere in the Identities summary pane 2 Select Create Identity to display the New Id
102. start up This applies only to the Inbox and other folders are not monitored When the user accesses messages through Outlook Web Access or through a mobile device the message waiting indicator synchronizes accordingly 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 115 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide Disabled If mailbox monitoring is disabled then when the user accesses messages through Outlook Web Access or through a mobile device the message waiting indicator does not synchronize accordingly The message waiting indicator turns on when a new message arrives and it is managed according to the message waiting indicator options set when messages are accessed through the regular Outlook client To configure a user s message storage 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select Users 2 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user whose information you want to change and select Open 3 Inthe Edit User menu box select Messaging 4 Select an email storage type from the drop down menu available selected or The options that appear on the Messaging tab depend on the Email Storage type To store a user s messages locally 1 On the Messaging tab for Email Storage select Local Message Store 2 Select the Enable integrated messaging client check box if you want the user to have access to integrated messaging Integrated messaging adds a Mailboxes navigation bar to a user s NetVanta UC Client Th
103. that are configured for the system You cannot add a new folder to the Everyone folder Using System Distribution Lists You can use the System folder to add new distribution lists to the system and then add edit and delete users from the distribution lists You can record an audio identifier for a system distribution list To record an audio identifier for a distribution list 1 Inthe content pane right click the system distribution list for which you want to record an audio identifier and select Record Identifier In the Audio Identifier section select the Record button Make sure that the desired audio device is selected Select e If you are using your telephone wait for the beep before you begin to record mo o amp o pP Select when you are finished If you used your telephone microphone you can hang up the phone or press the Release button on the phone to end the recording 6 Select gt to hear the recording 7 Select OK to keep the recording Using Personal Distribution Lists Use the Personal folder to create distribution lists and then add edit and delete users from the distribution lists You can also record an audio identifier for a personal distribution list To create a new distribution list folder 1 Select the Distribution Lists navigation bar to open the distribution lists menu 2 Right click the System folder 3 Inthe right summary pane right click and select New gt Distribution List
104. that the mailboxes are on In some cases such as Gmail this may point to a proxy instead Enter a port number in the Port number field The port number is the Internet protocol port number of the IMAP service on the target server The default port number for IMAP servers is 143 If you want the messages that users delete to be permanently deleted from the server enable the Permanently delete messages flagged for deletion check box Some IMAP servers may require this to be set in order for messages to actually be removed from menu in the user s email client By default when messages are deleted from an IMAP server they are only marked for deletion Enabling this mode causes deleted messages to be removed from the mailbox after a message is marked for deletion by the NetVanta UC Server With some IMAP servers user s may still see messages in their mailbox after deleting them using the telephone user interface TUTI If this is the case then enabling this mode should resolve this issue If you want to disable message waiting indicators enable the Disable message waiting indicators check box Disable the message waiting indicators if you do not have a compatible mail client installed with the NetVanta UC Server voice forms If you are using Lotus Notes or Lotus Domino then enable message waiting indicators if client integration is installed otherwise if you are not using NetVanta UC Server client forms then disable the message waiting indicators
105. the NetVanta UC Server Trial order Query optimization technique Description Search subject and then check message This method first searches the Subject headers header for voice and fax messages Of those messages retrieved the message headers are requires SEARCH SUBJECT then checked for the custom voice and fax message headers No query optimization This method does not use a query so all messages have information retrieved from use if SEARCH not supported slowest the IMAP server and all messages are then searched to retrieve the voice and fax messages All IMAP servers support this method but use this method only if SEARCH is not supported Note This method will be notably slower if there are a large number of messages in a user s inbox as all messages have header information retrieved and searched If this method is selected then users must be informed of the importance of not storing large numbers of messages in their inbox 4 Select OK If you select a method that is not supported by your IMAP server then when the SEARCH operation returns an IMAP protocol error to the NetVanta UC Server the NetVanta UC Server automatically falls back to the No query optimization method and tries again While the No query optimization method functions with all IMAP servers it is the slowest method and it will be slowed further if another method is selected and then Lu fails before the No query optimization m
106. the NetVanta UC Server to send diagnostic notifications 1 2 3 44 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Diagnostics System Options tab In the Diagnostic notifications section check the Enable check box Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options 4 Type an email address in the Email address field where you want to send the diagnostic notifications You can enter multiple email addresses separated by semicolons 5 Select OK To specify the port auditing interval 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Diagnostics System Options tab 3 Inthe Port auditing section check the Enable check box 4 In the Audit interval field enter the number of minutes that you want to elapse between port audits default is 5 minutes Wor The port auditing interval cannot be less than one minute or more than 60 minutes The 5 Select OK Setting Mail Server Message Buffering The servers temporarily cache voice and fax messages when the mail server is not available possibly because of a power outage or network problems You can specify the maximum number of voice and fax messages that are cached on the mail server the maximum period that is attempted to deliver the messages to the email server after that period the administrator might restart the server to continue deliv
107. the prefix that is applied to specified outgoing telephone numbers To specify advanced dialing rules for outgoing calls 1 2 3 4 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Dialing tab Select the Advanced button Select New to specify a set of advanced dialing rules 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 39 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 Type an area code in the Area Code field 6 Choose one of the following e All office codes the advanced dialing rules apply to all office codes e Specific office codes the advanced dialing rules apply to the office codes that you specify 7 If you enable the Specific office codes button enter the office code in the office code field and then select OK 8 Select Add to enter an additional specific office code 9 Select OK To specify the prefix 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Dialing tab 3 Select the Advanced button to open the Advanced Dialing Properties field 4 In the Before the number dial section choose one of the following Local prefix e Long distance prefix e Custom 5 If you choose Custom in the Custom field enter the prefix that you want 6 If you want to dial the area code enable the Include the area code check box Check the Preview the dialed number field to preview the telephone number Lu elements to
108. the recipient of an HFAA page After the audio prompt is issued the paging user and recipient can communicate freely The audio prompt is enabled by default but can be disabled if desired The audio prompt is enabled or disabled in the PagingServer exe config file by altering the value of the PlayHandsfreeAnnounceTone parameter To enable or disable the audio prompt for an HFAA page 1 On the NetVanta UC Server computer use Windows Explorer to navigate to the directory below that is appropriate for your operating system For 32 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin For 64 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files x86 ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin 2 Open the PagingServer exe config file using a text editor program such as Notepad Wor The config file extension may not appear in the filename The file may appear as PagingServer exe in Windows Explorer 3 Inthe PagingServer exe config file locate the following lines of XML code lt setting name PlayHandsfreeAnnounceTone serializeAs String gt lt value gt true lt value gt The true between the lt value gt start tag and lt value gt end tag is the default value for the audio prompt of an HFAA page If the audio prompt has been disabled this value will be false 78 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Paging 4 To disable the HFAA audio pr
109. the service from a menu When callers select Fax on demand they are prompted to enter a fax number The fax that you selected is then transmitted For information about using the Fax on demand element refer to Fax on demand element on page 286 For information on setting fax specifications when using the Fax on demand element refer to Setting Fax Message Delivery Options on page 29 For information on setting dialing options related to Fax on demand refer to Setting Outbound Calls and Dialing Options on page 38 Managing outgoing faxes You can preview or print fax documents that you have prepared for transmission Likewise you can prepare a document save it and make it available for transmission at a later time Prepared fax documents can be stored in folders for efficient organization and easy retrieval You can also copy or rename a fax A fax transmission report is created and sent with each fax that is sent successfully A fax transmission report consists of a graphic page image that contains both the text based transmission report and a reduced size image of the first page of the fax The report includes information such as the date and time the fax was sent sender s name fax number and total number of attempts Depending on how your system has been configured you may be able to print the fax transmission report along with the first page of the fax by using the File gt Print First Page command in the Fax Viewer 61951000
110. the status Invite received from lt remote UC server gt where lt remote UC server gt is the Name of the remote NetVanta UC Server that has sent the invitation You must accept this invitation to establish a trusted connection between the local and remote NetVanta UC Servers 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 183 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide 1 Inthe Servers summary pane right click the remote NetVanta UC Server that has sent an invitation to establish a trusted connection 2 Inthe drop down menu select Accept 3 The Status of the connection will appear in the Servers summary pane as Connected A trusted connection is now established between the two NetVanta UC Servers To disable a Trusted UC Server connection Disabling a trusted connection between two NetVanta UC Servers disables the use of all ucCompanion features Presence IM click to dial etc between the two server systems For example if a user on one NetVanta UC Server Server A has a contact on another NetVanta UC Server Server B and the trusted connection between the servers is disabled the contact s Server B user presence will appear in the user s Server A ucCompanion client as Offline Unknown and the contact s identity presence will appear as Unknown Additionally the two users will no longer be able to communicate using ucCompanion 1 Inthe Servers summary pane right click a Trusted UC Server entry with a C
111. the unauthorized or illegal use of said equipment ADTRAN OFFERS NO WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED REGARDING THE PREVENTION DETECTION OR DETERRENCE OF TOLL FRAUD NETWORKING ATTACKS OR UNAUTHORIZED ILLEGAL OR IMPROPER USE OF ADTRAN EQUIPMENT OR SOFTWARE THEREFORE ADTRAN IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY LOSSES OR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM SUCH FRAUD ATTACK OR IMPROPER USE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO HUMAN AND DATA PRIVACY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY MATERIAL ASSETS FINANCIAL RESOURCES LABOR AND LEGAL COSTS Ultimately the responsibility for securing your telecommunication and networking equipment rests with you and you are encouraged to review documentation regarding available security measures their configuration and implementation and to test such features as is necessary for your network Service and Warranty For information on the service and warranty of ADTRAN products visit the Support section of the ADTRAN website at http www adtran com ADRAN 901 Explorer Boulevard P O Box 140000 Huntsville AL 35814 4000 Phone 256 963 8000 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc All Rights Reserved 2 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Conventions Conventions Lu Notes provide additional useful information Cautions signify information that could prevent service interruption or damage to UT equipment Warnings provide information that could prevent injury or endangerment to human
112. the user accesses the first mailbox new message regardless of whether the user disconnects before listening to the message Turn off when no more new messages in The light turns off when the user accesses the last mailbox new message 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 117 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 Select OK Lu Any changes to the message waiting indicator options come into effect immediately For information on setting the message waiting indicator options system wide refer to Configuring Message Waiting Indicator Options on page 24 For troubleshooting information refer to Troubleshooting Message Waiting Indicators on page 359 Configuring a user s identity An identity can be an extension assigned to a user an auto attendant or receive incoming faxes An identity can refer to a user extension a hunt or ring group an auto attendant a fax extension or an email address An identity is associated with a specific extension or SIP identity for a hard or soft phone A user can have up to two identities for example one for a telephone and another for a softphone Any additional identities require an additional license Users can have more than one identity but identities are always associated with only one user You can create a fax identity to receive incoming faxes for a user and direct the faxes to the user s Inbox Edit User General Messaging Message Wait
113. the voice is enabled by the administrator 310 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services System Default Voice This voice option sets the voice used by the service to the currently configured default system voice Otherwise This option is only available if the Voice option selected is Calling Extension If the calling party is a NetVanta UC Server user but does not have a voice configured or if the calling party is not a NetVanta UC Server user the element will exit through the Otherwise connector pin The example below shows a service that plays an announcement in the language chosen by the caller The service will first attempt to use the caller s configured voice to play the message If the caller s voice is available the message will play in the caller s configured voice If the caller s voice is not available or the caller is not a NetVanta UC Server user the service will prompt the caller to select a voice The announcement will then be played in the voice that the caller selected 619510001 1D iv Change Voice 1 dii Menu 1 4 Change Voice 2 lly 4 Play amp 2 A a a Announcement 1 Voice Announcement gt Voice Play calling Extension Ia i ChangeVoiceMenu l English U S Male 5 ClosedforNewYears Greetin e O
114. there are new messages in a user s mailbox The message indicator de activation code de activates the message waiting indicator for user extensions after they listen to their messages The NetVanta UC Server can function as a centralized voicemail service for a main office and one or more remote IP Office sites using a remote agent application When calls at a remote site are unanswered and are redirected to the remote site voicemail hunt group the remote agent first sends the call information to the NetVanta UC Server and then redirects the call to the main site IP Office voicemail hunt group The NetVanta UC Server uses the information sent by the remote agent in conjunction with the call information supplied by IP Office at the main site to execute the appropriate service Requirements at the Remote IP Office Site e Small Community Networking enabled e Exactly one remote agent application must be installed at each of the remote IP Office sites and the firewall configured accordingly e Avaya s TAPI driver must be installed on each machine that hosts a remote agent e A valid CTI Link Pro license for each IP Office e All extensions hunt group numbers and display names must be unique across all IP Office sites e Each remote IP Office site must have a voicemail hunt group where unanswered calls are redirected The extensions in this hunt group are monitored by the remote agent application and must not be in use The extensions can be
115. to paging The last three examples in the table below show how to allow and restrict access to HFAA paging Calling Number Called Number Priority Description 1000 1001 1002 pagingservices Prevents selected users from 1000 1001 1002 pagingservices Allows selected users access pagingservices Allows all users to access paging services accessing the paging server to the paging server to enable sending pages 56 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D hfaa pagingservices Allows all users to access HFAA paging services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Routing and Restricting Calls Calling Number Called Number Priority Description 1000 1001 1002 hfaa pagingservices 50 Prevents selected users from using HFAA paging 1000 1001 1002 hfaa pagingservices 50 Allows selected users to use HFAA paging The calling numbers outlined above are default examples only and can be replaced with valid user identities to enable specific users the ability to send pages services to access the paging service as this may cause the paging feature to no longer function Do not alter the default entry where Calling Number ucservices that allows UC a 7 For information on configuring paging refer to Configuring Paging on page 69 For instructions on sending pages refer to Paging on page 197 Restricting picking up connected calls Using connected call pic
116. to run OutDial then logs into the NetVanta UC Server using the authentication provided calls the phone number that you provided and runs a sample service included with the NetVanta UC Server To try the Outbound Dialer example requires having the Outbound Dialer license To Lu verify whether your configuration has this license available refer to To verify the Outbound dialing support license on page 236 236 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Advanced Features To try the Outbound Dialer 1 Open a Command Prompt window by selecting Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt Use the change directory command cd to change the directory path to the NetVanta UC Server Bin folder If the NetVanta UC Server was installed in the default location then the command and the path would be cd Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin Enter the outdial command followed by the parameters listed below substituting your own values for the information in brackets The command and the parameters have been placed on separate lines for ease of reading only The parameters can be listed in any order outdial h lt host gt u lt user name gt pw lt password gt ph lt phone number gt s Shared Default Trunk Service The outdial command initiates Outdial exe The h parameter connects Outdial to the host server The host value can be the host name of the server or
117. user from the dial by name directory e Time zone e Voice for system announcements e Call answering mode PA PBA e Operator the extension the caller may be directed to if the user is unavailable User information includes the first last and display name of the user as well as the option to include the user in the dial by name directory Each user has a time zone setting that indicates in which time zone the user is typically located The time zone setting affects the times and dates that appear on voice fax and email messages when users access their mailbox using the telephone user interface For workers who travel or are relocating to another site for a period of time you can change each user s time zone settings or configure the time zone setting for multiple users In the user information you can configure the voice that is used for the user s prerecorded announcements voice mailbox management and voice mail behavior for the voice mail element and for Personal Assistant mode The properties of a voice combine features of language gender and Text to Speech TTS For example the English U S Female voice provides audio prompts and TTS spoken in American English by a female speaker You can specify the call answering mode either Personal Assistant PA or Personal Business Assistant PBA 110 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles e The PA user is the de
118. user profile menu has access to multiple profiles you can view those profiles as tabs across the top of the window Make sure you have selected the correct profile for which you want to change the password Lu The default administrator login name is admin To change the password 1 Select the tab of the profile for which you want to change the password 2 Select Tools gt Change User Password Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Introducing the Administrator Application 3 Inthe Change Password menu box do all of the following e Inthe Old password field enter the old password e Inthe New password field enter the new password Inthe Confirm new password field reenter the new password The new password takes effect when you restart the application Navigating the NetVanta UC Server In the Administration application the Admin tab is available when you start the application From the Administration navigation pane you can manage the following e Users user profiles e Phones e Paging Groups e Gateways e Ports e Authentications e Identities typically extensions e Data Sources if you are licensed for database integration then data sources can be used in custom call answering services e Servers e Communication Systems The administrator application is divided into the following four quadrants the navigation pane the summary pane the identities pane and
119. users that you want The users that you select appear in the Authentications drop down menu 8 Select OK To delete an authentication from an existing user profile 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name that you want to remove an authentication from 2 Select Open to open the User menu box 3 Select the Authentications tab 4 Select the authentication that you want to delete 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 121 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 Select the trash can qi 6 Select OK Resetting a user s PIN Users enter a PIN when they access their mailbox using the telephone Reset the PIN for users on the system for added security or if a user forgets the telephone PIN to retrieve messages over the telephone To reset a PIN for a user 1 Right click the user name for which you want to reset the PIN 2 Select Reset PIN to open the Change Personal Identification Number PIN menu 3 Enter a new number in the New PIN field 4 Reenter the new number in the Confirm new PIN field 5 Select OK one The new PIN takes effect immediately Deleting a user To delete an existing user profile 1 Right click a user name 2 Select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion You have deleted the NetVanta UC Server user profile All that user s data is lost For example all services the user created all greetings the user recorded and all announcements are de
120. voice that will be used by elements in the service Calling Extension This voice option sets the voice used by the service to the configured voice of the calling party the initiator of the call This option enables the Otherwise connector pin If the calling party is a NetVanta UC Server user but does not have a voice configured or if the calling party is not a NetVanta UC Server user the element will exit through the Otherwise connector pin Called Extension This voice option sets the voice used by the service to the configured voice of the called party the receiver of the call Selected Extension This voice option sets the voice used by the service to the configured voice of the user whose extension has been previously selected using the Select Extension element If the voice has been changed previously in the service using a Change Voice element the Select Extension option could be used to reset the voice of the service to that of the selected extension English U S This voice option sets the voice used by the service to English U S Female Female This option is listed only if the voice is enabled by the administrator English U S Male This voice option sets the voice used by the service to English U S Male This option is listed only if the voice is enabled by the administrator French Canada This voice option sets the voice used by the service to French Canada Female Female This option is listed only if
121. voicemail field of John Smith To leave a message for my assistant Tony Moore press 1 It is not practical to create individual services to associate each user with their particular assistant so instead one service is created and shared among many users The service determines whose extension was called and based on the called number fetches the data from the database to determine who the assistant is for the called number and directs the caller to that user s assistant s mailbox To determine the Selected Extension in the second Voicemail element the Select Extension element must be included in the service To determine the appropriate assistant s extension to direct the caller to information must be gathered from a database in this case using the Fetch Data element and using a Data Source table that includes fields for user s extensions and their assistant s extensions To prompt callers to enter an extension number or enter a single digit to access a menu item 1 Inthe Select Extension element choose By prompting caller The service prompts callers to enter an extension number using their telephone keypad If a caller enters a valid extension number then the call exits through the Valid extension connector pin 2 Ifyou want callers to be able to enter a single digit to access a menu item then enable On single digit If a caller presses a single digit on their telephone keypad the call follows the On single digit co
122. you want to associate the identity The user profile that you select is able to manage the behavior of this identity Select Attendant service and select Next The options that appear on the Configure Attendant Identity menu depend on the user profile selected in the previous menu Admin users do not have the Receive Fax mode In the Name field enter a display name for the fax attendant identity This is the display name that appears in the Identities summary pane In the Address field enter an address for the fax attendant identity An address is typically an extension number but it can be any string of numbers that can be dialed and is unique to a user such as an email address The address is the identity number that callers use to send faxes to the user Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Extensions and Identities 9 Select Receive Fax to configure the attendant identity to receive incoming faxes and select Next Incoming faxes are then directed to the user s Inbox The MWI flashes and a voicemail message indicates that a new fax has been received This option is unavailable for Admin users 10 Select Finish to create the fax attendant identity Editing an Attendant Identity To edit an attendant identity follow these steps 1 In the Identities summary pane right click the attendant identity that you want to edit Le Attendant Identity 2 Select Open 3 Enter
123. 0001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 279 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Notify Pager element Notify Pager 1 lt i 2 Pager number to dial amp 1 V Wait 10 seconds then Send message V Add Caller Id Append to message The Notify Pager element allows you to send a message from the NetVanta UC Server to a specified pager number The message sent can be a numeric message with an attached caller ID To specify a pager number for the Notify Pager element 1 Inthe Pager number to dial section do one of the following e Use the value selector gt to specify a value For more information refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 For information about contact address book synchronization refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 266 e Select the telephone button and enter the pager number that you want e Right click the Pager number to dial field select New and enter the pager number that you want 2 Enable the Wait check box if you want to specify a pause before paging and in the Wait seconds then field enter the number of seconds that you want the pause to last 3 Inthe Send Message field enter a prefix that you want as part of the message before caller ID is displayed on the pager Numeric prefixes and suffixes are useful to identify calls that are delivered The prefix helps you differentiate between callers
124. 001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 193 Using SIP Telephones ECS BAS Administrator Guide To change the number of rings On the identities pane select the identity that you want to change and select the Number of rings from the drop down menu The default number of rings is 4 Using SIP Phones Depending on the manufacturer SIP phones and the NetVanta UC Server offer a variety of features such as the following e Using the Global Phone Directory on page 194 e Transferring Callers Directly to Voicemail on page 195 e Using the NetVanta UC Server Conference Bridge on page 196 e Paging on page 197 e Parking Calls and Picking up Parked Calls Using Access Codes on page 198 e Parking Calls and Picking up Parked Calls Using Park Zone Button on page 199 e Working with Call Queues on page 200 e Picking up Ringing Calls on page 202 e Changing Phones During a Call on page 203 Using the Global Phone Directory The Global Phone Directory uses Polycom s Corporate Directory feature to enable users of Polycom and ADTRAN IP phones to use the GUI on their phones to search for identities included in the Global Phone Directory The Global Phone Directory feature is supported for all ADTRAN IP phones except the ADTRAN IP 706 and IP 712 and Polycom IP phones using firmware 3 1 8 and higher No other phone types are supported Phones associated with other communication systems such as the NetVanta 7100 are not provisioned by NetVanta UC Serv
125. 1 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 211 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide For information about specifying fax transmission report options refer to Setting system wide options Setting Fax Message Delivery Options on page 29 To preview a fax document 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the fax documents folder containing the document that you want to preview The folder s contents are listed in the summary pane Faxes Folder 3 Right click the fax document that you want to preview and select Open to display the fax in the Fax Viewer F My Fox 2 tif CollAttendant Office Fax Viewer lo x Fb vew Help esaat South Panting inc moors ce Oum Dforhevien Pense Comment C Preuve Rests Pense Recyete Comments ene ie IESENE Ine orem or year Bantes corsa Ready ue 212 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing Fax tif UC Client Fax Viewer File View Help Ea QQ MAG tatlcolre Connected as System Use the zoom control icons to zoom in or out of the fax Zoom in amp S Zoom out Use the rotate control icons to rotate only one page of a document or the entire document Rotate to the left right or 180 degrees Rotate single page f n if fat i Rotate entire document 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 213 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide Use the page control
126. 1 55AC 4794 9361 1B7320D694BD Last Unique Id ANetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the most recent unique string generated by Next Unique Id Refer to Next Unique Id Voice ANetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the English U S Male name of the enabled system voice When the value is set to System Default Voice the value used is the name of the current system s default voice 342 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services Using Database Elements To access database information the system must be licensed for database integration If you are not licensed for database integration then the Database tab of elements is not Ry visible Database elements rely on database integration to provide data to callers during a service Database integration allows services to be dynamic and data driven F Fetch Date oe Dial for Data The Database elements tab is shown above A brief description is provided for each element available to the Administrator Table 18 1 Database elements Fetch Data element on page 344 This accesses the specified data source and fetches the required data Dial for Data element on page 345 This accesses the specified data source and fetches the data specified by the caller Add Data element on page 347 This allows a caller to add data to a specified data source
127. 10001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 27 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide To enable a beep to signal the start of recording 1 2 3 4 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Voice Mail tab Enable the Beep before recording check box Select OK To set the maximum length of a recording 1 2 3 4 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Voice Mail tab In the Record for field enter in seconds the maximum length of a recording The length can range from 5 to 900 seconds The default maximum length of a recording is 240 seconds Select OK To enable silence detection P GR RS In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Voice Mail tab Enable the Stop recording after check box Specify in seconds the period of silence to elapse before the call is terminated Recording stops after the number of seconds that you specify The default period is 8 seconds Select OK To enable the termination of a recording when a caller presses a key 1 Ds 3 4 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Voice Mail tab Enable the Stop recording when key pressed check box The recording stops when a caller presses a key Select OK To allow transfer from voicemail when a caller presses a key RUE A
128. 144 When configuring an identity on a SIP telephone that does not support automatic one configuration consult ADTRAN technical notes and the phone manufacturer documentation for the specific configuration for your environment To add an identity to a user using Active Directory 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name to which you want to add an identity and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable Unified Communications Server for this user is checked Select the Identities button to open the Identities tab So oe Select Add to add an identity to the user profile The New Identity Wizard begins For information on using the New Identity Wizard refer to User Identities on page 130 To delete an user s identity using Active Directory 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name from which you want to delete an identity and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable UC Server for this user is checked Mo m p o Select the Identities button to open the Identities tab 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 91 Integrating with Active Directory ECS BAS Administrator Guide 6 Select the identity that you want to delete 7 Select the trash can al 8 Select OK You cannot assign a user directly to a phone but yo
129. 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Troubleshooting 1 Uninstall the third party antivirus or firewall software 2 Shutdown the NetVanta UC Server and restart uninstalling Antivirus and firewall behavior is unpredictable even after shutting down or UT Pi Wipe clean the computer hosting the server client software including the OS and reinstall Troubleshooting Performance Issues with Exchange Server Symptoms e Reduced performance on Microsoft Exchange Server Causes Mailbox monitoring is enabled on the Exchange Server and the default setting for mailbox monitoring for users is set to on Alternatively mailbox monitoring is enabled on the Exchange Server and the default setting for mailbox monitoring for users is set to off but a significant number of individual users have mailbox monitoring enabled Mailbox monitoring enables synchronization of message waiting indicators when users access messages through Microsoft Outlook Web Access or through a mobile device However mailbox monitoring can negatively impact system performance on page 172 Wor For more information on mailbox monitoring refer to Configuring message delivery Mailbox monitoring increases the traffic between the Exchange Server and the NetVanta UC Server Depending on the number of users configured for mailbox monitoring the bandwidth between the Exchange Server and the NetVanta UC Server and the CPU power performance may be affe
130. 212 s myService h somewhere com OutDial s myService ph 6135551212 h somewhere com The command line syntax follows normal Windows command line rules For example double quotation marks are required around any values that include a space character in those values such as might be found in the username host phone number list or service parameters For example Admin would not require double quotation marks but John Smith requires double quotation marks because of the space between the first and the last name The following is a list of required parameters 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 241 Using Advanced Features Table 14 1 Required Parameters ECS BAS Administrator Guide Parameter h Value IP Address Host Name Description The IP address or host name where the server is located ph Phone Number List This is a comma separated list of phone numbers to be dialed Each phone number can be specified as a sequence of digits for example 5551212 or using standard formatting characters for example 555 1212 613 555 1212 or 1 613 555 1212 Numbers that have no formatting characters are dialed as is Other numbers have the standard dialing rules applied as defined in the Admin options Tools gt Options gt Dialing For example the default area code can be added Account codes can also be used if they are configured on the user profile associated with the request
131. 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 233 Creating Distribution Lists ECS BAS Administrator Guide 4 Enter a Name for the distribution list folder 5 Enter a unique number in the List Identifier field 6 If you want to record an audio identifier for the distribution list select Record and follow steps 2 to 7 of To record an audio identifier for a distribution list on page 233 7 Select OK To add a user to a distribution list 1 Select the folder that contains the user that you want to add to the list 2 Drag the user name to the distribution list folder that you want to copy it to To delete a user from a distribution list 1 Select the folder that contains the user that you want to delete from the list 2 Right click the name of the user that you want to delete and select Delete To change distribution list information 1 Right click the system distribution list that you want to change and select Open 2 Inthe General Information section do either of the following e Enter a new name in the Name field e Enter a new number in the List Identifier field 3 Ifyou want to change the audio identifier select Record and follow steps 2 to 7 of To record an audio identifier for a distribution list on page 233 4 Select OK To rename a system distribution list 1 Right click the distribution list that you want to rename and select Rename 2 Enter a name for the distribution list and select OK To copy a sys
132. 75 Configuring Non user Extensions and Identities Identities typically refer to extensions The NetVanta UC Server validates a transfer destination identity You can transfer to identities that do not have a user associated with the extension number such as conference rooms lobby phones etc rg For more information about identities refer to Managing User Extensions and Identities on page 127 The identities that you enter allow the Dial by Extension and Select Extension elements used in custom call answering services to transfer callers to these identities For more information about services refer to Creating Custom Call Answering Services on page 253 For more information about the Dial by Extension and Select Extension F elements refer to Dial by Extension Element on page 274 and Select Extension Element on page 289 In order for inbound callers to transfer to the NetVanta UC Server conference bridge the conference bridge number must be added to the list of valid entries The default number is 7050 r For more information about the NetVanta UC Server conference bridge refer to Using the NetVanta UC Server Conference Bridge on page 196 To define a list of accessible identities 1 Inthe Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Identity tab 3 Select the Insert identity icon 4 Enter the identity 5 Select OK 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 37 Setting Syst
133. 9510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services Accessing Data using Database Service Elements Using database integration you can set up services that allow callers to access current information Also the service creator can call in to a service to change information remotely at any time so that callers have access to the most current information Data accessed by data sources is dynamic and can be updated at any time Some elements depending on their function allow you to specify values or data sources Database elements use database integration to provide information to callers and receive information from callers during a service For example callers to a real estate office can hear updated information about a particular property when they enter the property number over the phone during a service In this case the Fetch Data element processes the query and searches the database for a match Likewise the real estate agent can make changes to the property information in the database by accessing the service remotely and entering the new information to the database If the agent wants to change the list price for a property he can access the Update Data element in the service access the price value for the correct property change the value and update the database accordingly For more information about accessing data sources using service elements refer to Using Elements to Create Call Answering Servi
134. ADRAN NetVanta Unified Communications NetVanta Enterprise Communications Server and Business Application Server Administrator Guide Version 5 4 619510001 1D March 2013 Trademarks ECS BAS Administrator Guide Trademarks Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks registered trademarks or trade names of their respective holders To the Holder of the Manual The contents of this manual are current as of the date of publication ADTRAN reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice In no event will ADTRAN be liable for any special incidental or consequential damages or for commercial losses even if ADTRAN has been advised thereof as a result of issue of this publication Software Licensing Agreement Access to the features of the NetVanta Unified Communications software are restricted by license keys based on your licensed configuration Pursuant to the Licensing Agreement you may a use the server software on one device only and b use the client software on an unlimited number of computers for use by configured users of the software product In addition certain ADTRAN systems may contain additional conditions for obtaining software upgrades Toll Fraud Liability Be advised that certain security risks are inherent in the use of any telecommunications or networking equipment including but not limited to toll fraud Denial of Service DoS attacks loss or theft of data and
135. ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Integrating with Active Directory 12 Select OK You can also assign an identity to a phone using the Identities navigation pane in NetVanta UC Server For more information refer to Assigning a User Identity to a New Phone on page 131 or Assigning a User Identity to an Existing Phone on page 132 To assign an identity to an existing phone 1 10 po m m o py e ER p In the Users content pane right click the user to whom you want to assign an identity and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable Unified Communications Server for this user is checked Select the Advanced button Select the Phones tab Select Add In the Property Page menu select Assign to an existing phone All existing phones with available line buttons are displayed To show all phones enable the Show all phones check box All phones are displayed Select a phone and select Next Select the identity that you want to add and select Finish To change information associated with a phone 1 5 a Cr e p B In the Users content pane right click the user whose phone you want to change and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable Unified Communications Server for this user is checked Select the Advanced button S
136. AS Administrator Guide Creating Custom Call Answering Services Using and deleting links If you link two elements and then change your mind you can delete the link and reuse the element in the service To delete a link between two elements 1 Right click the connector pin linking the two elements that you want to separate 2 Select Delete link to delete the link When you delete a link between two elements the elements are no longer connected on the canvas At first glance one of the elements seems to have been deleted because it disappears from the place it occupied in the call flow The element is repositioned at the bottom left corner of the canvas From there you can connect it elsewhere in the call flow by linking it with another existing element 19 Voice Mail a 2 Called Extension M Play status message Transfer call This number The operator Otherwise To link existing elements 1 Select and drag from the connector pin to the icon of the element that you want to link 2 Release the mouse button to link the elements If you link an element and then decide that you no longer want to include it in the call flow you can delete the element from the canvas To delete an element from the canvas 1 Select the icon of the element that you want to delete to highlight the element vix e ae Delete 2 Select Delete on the toolbar to delete the element from the canvas or press the Delete key Cre
137. Advanced Features ECS BAS Administrator Guide A call request is considered processed if a call connects and the service begins to run This means that the request is not re queued even if errors are subsequently detected for example the person hangs up before the service has finished running Server activities related to outbound dialing are noted in the logs In particular any Lu error conditions failure to complete a call and successful initiation of the service should be noted in the logs Once the OutDial exe has successfully logged in to the server then it sends the call request to the server and waits for confirmation The server verifies the information given before validating the request and queuing the request When the OutDial execution ends the utility returns a numeric return code that could be used by a shell or batch command processor If the execution is successful the utility returns 0 Unique non zero return codes are returned for the situations below and any other specific error returns from the server The following is a list of the NetVanta UC Server return codes and contains all the errors that can be reported by OutDial Server activities related to the Outbound Dialer are noted in the logs In particular any Lu error conditions failure to complete a call and successful initiation of the service should be noted in the logs 248 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide
138. Advanced Features ECS BAS Administrator Guide To query an outbound call request 1 Locate the OutDial exe It is available in the following folder if the NetVanta UC Server was installed in the default location Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin 2 From the OutDial command line utility enter the following command line OutDial q u lt username gt pw lt password gt h lt host gt help The username password host and help parameters function as they do when running the OutDial utility In the command above the q queries the queued outbound call requests for that user The optional parameters appear in the square brackets The parameters may be used in any order You can use the OutDial exe to cancel outbound call requests using the command line shown below The utility then connects to the server and logs in as usual The server looks for a queued call request that matches the specified parameters that is the phone number list service and parameters must match exactly If a matching request is found then it s removed from the queue and a log entry is created indicating the reason If an entry is found that has already started where dialing is in progress then the request cannot be canceled and an error code is returned to the client To cancel an outbound call request 1 Locate the OutDial exe It is available in the following folder if the NetVanta UC Server was installed in the default location
139. Aunnouncements summary pane double click the announcement to which you want to add The Audio Editor displays the announcement as a waveform After The Tone wav UC Client Audio Editor File Edit View Command Process PlayBack Took Help Bo BAXE wae lh ne ome RAS THM Yi PK Text area y Ready Connected as Sharon Doe Position 0 00 000 Selection 0 00 000 t 0 00 007 Z In the text area of the Audio Editor you can enter a script of the additional text that you Lu want to add to your recording This is useful for eliminating pauses when you are recording 4 From the menu bar select View gt Zoom to Fit All 5 From the toolbar select the a icon 6 On the toolbar select gt to play the announcement Listen to it once or twice to pinpoint the portion of the waveform to which you want to add Position the cursor over the stop command on the toolbar so you can stop the playback immediately before the part to which you want to add Use the view commands on the toolbar to zoom in or out to increase or decrease accuracy Note the marker s position in the Position indicator at the bottom of the menu 7 Select the stop icon on the toolbar to stop playback on the waveform at the point where you want to add to the announcement 8 On the toolbar select e to open the Record Audio menu Record Audio ata faa a Time 0 00 000 Insert new lat the beginning ere 9 Inthe Record Audi
140. BAS Administrator Guide 2 Right click on the Classes of Service topic in the Administration navigation pane and select New Phone Class of Service from the drop down menu You can also create a new phone CoS by selecting the Classes of Service topic in the Administration navigation pane and right clicking on the summary pane Select New Phone Class of Service from the drop down menu The New Phone Class of Service menu appears New Phone Class of Service A phone class of service can be applied to one or more phones and defines some common attributes for those phones Name Phone Class of Service Use as default for new phones Advanced connection options Enable secondary registration if secondary server exists Proxy Type lt None gt x OK Cancel 3 Specify the name for the CoS in the Name field of the New Phone Class of Service menu The name should be a unique identifier specifically for this CoS 4 Select the check box next to Use as default for new phones if you want this phone CoS to be the default CoS for all new phones added to the system 5 You can select OK to save the phone CoS with the default settings or you can continue to edit the Advanced connection options For more information on configuring the Advanced connection options refer to Configuring the Advanced Connection Options on page 161 6 After you have finished configuring the phone CoS settings select OK to save the phone CoS
141. C Server s service account has the appropriate permissions The port auditing system has detected a problem with one or more of the system ports Possible problems PBX port is bad Wiring is connected to the wrong port on the PBX Call each port individually and monitor in the NetVanta UC Server Ports Manager to ensure that calls are being received on the expected port Wiring is bad Verify the wiring Increase the disk storage or remove any files that are not required For more information refer to the following section The following log entry may appear in the System Errors and Warning Logs on page 374 The following log entry may appear in the System Errors and Warning Logs Error Application Server Restarted Description Application services have been restarted to recover from an error condition In most cases the system will operate normally after this occurs However if this log entry appears regularly or frequently then further investigation is required Potential Causes e Microsoft Exchange Server is not responding in a timely manner e Slow Microsoft Active Directory responses 374 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs e Slow system behavior e g the CPU is overloaded e Other activities are occurring which is suspending or slowing down operation e g virus scanning or search indexing Software issues To investigate potent
142. C Server J Routing J Services Navigation Pane Detail Pane Services Announcements Distribution Lists Faxes Logs Navigation Bars The Admin user profile does not have any associated identities Identitites Pane For Help press F1 Connected as Admin Server Message Buffering on page 45 Wor For information on setting mail server message buffering options refer to Setting Mail Configuring Microsoft Exchange Server When configuring Microsoft Exchange Server there are several options available to consider The following sections describe these options Selecting a Method for Connecting to Microsoft Exchange Server As of version 5 2 0 NetVanta UC Server is able to connect to Microsoft Exchange Server using either Messaging Application Programming Interface MAPI or Exchange Web Services EWS Each connection method is configured using a separate configuration menu accessed from the Servers summary pane Exchange Server connections via MAPI are configured using the Microsoft Exchange Server Configuration menu and Exchange Server connections via EWS are configured using the Mircosoft Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Configuration menu The method NetVanta UC Server can use to connect to Exchange Server is dependent on the version of Exchange Server The following table summarizes the connection methods available for each version of Exchange Server 170 Copyrig
143. Calls 3 Routing and Restricting Calls This chapter details how to route calls restrict long distance and other calls and route calls to queues It covers the following topics e Routing Calls on page 49 e Allowing and Restricting Long Distance and Other Calls on page 53 e Routing Calls to Queues on page 59 Options on page 38 Wor For information on setting dialing options refer to Setting Outbound Calls and Dialing Routing Calls Calls are routed using the integrated SIP communications system which routes to registered identities or telephones first The communication system routes calls according to dial plan entries by order of priority If multiple dial plan entries match and the priorities are equal the communication system determines the route Routing and dial plans allow phones on the NetVanta UC Server to use e Outgoing call access accesses a gateway to dial calls through the PSTN e Feature codes to access system resources The dial plan works in conjunction with gateways telephones and system features that are accessed by a feature code Routing calls and restricting calls both use standard regular expressions Routing calls using the dial plan The dial plan is used to instruct the call processing agent about how to route calls You route calls by assigning dial plans to a gateway or to a host although it is not recommended Adding digits to the dial plan allows you to specify a range of numbers attenda
144. Change user button Change user button 2 Enter the user name and password for the user from which you want to send the fax The user s information appears in the Current user information section of the Fax Printer menu box 3 Select OK Sending faxes using the Faxes menu in the NetVanta UC Client From the NetVanta UC Client to get the Faxes menu select the Faxes navigation bar For information about sharing faxes refer to Importing and Exporting on page 353 Content pane Navigation pane detail pane The Faxes menu displays a Navigation pane summary pane and detail pane The Navigation pane displays folders for fax cover pages fax documents and the fax queue You can use these folders to store fax documents and cover pages that are saved to disk The Queue folder contains the list of scheduled fax transmissions Each entry includes the recipient s name and fax number the number of pages to be transmitted the time and date of transmission and the cover page that you have associated with it The summary pane displays the contents of a folder when you select it These contain all the fax documents that you have prepared to use on trunk line services containing the Fax on demand or Send Fax element as well as the cover pages that you use to accompany such transmissions When you select the fax Queue folder in the Navigation pane a list of all faxes scheduled for transmission appears in the Content pane
145. Dialby Extension d Valid extension l On single digit Otherwise The Dial by Extension element accepts DTMF tones that a caller enters for an extension If the tones match a valid extension the call is transferred to the specified extension and the Selected Extension and Selected User Name system values are changed to the extension and the user name owning that extension Since the call has been transferred no call is present after leaving the Valid extension connection The valid extension is a user account as well as any extensions defined in the extensions tab of the options menu If you enable the On single digit check box you can connect an Advanced Menu element to provide single digit entry processing for multi function entry If a caller enters an invalid extension the call leaves the element by the Otherwise connector pin In order to transfer callers using the the Dial by Extension element you must define the Lu list of identities which the calls can be transferred to For more information refer to Configuring Non user Extensions and Identities on page 37 274 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services The Dial by Extension element is not available for PBA users Dial by Name Element TA The Dial by Name element allows callers to dial a user by entering the n digits that correspond to the first few letters of either th
146. Distance gt or lt Unknown Caller gt Phone number format depends on the underlying transport Paul Smith 613 599 9698 Caller ld Name ANetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the caller name as provided by the underlying transport Paul Smith Caller ld Number ANetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the raw caller telephone number as provided by the underlying transport 613 599 9698 Caller ld Canonical Number A NetVanta UC Server Phone Number Value containing the complete formatted number 1 613 599 9698 Caller ld Area Code A NetVanta UC Server Text Value containingthe 613 area code of the number Caller Id Area A NetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the 613599 Code Exchange area code and the exchange Caller ld Exchange ANetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the 599 exchange 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 341 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Caller ld Local Number ANetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the local number without the area code and country code 5999698 Called Id A NetVanta UC Server Text Value representing the called party Typically it is the form name number However if the name is blank it is in the form number It might also have special values such as lt Private Number gt lt Long Distance gt or lt Unknown Caller gt Phone number
147. Double click on Sounds and Audio Devices and select the Hardware tab Locate your sound card in the available list and double click it Select the Properties tab expand Audio Devices and select your audio device Select the Properties button Oy Mm E pe P Check Do not map through this device Configuring Gateway Paging If your paging system does not support using SIP phones VoIP paging devices or sound card paging then you can use gateway paging as an alternative method of overhead paging Gateway paging systems connect to an FXO or FXS gateway The FXO FXS gateway provides a combination of paging access and an audio path to the paging system Gateway paging includes the following features e Supports sending live pages e Allows callers to select from multiple paging groups or zones using DTMF tones e Pages are received through overhead speakers Requirements for FXO FXS Gateway Paging Before configuring gateway paging ensure that you have met the following requirements e The FXO gateway port must be able to maintain a connection to the FXO paging interface in the absence of dial tone e The FXO gateway port must be able to maintain an audio path in the absence of answer supervision e The FXO gateway must support an interface voltage of 48 VDC e The FXO gateway should support an interface voltage of 24 VDC e The FXO FXS interface must be able to pass DTMF tones that are entered by the caller initiating the page
148. Faxes Folder 3 Select the fax document that you want to send 4 Select File gt Print to open the Print menu box 5 Follow steps 3 to 18 in Sending faxes from other applications using the ADTRAN Fax Printer on page 206 210 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing To specify fax numbers and account code 1 Select the telephone icon in the Fax Recipients menu box Telephone icon 2 Enter the area code and telephone number for the fax that you want to specify 3 Choose a country code from the Country code drop down menu 4 Enable the Use Account Code check box The administrator must enable account codes from Tools gt Options gt Dialing tab in order for this mode to be available 5 Type an account code in the field and select OK Sending faxes to a specific fax number using the Send Fax element The Send Fax element allows you to set up a list of fax documents to be sent to a specific fax number You can specify the fax number choose a cover page and then select the list of documents that you want to send For more information refer to Send Fax element on page 282 Automatically sending faxes requested by callers using a Fax on demand element You can use a Fax on demand element to set up a fax on demand service on a trunk line The Fax on demand element allows you to select a fax document and an accompanying cover page and then have the fax transmitted to callers who select
149. Folder A new folder is added is added to the list in the summary pane 3 Enter a name for the folder To put a fax document in a folder Select the fax document that you want to store in a folder and drag it to the folder where you want to store it Lu Select a folder to view its contents 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 215 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide Lu On the toolbar use the Go back arrow to return to the list previously displayed in the summary pane Viewing the fax queue and status Select the Queue icon in the navigation pane of the Faxes menu to view all the faxes that you have scheduled for transmission You can suspend fax transmissions indefinitely resume transmission or delete an item from the queue All faxes that have been prepared by users on the system are visible to you in the list However as Administrator you cannot view forward or change individual faxes unless you have prepared them yourself Faxes requested using the Fax on demand and Send Fax elements also appear in the fax queue When a fax has been successfully transmitted it is removed from the fax queue Users receive an email message signaling successful transmission As Administrator you do not have a mailbox Instead an email message is sent to the general or default mailbox in order to signal successful transmission of fax documents sent by the Administrator If no general mailbox has been set up you are not advis
150. If a problem occurs receiving a fax then the call exits through the Otherwise connector pin and the fax is not received in the selected mailbox Depending on the configuration there may be a dedicated fax number or identity to receive faxes In this case you may want to use the Receive Fax element in a service to initiate some behavior such as storing the fax in a database Alternatively you may have a shared voice and fax number or identity where you receive voice and fax messages on the same identity or extension If you are using a shared voice and fax number then you may want to create a Receive Fax service for example in order to receive notifications that you have received a fax When the Receive Fax element is used in a voice service it s typically placed after a Menu Element on page 272 Callers are instructed using a Play Announcement element on page 269 that they can press a key on the telephone dialpad to send a fax For example 284 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services If you would like to send a fax please press 5 and then press the Send button on your fax machine When the Receive Fax element is used in a dedicated fax service it is typically the first element in the service and it can be combined with other elements to create a custom fax service such as saving the fax to a database or receiving notifications of the rece
151. Managing User Extensions and Identities Auto Attendant Identities An attendant service connects callers directly to an auto attendant or to a service for example IVR pre screening etc When the NetVanta UC Server was configured to function with your system each of the attendant lines was set to run a default service This means that the attendant lines already provide basic extension dialing dial by name support operator access and the ability for users to access and manage their mailboxes remotely For the NetVanta UC Server to use a new attendant the Communication System must be programmed to do so If automatic configuration is supported for your Communication System the NetVanta UC Server can program the Communication System so that incoming calls for the new attendant are directed to a port that is connected to the NetVanta UC Server The NetVanta UC Server might also support direct inward dialing DID attendants depending on the switch compatibility You can create an attendant service and configure it to receive faxes Incoming faxes are then directed to the user s mailbox for example through Microsoft Outlook Microsoft Exchange Server Lotus Notes or through an integrated messaging client a Mailboxes navigation bar on the user s NetVanta UC Client or IMAP4 The message waiting indicator MWI flashes to indicate that there is a new message waiting and a voicemail message indicates that a fax has been received You
152. NE ie AN de eee Side areal ele tnt ea canny et e ohana teat et 253 Managing Services 254 Using the Service Editor 257 Working with Elements to Build a Service 259 Customizing Services using Parameters 262 Validating Services 263 Troubleshooting Services 2 263 16 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services 265 Service Element Settings and Features 265 Using Standard Elements 268 Using Advanced Elements 288 17 Using Announcements in Call Answering Services 313 Using Prerecorded Announcements 313 Recording Announcements 317 Managing Announcements 325 18 Using Databases in Call Answering Services 327 OVES Ws basco at ars nee dates cere at Meche on ae Core een ere 327 Managing Data Sources 327 Accessing Data using Database Service Elements
153. RAN will not take action unless a support incident is raised following standard support procedures For information on contacting ADTRAN Technical Support refer to the ADTRAN website at www adtran com Accessing Documentation and Training If you want more information than what is available in this manual or in the online help then go to the ADTRAN Support Community website at https supportforums adtran com Here you will find training materials a quick reference card along with SIP phone user guides and technical notes Accessing Technical Support Unless there is a support contract in place please see your reseller for support information For more information on ADTRAN Technical Support refer to the ADTRAN website at www adtran com If you are contacting ADTRAN Technical Support then please ensure that you have the following information readily available e Product edition Standard SIP or CEBP e Product version e Service code The Service code is an identification number to be used when contacting ADTRAN Technical Support If you are contacting ADTRAN Technical Support then you will need to enter the service code number over the phone so have the number ready when you call The service contract type and expiry date are available for your information To access the NetVanta UC Server product and service information From the NetVanta UC Server select Help gt About UC Client Alternatively select the button on t
154. Restricting Calls ECS BAS Administrator Guide The feature is useful for companies that handle a lot of incoming phone calls and where the caller is not trying to reach a specific individual but wants to talk to a member of an agent group such as a salesperson as quickly as possible Call queuing allows callers to remain in a queue while they wait for their call to be answered by the next available agent in the group Wor The total number of simultaneous calls that can be queued in the system is 64 Contact ADTRAN if you require your system to queue more than 64 calls The agent is typically associated with a particular area of expertise for example sales or support A support agent who is ready to answer calls logs into the agent group and receives support calls in the order that callers enter the queue To create a queue create a dial plan entry that directs calls to an attendant identity number for example 5000 Add the prefix queue to the identity number in the routing plan After you create the queue an agent can log into the agent group for the queue with that identity number to answer queued calls For information about using the call queuing feature refer to Working with Call Queues on page 200 You must also configure an attendant identity and a service associated with that identity to manage overflow calls How a service manages overflow calls is called the overflow behavior If an agent does not answer a queued call wi
155. S BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Paging Adding a Feature Access Code for Gateway Paging Devices If you are adding gateway paging to an existing PBX or to a paging controller you must also add an appropriate feature access code to the dial plan Ensure that the access code is not already being used by either the NetVanta UC Server or the SIP phone models in your organization Once the feature access code has been added to the dial plan add the feature access code as a dialable number to the paging group For more information on adding a dialable number to an existing paging group refer to Adding a Member to a Paging Group on page 75 using the dial plan on page 49 r For information on adding feature access codes to the dial plan refer to Routing calls Adding a Member to a Paging Group You can add the following new member types to an existing paging group identities phones multicast IP addresses and dialable numbers To add a member to a paging group 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane double click Paging Groups 2 Select the paging group to which you want to add a member 3 Inthe summary pane on the right right click on the paging group and select Add members from the drop down menu 4 Inthe Welcome menu of the Paging Group Wizard select Next 5 Select the member types you would like to add to the paging group e Select Identities if you want to select specific user identities to add to the paging group
156. S Security on page 154 e Configuring the User CoS Features on page 157 7 After you have finished configuring the user CoS settings select OK to save the user CoS Editing an Existing User CoS If you would like to make changes to an existing user CoS follow these steps to open and edit a user CoS 1 From the Administration tab select the Administration navigation bar to access the Administration navigation pane 2 Select the Classes of Service topic from the list 3 Inthe summary pane double click on the user CoS that you would like to edit The Edit User Class of Service menu appears Edit User Class of Service General Local Mailbox Limits Security Features General Name User Class of Service Use as default for new users Eo cet He 4 Edit the user CoS settings in the Local Mailbox Limits Security and Features tabs The following sections provide information for configuring the settings available in these tabs e Configuring the User CoS Local Mailbox Limits on page 154 e Configuring the User CoS Security on page 154 e Configuring the User CoS Features on page 157 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 153 Configuring Classes of Service ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 After you have finished configuring the user CoS settings select OK to save the user CoS Configuring the User CoS Local Mailbox Limits The Local Mailbox Limits tab allows the administrator to specify the mailbox storag
157. Select the paging group from which you want to remove a member In the summary pane on the right right click on the paging group member s you want to remove and select Remove members Select Yes to confirm The selected user is removed from the paging group Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Paging Configuring Hands Free Auto Answer Paging HFAA paging allows a user to send a bidirectional page to a single recipient When a user places an HFAA page the recipient s phone will automatically answer the call and a tone if enabled will be issued to alert the recipient of the page The page will then behave like a normal call between two users allowing both parties to converse freely The settings for HFAA paging such as the maximum wait time whether an audio prompt is issued to alert the recipient of the page and the WAV file used for the audio prompt are configured using the PagingServer exe config file located in the NetVanta UC Server Bin directory on the server computer Additionally the feature access code used to initiate an HFAA page can be changed from the default using the NetVanta ECS dial plan and the users able to use the HFAA paging service can be controlled using the NetVanta ECS toll restrictions For more information on configuring entries in the NetVanta ECS dial plan refer to Routing Calls on page 49 For more information on configuring toll restrictions refer to Allowi
158. Telecommuters deployment Main Office Active Directory Exchange Server optional optional NetVanta UC Server Telecommuter The NetVanta UC Server can accommodate telecommuters using a variety of methods For example telecommuters can check their voice and email messages remotely using the telephone user interface TUT or through Web mail using either a VPN connection or a SIP aware firewall over the Internet 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 13 Introducing the Administrator Application ECS BAS Administrator Guide NetVanta UC Server integration with a legacy PBX system NetVanta UC Servers can also connect to a traditional telephone system as a full service unified communications server but with call routing managed by the existing telephone system Starting the Administrator Application The NetVanta UC Server client must be installed The client software must match the Lu software version of the NetVanta UC Server To start the Administrator application 1 Select Windows Start gt Programs 2 Select NetVanta UC Client A menu box will appear 3 Inthe Server name or IP address field enter the name or IP address of the server to which you want to connect If the server and the application are on the same computer you can type localhost Lu instead of the full name 4 Enable the Save as default check box 5 Select OK Changing the Password If your
159. Telephones ECS BAS Administrator Guide To send a recorded page 1 From your phone dial 77 2 When prompted record your message and then use the options below Stop recording Press Playback recording Press 7 Re record Press 6 Broadcast page Press 5 To send an HFAA page 1 From your phone dial 2 Dial the extension of the user you would like to page 3 After you hear the tone begin speaking 4 When you are finished with the page hang up or use the end call function on your phone Parking Calls and Picking up Parked Calls Using Access Codes You can park an active call and the parked call can be retrieved on another phone This feature is useful if you want to change phones during a call This feature must be supported by the SIP server Lu To enable call park pickup refer to Configuring System Call Options on page 47 There are two methods of parking calls In one method the NetVanta UC Server selects the next available park number Alternatively you can select your own park number Having the NetVanta UC Server select the park number is useful if you are uncertain whether a call is already parked at a particular number If there is more than one identity is assigned to your phone then Transfer the call instead of putting it on hold If a person whose call has been parked then puts the call on hold the person retrieving Lu the parked call will hear dead air or silence until the other party resumes th
160. Unable to deliver a message to user LS Unrecognized character c in match pattern s in key s Wrong format in override rule file on line YS 619510001 1D Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs Possible Causes and Solutions ServiceStateMachine when an element refers to a data source that no longer exists Verify the following 1 The ODBC data source if applicable is correctly configured 2 The fields in the reference data source may have been changed or deleted Verify the data source configuration Occurs when the application server attempts to dial a number whose pattern matches a dial restriction entry configured in Tools gt Options gt Dialing Verify the application server toll restrictions The application server was unable to communicate with the IP Office remote agent Check the remote agent properties IP address port and network connection state There was a problem delivering a voice or fax message to a user Check your message store and network connection states to ensure that the connection to the message store is available This error occurs on the first message delivery failure An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and an In Band Signalling key s match pattern has an invalid character The file NetVanta UC Server Data System CalllnfoOverride cfg has been edited manually and one or more of the entries in this file are inval
161. User Profile 888 T Identities Business Communications Each user can have multiple identities associated with traditional telephony equipment such as PBXs User Profile Authenticated users have a user profile in the NetVanta UC Server that manages their business assistants and their message stores across multiple identites and devices Various SIP Compatible Devices Each user can have multiple identites associated with different SIP devices Users can have any number of identities on the system such as an extension number Through the user profile users can manage the identities that are associated with their profile The identities can also exist on different communications systems NetVanta UC Server is integrated with Active Directory If your network includes Active Directory for managing networks and shared resources NetVanta UC Server can take advantage of the Microsoft 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 83 Integrating with Active Directory ECS BAS Administrator Guide credentials for granting access to NetVanta UC Server resources For information on selecting an active domain refer to Specifying Active Domains on page 46 For information on changing users to local or Windows users refer to Changing Users to Local or Windows Users on page 99 Understanding Active Directory Microsoft networks include Active Directory which contains information about all computer accounts use
162. Using the Administrator tab you can see all faxes queued for delivery in the system You can view the recipient of the fax the fax status size and cover page and cancel or suspend any fax transmissions that you want However you can only view change the fax documents that you prepare for transmission yourself 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 209 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide The detail pane provides a partial view of a fax document that you select As you scroll through the list of available fax documents you can view them in the detail pane Use the Page up and Page down commands on the Preview toolbar to view multiple pages of a fax document 2 alala Page down Page up Use the Rotate commands on the Preview toolbar to change the orientation of a fax in the detail pane You can rotate only one page of a fax document or the entire document Rotate single page 180 degrees Rotate single page left Rotate single page right Rotate document 180 degrees F Rotate document left Rotate document right To view faxes in more detail you can use the Fax Viewer For more information about the Fax Viewer refer to Managing outgoing faxes on page 211 To send a fax using the Faxes menu 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the Fax Documents folder containing the document that you want to send The folder s contents are listed in the summary pane Q
163. a caller places a call on hold and then parks the call the other party hears background music regardless of whether Play background music when a caller is on hold is enabled From the Type list select one of the following e System users are able to park more than one call at a time e Extension users can park only one call at an extension at any time Type a URL in the Failover URL box The call rings back at this extension after the failover timeout period elapses If this box is blank the call rings back to the extension that originally parked the call Type a time out in the Failover Timeout box The default time out is 120 seconds 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 17 Introducing the Administrator Application ECS BAS Administrator Guide Installing the NetVanta UC Client Installing the NetVanta UC Server client application on a user s computer provides the following capabilities e Fax printer driver enables sending faxes from a user s desk e Greeting management e One time messages e Assistant options for example transferring callers and notification services e Personal settings for message delivery mailbox options client time zone settings and so forth e For the Personal Business Assistant PBA the ability to manage services and announcements To install the application 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the NetVanta UC Server software that you downloaded and double click CAAutoRun ex
164. age 209 6 If you select Save to file refer to To save a document as a fax on page 208 7 Ifyou select Send now select OK to open the Fax Recipients menu box 8 Select Addresses to select recipients from your Outlook Contacts list Otherwise enter the recipient names and fax numbers PP Addresses 9 Select Add to List for each recipient that you specify Lu To delete a recipient from the Recipient list select the recipient and then select Remove 10 Select Next and the Fax Scheduling menu box opens 11 Specify when you want to send the fax select Next and the Select Cover Page menu box opens 12 To include a fax cover page select Yes and double click a folder to view its contents 13 Select the cover page that you want select Next and the Cover Page Details menu box opens Use the arrow if you want to return to the previous folder t Go back arrow 14 Enter the subject and notes that you want to add to the cover page and then select Next 15 At the Finished menu select Finish The fax is sent according to the instructions 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 207 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide Saving a document as a fax to send later To save a document as a fax 1 2 3 4 6 7 Open the document that you want to save as a fax Select File gt Print to open the Print menu box In the Name drop down menu select the ADTRAN Fax Printer and select OK If you are prompted
165. ake Message Element on page 295 Triggers the recording of an incoming message for storage to a mailbox Advanced Menu Element on page 296 Allows callers to make a selection using the telephone keypad Manage Mailbox Element on page 296 Allows callers to retrieve messages remotely Change Mailbox Password Element on page 297 Allows users to change their mailbox password Verify Password Element on page 297 Allows the service to request a password from callers and ensure that a given password matches a specified one or the password for a particular mailbox Loop Counter Element on page 298 Allows you to limit the number of times the call flow will execute a path in the call flow Text To Speech Element on page 299 Reads text to the caller Gather Digits Element on page 299 Allows users to keep track of information that is entered by callers Compare Data Element on page 300 Allows users to compare patterns of data and directs call flow accordingly Create Log Entry Element on page 301 Allows users to capture and export detailed call log entry information Page Live Element on page 301 Connects the caller to the selected paging group and allows the caller to do a live page Page Recorded Element on page 302 Queues a prerecorded page for a specified paging group The request is associated with an audio file to be played when the paging request is initiated Generate Tones
166. al Phone Directory To exclude an identity from the Global Phone Directory follow these steps 1 In the Identities summary pane select one or more identities and right click on the highlighted identity or identities 2 Select Global Phone Directory gt Exclude from Global Phone Directory 142 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Installing and Configuring SIP Phones 8 Installing and Configuring SIP Phones This chapter presents basic SIP phone installation and configuration information for the NetVanta UC Server e Installing SIP Phones using Automatic Configuration on page 143 e Installing SIP Phones Manually on page 143 e Configuring SIP Phones on page 146 e Reducing Loss of Phone Service on page 150 Installing SIP Phones using Automatic Configuration The NetVanta UC Server allows you to quickly install SIP phones to the network When you physically connect an unconfigured SIP phone that supports automatic configuration to the network the phone is first assigned an IP address by the DHCP server If NetVanta UC Server has been properly set as the FTP or TFTP server in the DHCP server the DHCP server also provides the IP address of the NetVanta UC Server computer to the SIP phone The SIP phone will then retrieve a default configuration file from NetVanta UC Server The default configuration file will instruct the phone to register to port 6000 on the NetVanta UC Server computer causing the
167. all the Microsoft snap in The DLLs that you require are e CAMMCUserExt dll e CAMMCUserContextMenuExt dil The server installation puts these files in the BIN folder with the other executable files The server installation also registers the DLL with Windows so that on the server the NetVanta UC Server extensions are available immediately after installation This means that if you start the Active Directory Users and Computers MMC snap in you can see the NetVanta UC Server property page and context menu extensions Wor You must have the Administrator pack installed on the client operating system for the DLLs to function properly You can use these extensions on another computer To make the MMC extensions available on another computer 1 Copy the DLLs from the server computer to another folder on the computer on which you want them to be available For example C Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin 2 Register the DLLs by executing the following programs regsvr32 C Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin cammcuserext and regsvr32 C Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin cammcusercontextmenuext Lu In both cases a menu appears indicating that the registration is successful You do not have to do further configuration However both extensions support the use of a configuration file called DomainsToSearch cfg Either extension searches for registered NetVanta UC Servers on the local d
168. alled Extension The NetVanta UC Server calls the sequence of numbers in the order that you specify until the call is answered The call recipient must enter the password associated with the selected mailbox to retrieve messages over the phone You can limit deliveries to new messages or allow full mailbox management Mailbox Called Extension z value selector gt For more information refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 For information about contact address book synchronization refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 266 Specify call numbers by using the telephone button or use the The Mailbox drop down menu allows you to specify the mailbox from which the messages are sent apply when a caller forwards replies to or sends a message Lu Message delivery is provided only for messages left by incoming callers It does not To specify phone numbers for the Deliver Messages element 1 Select the telephone button 2 Inthe Enter Phone Number menu box enter a phone number in the Telephone number field and selecting New or You can also enter a phone number by right clicking inside the Call number s field 3 Ifyou want to specify an account code select the Use account code check box and enter an account code in the field 4 Select OK The target number appears in the Call Number s field The NetVanta UC Server calls the target number when i
169. aller can select a paging group from a list provided Parameters Parameters must be enabled To enable Parameters navigate to View gt Parameters in the menu bar at the top of the NetVanta UC Client Service Editor Paging Groups Select from one of the paging groups available The paging group must be pre defined using the Paging Group Wizard For more information refer to Creating and Configuring Paging Groups on page 73 If the value selected matches a paging group then the caller is transferred to the paging system as if they had dialed the access code for the specific paging group If the value selected does not match a paging group then the element exits through the Otherwise connector pin 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 303 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide 2 Under the Recorded audio submenu select one of the following to specify the audio to be played Database Values Your NetVanta UC Server version must be licensed for database integration in order to use this mode Announcements Greetings Temporary Recordings Temporary recordings can be used to record audio temporarily after a service has started Use the Record Announcement element to record the audio for a specific temporary recording The recordings are then stored in a temporary file which can be played by another element such as Page Recorded All temporary recordings are dis
170. allers to select a specific row from multiple rows fetched by a Fetch Data element on page 344 or Dial for Data element on page 345 Callers press keys on the keypad in response to prompts such as For press 1 for press 2 Callers select a specific item which becomes the current row Proenpt For a y Current Row 1 2 Source element Prompt for Current Row element The Source element for a Prompt for Current Row element allows you to select a Fetch Data or Dial for Data element in the service The Select on drop down menu contains the names of fields in the Source element with the exception of Audio or Fax fields e Ifthe Source element has exactly one row the element exits immediately through the Source element connector pin e Ifthe record set indicated by the Source does not exist the element has not been executed yet or if it has no rows then the element exits immediately through the No more rows connector pin e Ifthe caller presses an invalid key or fails to press a key within a few seconds then the last prompt is 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 351 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide repeated If this occurs three times or if an internal error occurs then the element exits through the Otherwise connector pin If the Source element has more than one row using Text to Speech TTS the element prompts the callers with Press for lt value 1 gt Press 2 for
171. alue selector refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Lu Selector on page 266 For information about contact address book synchronization refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 266 You can use the value selector gt to select a specific service to run when the outdial request is made and you can specify a delay to indicate when the outdial request should be processed You can specify up to 10 parameter values to be used in the outdial request Using the value selector gt you can select from a database value a value obtained from the Gather Digits element or a System Value for example today s date The Queue Outdial element executes as follows e The call exits through the first connector pin when the outdial request is successfully created The element executes without waiting for the request to be performed 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 305 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide e Ifthe outdial request was unsuccessful then the call exits through the Otherwise connector pin The Queue Outdial element is available for administrators only If an administrator creates a service using the Queue Outdial element and makes this service available to other uses by saving it to the Shared folder then PBA users will have this option available To select numbers for the outdial request to call 1 From the Queue Outdial element next to the Call nu
172. an IP address The u and pw parameters refer to the user name and password for authentication so that Outdial can login into the NetVanta UC Server to make the call If you are using single sign on then you can omit these parameters The ph parameter refers to your phone number or the phone number that you want Outdial to call This can be the full phone number or an extension number The s parameter refers to the service The Outdial exe automatically accesses the Services folder Within the Services folder we ve entered the path to the Shared folder and to the Default Trunk Service which is a sample service provided with the NetVanta UC Server We ve used quotation marks around the path because of the spaces in the service name so that the Outdial exe includes the entire path for the s service parameter Outbound Dialer Applications To use the Outbound Dialer you need to create a custom application script or NET application that satisfies your particular business requirements Outbound dialing can be used for a variety of purposes including the following School Absentee Notifications Appointment Reminders Emergency Response Notifications Cancellation announcements Information calls 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 237 Using Advanced Features ECS BAS Administrator Guide e Sale announcements e Product in stock notifications e Overdue book reminders e Wake up calls e Surveys You can use the Outbou
173. ange Server allows you to store and retrieve voice fax and email messages configure the Send email function and integrate 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 169 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide your contact list with NetVanta UC Server clients Additionally adding a trusted NetVanta UC Server allows NetVanta ucCompanion users to use the presence instant messaging IM and other ucCompanion features to communicate with other users of trusted NetVanta UC Server systems For non Exchange Server set ups you can use an SMTP server to send email notification The IMAP server configuration is preferred for use with Lotus Notes You can also change server information and delete a server Net anta UC Client ol x File Edit View Tools Help L URSS 1 a wl am 8 MEX gt Tabs p Admin Eric welis Shaun wens FD Users E Phones IR Paging Groups Gateways Ports GI classes of Service F3 authentications Ay Identities Data Sources 74 Dis e Identities Class of Service Locked Out_ Phones Moc Admin Eric welis 2003 General Voicemail Pers Jane Doe 6010 General Voicemail Pers John Doe 6000 General Voicemail shaun welts 2004 Summary Topics Pane Gy Servers User name Admin F communication Systems Most recent GUI access 9 22 2010 12 30 18 PM TA Netvanta 7000 Series J options TA netvants U
174. ange Server applies only if the Exchange Server is configured to send email notification 174 In the Message delivery section select one of the following options Send messages from Voice and fax messages are sent from the system mailbox system mailbox Impersonate callerand Voice and fax messages are stored directly in the user s mailbox rather store to mailbox than being sent Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server 9 Inthe Mailbox monitoring section check Enable mailbox monitoring if you want to enable mailbox monitoring for any or all users Enable mailbox monitoring Opens the Exchange Server mailboxes of selected users at system start up The NetVanta UC Server monitors each mailbox for changes in new message status and depending on the MWI settings adjusts the MWI accordingly Default setting for users If mailbox monitoring is enabled then this mode turns mailbox monitoring for users on or off by default 10 After configuring the Exchange Server the summary pane shows the connection state of the Exchange Server The connection state will appear as Disconnected if the service account has no mailbox or if the service account lacks permissions to access the Exchange Server For instructions on configuring a NetVanta UC Server service account mailbox refer to Appendix A of the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Guide available from the ADTRAN Support Com
175. anging the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 3 Inthe Announcements summary pane right click the announcement that you want to delete 4 Select Delete 5 Select Yes to confirm the deletion To rename an announcement 1 Select the announcements folder that contains the recording that you want to rename The announcements stored in the folder are listed in the summary pane 2 Right click the announcement that you want to rename 3 Select Rename Enter a new name for the announcement and then select its icon to make the change 326 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services 18 Using Databases in Call Answering Services This chapter introduces how to use access database information using database elements in call answering services and includes the following topics e Overview on page 327 e Managing Data Sources on page 327 e Accessing Data using Database Service Elements on page 339 e Using Database Elements on page 343 To access database information the system must be licensed for database integration If Lu you are not licensed for database integration then the Database tab of elements is not visible Overview You can use the NetVanta UC Server to access dynamic database information using services user with access to the Administrator tab can create user data tables Each user has a copy of the table where th
176. ant to create personalized services and announcements Select OK To change the operator for a user 1 2 3 4 5 6 In the Users summary pane right click the user name that you want to modify and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable UC Server for this user is checked Select the Advanced button to open the User Details menu On the General tab in the Call Answering section select one of the following operators for the user e System the general operator typically a company receptionist where calls are directed when a caller presses 0 in a voicemail greeting e Personal operator a specific operator for example a personal receptionist or an individual user in a particular department or location where calls are directed when a caller presses 0 in a voicemail greeting If you selected Personal operator enter the operator s extension number in the field Select OK 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 89 Integrating with Active Directory ECS BAS Administrator Guide To change the time zone setting for a user 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name whose time zone setting you want to change and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable UC Server for this user is checked Select the Advanced button to open the User De
177. ant to include appears in the list Lu Some of the information types appear blank in the call log depending on the PBX Page Live Element Ty E If you are using SIP paging then you can use the Page Live element to i al initiate a live page from a call answering service The element connects the caller to the selected paging group and allows the caller to do a live Paging group page into the phone once they are connected to the paging group Audio is spoken by the caller and played immediately to the paging group Using the Page Live element in a service enables you to send broadcast announcement pages to phones identities that is extensions and Multicast paging groups The Page Live element is not available to PBA users However Admin users can create Lu shared services that contain the Page Live element and these services can be assigned by a PBA user to one of their identities Lu For information on configuring paging refer to Configuring Paging on page 61 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 301 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using the Page Live or Page Recorded elements in a service is supported if your system ore is configured for SIP paging Using the paging elements in a service is not supported for paging using a sound card or a gateway To select a paging group to send a live page to Under the Paging group submenu se
178. anta UC Server Choosing IMAP message store means that messages are stored on the IMAP server Changing Users to Local or Windows Users Using the NetVanta User Migration Wizard you can quickly change the location and status of groups of users You can migrate local users to Microsoft Windows users linked to Microsoft Active Directory including converting the users to using Microsoft Exchange Server as a message store If a system has been configured off site prior to customer installation users might have been created or imported as local users Once at the site you can migrate all or some of those users to Active Directory by running the User Migration Wizard Link users to Active Directory to enable single sign on You can also 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 99 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide choose to automatically link users to an Exchange Server You can migrate Windows users to local users which are controlled exclusively by the NetVanta UC Server Local users have local authentications and you can also choose to use Local Message Store To change local users to Windows users 1 2 3 4 Right click anywhere in the Users summary pane and select Migrate Users Select Next to begin the wizard Enable Local users to Windows users and authentications From the drop down menu select the domain where Active Directory users will be matched to local users Select one or both of the followi
179. applications such as BlackBerry Enterprise Server e The message appears to be from the system mailbox and the From line does not include the caller s phone number Impersonate caller Voice and fax messages are stored directly in the user s mailbox rather than and store to mailbox being sent This mode has the following effects e User defined message rules in Outlook or Exchange Server are not applied For example a user s rule directing messages from a particular contact to a specific folder is not applied e Messages are not sent to any third party applications such as BlackBerry Enterprise Server e The From line includes the caller s phone number or the caller s name from a contact that matches the phone number You can configure Exchange Server to monitor users mailboxes to determine when a new message arrives or is read or when a message is marked as read or unread The advantage is that when a user accesses their voicemail messages through Microsoft Outlook Web Access or a mobile device the NetVanta UC Server adjusts the message waiting indicator on the user s phone accordingly to turn it on or off Without 172 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server mailbox monitoring the NetVanta UC Server is unaware when a user accesses their voicemail messages through Outlook Web Access or a mobile device For example even after a user has accessed all their new
180. are available for each user one identity can be used for a hardphone and another for a softphone Any additional identities require an additional license To increase the number of identities contact your reseller or ADTRAN Sales To contact ADTRAN Sales email sales adtran com or visit the ADTRAN website at www adtran com To determine the maximum number of identity licenses per user 1 Log in to NetVanta UC Client as an administrator 2 From the Admin tab select Help gt License Information 3 Go to the Number of additional per user SIP identities and note the license value 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 127 Managing User Extensions and Identities ECS BAS Administrator Guide 4 Go to the Number of additional pooled SIP identities and note the license value 5 Add the sum of the two values noted above to determine the maximum number of identity licenses per user You can associate multiple identities to a single user profile and each identity can have a different behavior that is managed by the owner of the profile This behavior can be defined by the administrator by assigning a service to the identity when the service is created Services are essentially customized ways of answering calls By default e The Default Trunk Service is assigned to identities associated with the administrator account e The Default Personal Business Assistant is assigned to identities associated with user accounts Users can only a
181. ary NetVanta UC Server fails The advanced connection options are used to configure the phone information required for Business Continuity failover support When configuring the CoS advanced connection options you can specify whether phones register with a secondary NetVanta UC Server or a SIP proxy server If a SIP proxy server is used the SIP proxy will forward the SIP packets to the secondary server in case the primary server fails If you are using a SIP proxy it must be aware of both the primary and secondary NetVanta one UC Server and it must be configured to reroute the SIP packets from the phones based on which NetVanta UC Server is operational 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 161 Configuring Classes of Service ECS BAS Administrator Guide Enabling Secondary Registration To enable registration to the secondary NetVanta UC Server for phones in this CoS select the Enable secondary registration if secondary server exists check box The phones with this CoS applied will dual register with both the primary and secondary NetVanta UC Server Only phones that support dual registration can register with a secondary NetVanta UC ore Server Edit Phone Class of Service A phone class of service can be applied to one or more phones and defines some common attributes for those phones Name Phone Class of Service Use as default for new phones Advanced connection options v Enable secondary registration
182. as Admin For Help press F1 Managing Services You can create a service and then you can preview activate rename copy or delete that service You can create and manage the folders in which you save your services ADTRAN has provided some samples services to get you started Before creating a new service preview the samples provided to see if a sample service exists that is similar to Lu what you are looking so If you find a similar service copy it rename it and then modify it suit your needs Many of the sample services provided by ADTRAN use database integration If your Lu NetVanta UC Server version is not licensed for database integration then the database elements used in the sample services will not work as intended To create a service 1 Right click anywhere in the summary pane 2 Select New gt Service to add a new service to the list in the summary pane The service icon denotes the new service and the default name is Service be Service icon 254 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Creating Custom Call Answering Services 3 Enter a name for the service Lu You can also right click the service and then select Rename Enter the new name again and then select the icon next to the service name to make the change Working with services When you select the Services navigation bar the services you create are listed by name in the summary pane Y
183. ash can Ej Select OK An authentication is a set of credentials that allow or deny users access to the system for example using a user name or password User profiles can have many authentications and vice versa Therefore when an authentication is used to access the NetVanta UC Client the user might have access to several user profiles each with several identities For more information refer to Enabling Access to User Profiles using Authentications on page 123 2 3 4 5 Select the Identities button 6 7 8 Authentications are created automatically when a user is added using the New User Wizard The primary authentication is the main authentication that owns the user profile Wore Although it is possible to remove the primary authentication ADTRAN does not advise doing so 94 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Integrating with Active Directory When you add an authentication to a user profile the authentication then has access to another user s NetVanta UC Server client application The profiles that a user has authorization to access are displayed in the Authentications field on the UC Server tab To add an authentication to a user 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name to which you want to add an authentication and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable Unified C
184. assign an identity to a phone using the Identities navigation pane For one information about assigning i dentities refer to Assigning a User Identity to a New Phone on page 131 or Assigning a User Identity to an Existing Phone on page 132 To change the button number for Identities Speed Dial BLF and Park Zone buttons 1 Inthe Assigned Buttons list select the button whose number you want to change 2 Select the up or down arrow t o to change the button number 3 Select OK To delete a button on a phone 1 Inthe Assigned Buttons list select the button that you want to delete 2 Select the trash can to delete the button 3 Select OK Restarting Phones and Reloading Phone Configurations If you are experiencing problems with the phone or the network you may need to restart a phone Some phone types such as ADTRAN Polycom and ADTRAN branded Polycom phones automatically restart when the phone configuration is reloaded while other phone types such as snom phones do not automatically restart Therefore you may have to reload the system configuration for the phones following changes to the configuration To restart a phone 1 Inthe Phones summary pane right click the phone that you want to restart More than one phone can be selected by holding down the CTRL key and selecting the desired phones 2 Select Restart Phone from the right click menu ore This method can only be used to restart ADTRAN Connect PLUS phon
185. associated with a particular area of expertise for example sales or support A support agent who is ready to answer calls can log into the call queue and receive support calls in a specified order such as in order of arrival or priority Calls are distributed to the most idle agent If an agent is logged in the caller hears an introductory queue greeting If no agents are logged in the caller is directed to the overflow destination The overflow destination then provides an additional greeting If callers know the queue number they can dial directly into a queue Agents can log in or log out of a queue Agents who log in to a queue receive calls that are directed to that queue ome The maximum number of agents that can log in to a queue at the same time is 64 To subscribe to a queue 1 Dial 81 lt QueueNumber gt Ensure that you enter the correct queue number 2 Hang up without errors Wor To avoid errors when entering queue numbers use speed dial to log in and out of queues To unsubscribe from a queue 1 Dial 82 lt QueueNumber gt 2 Hang up To present a call to the queue 1 Dial 80 lt QueueNumber gt 2 Hang up If you are logged into a queue to accept incoming queued calls there may be times when you wish to temporarily stop accepting queued calls without logging out of the queue You can manually set your status to unavailable to prevent accepting further incoming queued calls without logging out
186. ating loop back links A loop back link returns a call to a preceding element in the call flow Loop back links are useful for 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 261 Creating Custom Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide repeating a set of menu options or for restating instructions to a caller who has failed to make a selection on the phone keypad following a prompt To create a loop back link 1 Select the connector pin and drag to the element icon that you want to loop back to 2 Release the mouse to create the loop back link 3 Point to the connector link The loop back path is highlighted in red a Play L Announcement 2 Play Haz Announcement P A Called Extension bi K TrunkGreeting Play status message T Allow dial by JExtensior Stop when key pressed Play entire message a On f zl G On 2 x Loop back path Too many attempts Customizing Services using Parameters You can use additional parameters in order to customize services Parameters can be used in most elements that accept input such as email addresses log entries transfer numbers or database comparisons Parameters can also be used in the Equals field in the Data Source Selector For more information refer to Using the Data Source Selector on page 339 Parameters can be used with the following elements e The Assisted Transfer Transfer Call
187. ations ADTRAN does not take action in response to the emails received Data is gathered for Statistical purposes only to aid in improving the NetVanta UC Server ADTRAN will not ome take action unless you create a service request following standard support procedures For information on contacting ADTRAN Technical Support refer to the ADTRAN website at www adtran com support Lu For information refer to Enabling Diagnostic Information on page 368 The diagnostics system options allow you to specify the following e Exception Reports Generates and sends a report to ADTRAN or the configured email recipients whenever the application is not operating properly A detailed error report if enabled can be included with the exception report This detailed error report is the contents of the error report file generated when an exception occurs in NetVanta UC Server The maximum file size of the detailed error report can also be configured e Diagnostic Notifications Sends diagnostic notifications to specified email addresses 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 43 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide Port Auditing Specifies how frequently you want to test idle ports If a port is faulty it is reset and returned to idle status To configure the NetVanta UC Server to send exception reports 1 2 3 4 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select t
188. ative Tools Common 2 Select User Manager for Domains to open the User Manager for Domains menu box 3 From the list of users select UC Server 4 Press Delete on the keyboard 5 Confirm the deletion at the warning prompts 372 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs Overview The NetVanta UC Server tracks system errors and warnings in log files which may be used for troubleshooting This section includes potential system errors and warnings that may occur and possible causes for and solutions to these issues one Not all errors and warnings necessarily require action ome For more information on troubleshooting refer to Troubleshooting on page 357 Troubleshooting System Error Logs The following is a list of potential system errors that may be noted in the System Errors and Warning logs To troubleshoot a system error search the list below for the log entry and note the possible causes of and solutions for the error Severity Log Entry Possible Causes and Solutions Serious Error Failed to create identity s Internal Verify that all NetVanta UC Server processes are error d started and retry creating the identity Serious Error Failed to deliver a message to user A message that was queued for message LS delivery has given up attempting to deliver the message The messages will be delivered to the
189. ator Guide Managing User Profiles 9 Inthe Select User menu select OK to accept the user object 10 Enable the Include in dial by name directory check box if you want the user included in the dial by name directory 11 Use the Class of service drop down menu to select the class of service CoS for the user 12 Use the Voice drop down menu to select the desired voice that the system will use for prerecorded announcements voice mailbox management and voice mail behavior for the Voice Mail element and Personal Assistant mode The properties of a voice combine features of language gender and Text to Speech TTS For example the English U S Female voice provides audio prompts and TTS spoken in American English by a female speaker 13 Enable the Use Active Directory for messaging configuration check box to allow the new user to have Windows user privileges Active Directory users do not have to enter a password each time they log into the system NetVanta UC Server recognizes and authenticates the user Enabling Use Active Directory for messaging configuration automatically Lu configures the user to use Exchange Server as the email message store if the user is configured to use Exchange Server in Active Directory 14 Enter an extension number in the Identity field This extension number is also known as an Identity 15 Using the adjacent drop down menu select a server for the identity 16 If you want the identity to bel
190. authorization and password are associated with a user identity Net anta UC Client File Edit View Tools Help Tabs p Admin Eric wels Shaun Welt DER EEE a amp l BEE E Phones pal Paging Groups Gateways Ports Ep classes of Service FA authentications Ry identities GX Data sources Topics Eric welis 2003 Jane Doe 6010 John Doe 6000 shaun welis 2004 Class of Service General Voicemail General Voicemail General Voicemail Summary Pane Gy Servers F communication Systems TA Netvanta 7000 Series J options TA netvanta UC Server J Routing J Services Navigation Pane Services Announcements Distribution Lists Faxes Logs Navigation Bars The Admin user profile does not have any associated identities Identitites Pane For Help press F1 To obtain the SIP authentication and password for an identity 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select the Identities topic User name Admin Most recent GUI access 8 22 2010 12 30 18 PM Detail Pane Connected as Admin 1 Inthe menu bar select View Ensure that Display Identities for all Profiles is checked te Hl aS Password Select Open from the drop down menu To add a phone using a barcode scanner 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select the Phones topic 2 Select the IP address field in
191. ax document for a Fax on demand element 1 On the Fax on demand element enable the Include cover page check box 2 Inthe Fax Cover Page Details menu box select the Browse E button 3 Select a fax cover page 4 Select Select The cover page title appears in the Select cover page file field of the Select Cover Page menu box 286 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services 5 Inthe Subject and Comments fields enter information that you want to include on the fax cover page 6 Ifyou want to include dynamic information in the Subject and Comments fields use the value selectors gt You can include both text and value information in the Subject and Comments fields of Lu the Fax on demand element 7 Select OK 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 287 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Using Advanced Elements Select the Advanced tab on the tool palette to view the advanced elements The following table gives a brief description of each available element Select Extension Element on page 289 Waits for callers to enter an extension number using the telephone keypad can be used for selecting mailboxes Record Announcement Element on page 292 Allows callers with user accounts to record over existing announcements or greetings create temporary recordings or record into a database using a remote telephone T
192. be the dial plan rule You can assign priority to the rule that you want to use if two or more dial plan rules match a given string The lower the number the higher the priority The default priority is 30 Ring groups and hunt groups are assigned a priority of 10 It is recommended that when adding any new dial plan entry a gateway is selected as the destination address Select a gateway from the list as a destination address Selecting a host as a destination address is not recommended If you select Host then enter an IP address a fully qualified domain name FQDN a DNS name or an extension You can also enter pbxservices as a host name The host can be local or remote You can configure multiple hosts by separating them with spaces Allows you to specify the number of overflow rings before a call is forwarded Indicates the number of digits starting at the left that you want to discard before the digits travel to the host This is useful if you want to remove special digits that users must dial to select a particular host Allows you to specify a digit string to add in front of a dialed string before it travels to the host This is useful for adding common prefixes such as 1 800 to a dialed number Allows you to specify a set of digits to add at the end of a dialed digit string before it travels to the host This is useful for adding suffixes such as a calling card number The default transport
193. ble below a Add button label Add Database fields Fields SL 1H New S Name Data Type Deci Default Value Display 1 Property ID Number 2 Address amp Price Audio 15 3 Audio Walkth Audio 15 4 Fax Description Fax 15 Sorting and retrieval Abc Sort field Property ID v Sort order ascending X Maximum 200 e Help Users cannot share user data tables each user adds data and maintains individual data tables Only the Administrator and Personal Business Assistant users can edit the data in their copy of a user data table access the data source S To make a data source available to a user an element in the user s active service must Other options include sorting and retrieving user data To create a new user data source 1 Right click anywhere in the Data Sources content pane 2 Select New gt User Data 3 Type a name for the new user data source in the Name box 4 Ifyou do not want to further define the user data source you can select OK to save it 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 333 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide To edit user data source display options 1 In the Data Sources content pane double click the user data source that you want to edit 2 In the Description box type the title of the user data source 3 In the Instructions box type the instructions that you want the user to follow when using the data
194. buttons to play new unheard messages and old heard messages in either chronological or reverse chronological order and select OK Setting Voicemail Options These options define how voicemail elements work when you include them in a service that you activate on a trunk or when a user with Personal Business Assistant mode inserts the voicemail element in a service The options also apply system wide to Personal Business Assistant mode You can allow callers to transfer out of a user s voicemail when they press a specified key This is useful if for example a caller wants to talk to any salesperson While the caller listens to a salesperson s voicemail the caller can press a key to transfer to another salesperson Alternatively callers can leave a message for one salesperson and transfer to another after they finish recording their message without having to hang up and call back into the system Lu For information on voicemail elements refer to Voicemail element on page 276 To specify the NetVanta UC Server access key 1 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Voice Mail tab 3 From the Enter mailbox management drop down menu select a key to be used to start mailbox management This key is the NetVanta UC Server access key to To specify the dial by name mode on page 36 or The NetVanta UC Server access key cannot be the same as the operator access key refer 6195
195. c phones rather than user identitites to be included as members of the paging group Use the check boxes next to the phone MAC address in the MAC Address column to select the phones you would like to include in the paging group If you have already selected an identity associated with a phone you do not need to select the corresponding phone MAC address Select Next The Enter Multicast IP Addresses menu will appear 11 Inthe Enter Multicast IP Addresses menu select Add to add a multicast IP address to the paging group In the Mulsticast IP Address Details menu that appears enter the multicast IP address of the paging equipment in the Multicast address field and enter the corresponding port number in the Port field Select OK to add the multicast IP address After you have added all of the desired multicast IP addresses select Next The multicast IP address and port numbers are configured on the multicast paging devices Multicast IP addresses are in the range 224 1 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 Refer Lu to the section Configuring Multicast Paging on page 70 for more information about multicasting 12 Review the paging group summary If there are any changes you wish to make select the Back button and make the changes When you are satisfied with the paging group summary select Submit 13 Select Next 14 Select Finish Adding a Sound Card or Gateway Paging Device to a Paging Group In order for users to send pages using the NetVanta
196. carded when the service ends Up to 10 temporary recordings can be made If the paging group and recorded audio values selected are valid then the page request is queued in the system the element exits through the Paging group connector pin and service execution continues If the paging group value selected does not match a paging group then the element exits through the Otherwise connector pin If the audio selected does not exist or is zero length then the element exits through the Otherwise connector pin Generate Tones Element The Generate Tones element enables a service to insert a dual tone Cr te multi frequency DTMF tone to the current call DTMF tones are also known as touch tone dialing Tones The Generate Tones element would typically be used in an outbound dialing service For example an outbound dialing service might be required to enter DTMF digits to dial an extension number for a specific caller in an automated attendant to access an external paging system or to enter an account code The characters 0 9 and produce the associated tones You can introduce pauses between digits by entering commas between digits For example 1 2 3 4 If the tones are generated successfully then the call exits through the Tones connector pin If the tones cannot be generated for any reason for example the call does not exist then the call exits through the Otherwise connector pin
197. ced and Database element tabs You can dock the Tool Palette to either side of the window To access database information the system must be licensed for database integration If Lu you are not licensed for database integration the Database tab in the Service Editor is unavailable The canvas is the design area All elements and links are shown here Each element performs a separate 258 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Creating Custom Call Answering Services function within the call flow Connections between elements are referred to as links and they define the call flow To view an element e Drag an element from the tool palette to the canvas The element is automatically positioned in the top left corner Each Element has an icon title area T bar control help button and a connector pin associated with it Some elements have more than one connector pin depending on their function T bar Help Called Extension Connector M Play status message Pin Add Menu Item The Icon is a visual representation of the element type In the Title area you can enter a description of the element s function The T bar control displays the properties associated with the element To save canvas space select the T bar control to collapse the element as needed To restore information about a collapsed element select its T bar control The three modes of display are illustrated belo
198. cement element to f Stop after 4 digits give the caller instructions When the NetVanta UC Server has gathered D ES 7 os number of digits the caller moves to the connected No digits collected If no digits are gathered the caller moves to the element connected to 2 the No digits collected connector pin If too few digits are gathered or the time limit for entering digits is exceeded then the caller moves to the element connected to the Otherwise connector pin The Gather Digits element works with the Compare Data element The Gather Digits element must appear in the call flow before the Compare Data element but does not need to be connected directly to it You can include elements between them in the call flow To specify the number of digits to gather 1 Enable one of the following Stop after the number of digits is fixed It lets you specify the number of digits e Gather up to 20 digits the number of digits is variable up to 20 2 Ifyou selected the Stop after button then enter the number of digits in the field 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 299 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Compare Data Element MM comparebata1 M The Compare Data element compares data that is collected by a al Gather Digits element system values for example Today s Date or database values and directs the call flow accordingly For example you Compare to might wan
199. ces on page 265 page 263 Wor To troubleshoot services using data sources refer to Troubleshooting Services on Using the Data Source Selector You can use the Data Source Selector feature to specify a data source and to filter the data that is returned The Data Source Selector is available for elements that require access to database information as part of their functionality such as the Fetch Data Update Data and Dial for Data elements You can filter data by selecting a data source field a comparison operator and a value You can filter the data by selecting the following comparison options e Equals e Less Than e Less Than Equal to e Greater Than e Greater Than Equal e Between e Not Equal Using the value selector gt you can specify the value that you want to compare to the filter field An easily recognizable icon appears in the Source menu box to indicate the type of data that you are using 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 339 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide for the comparison value For example the Gather Digits icon appears with the name of the Gather Digits element that is included in the service The values that are available depend on the data source that you choose the other elements included in the call flow for example a Gather Digits element and the values that you have set up for your system a Fetch Data 1 a 2 Source
200. ces tab 3 In the list of available voices select the voice you would like to disable The voice will become highlighted 4 Select the Disable button The Enabled column in the list of available voices will change from Yes to No ore The Disable button is inactive if the voice you selected is the default voice 34 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options 5 Select OK Wor changes If the changes are confirmed then the attempt to commit the changes If a voice being disabled is currently in use by a user you will be warned that A voice being disabled is in use by one or more users and prompted to confirm or cancel the continues otherwise the commit attempt is cancelled If the commit attempt is successful all users who use a disabled voice will automatically be changed to use the system default voice Setting the Default Voice The default voice is the voice used by default for system announcements Users who have not selected a voice for system announcements or have not been assigned a voice by an administrator will automatically receive system announcements in the default voice The default voice can be changed from English U S Male to another available voice When a new default voice is configured it is automatically enabled To set the Default voice 1 2 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Sele
201. changes in any of the following fields e Display name e Address e Number of rings the number of rings before the overflow behavior is initiated 4 Inthe Call answering behavior section enable or disable the Enable check box 5 Ifyou want to change the attendant identity Active service select the value selector gt and choose a new service 6 Select OK Changing the Number of Rings for an Identity To change the number of rings for an identity follow these steps 1 In the Identities summary pane right click the identity for which you want to change the number of rings 2 Select Open The Identity menu will appear 3 Inthe Identity menu use the Number of rings drop down menu to select the number of rings that you want for the identity The default number of rings is 4 4 Select OK Removing an Identity To remove an identity follow these steps 1 In the Identities summary pane right click the identity that you want to remove 2 Select Delete 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 135 Managing User Extensions and Identities ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion Ring and Hunt Group Identities You can create ring or hunt groups and you can include external numbers as part of the group Ring Group A ring group is a group of identities that are all contacted simultaneously when a call comes in For example a sales department might include several sales agents ina
202. come before the Voicemail element in the call flow If the Mailbox selection is Selected Extension it refers to the identity selected in the last successful Select Extension element in the service If there was none or the last one failed it defaults to be the same as Called Extension The Play status message mode is enabled by default The status message pre empts the user s greeting message and cannot be interrupted Make sure the Play status message mode is also enabled on a Play Announcement element if required 276 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Administrators can specify the mailbox where messages are stored A number of system wide options apply to the Voicemail element These can be found on the Voicemail tab under Options on the Tools menu For information about administrator options for the Voicemail element refer to Setting Voicemail Options on page 27 Deliver Messages element em E The Deliver Messages element sends voice and fax messages from a F bn ss 2 selected mailbox to the phone numbers that you specify Called Extension refers to the identity originally called Selected Extension Play new messages refers to the identity selected in the last successful Select Extension Manage mailbox element in the service If there was none or the last one failed it Call number s a FE FE a defaults to be the same as the C
203. complaint e Ensure that the network connection between the NetVanta UC Server and the email server is reliable and has sufficient bandwidth in both directions Troubleshooting Message Waiting Indicators Sometimes message waiting indicators MWI on phones are incorrect following a power failure or changes to the PBX For information on configuring message waiting indicators system wide refer to Configuring Message Waiting Indicator Options on page 24 For information on configuring a user s message waiting indicator refer to Configuring a user s message Lu waiting indicator on page 117 For information on synchronizing message waiting indicators when messages are accessed through the web or through a mobile device refer to Configuring message delivery on page 172 Symptoms The MWI on phones are incorrect Possible Causes e A power failure has occurred e Changes were made to the PBX Solution You can resynchronize the MWI on phones To resynchronize message waiting indicators on phones Select Tools gt Resynchronize All message waiting indicators 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 359 Troubleshooting ECS BAS Administrator Guide Troubleshooting the NetVanta UC Server ADTRAN has observed that third party firewall and antivirus products can cause problems with the proper operation of the NetVanta UC Server Wore The NetVanta UC Server is tested with Microsoft security products such as Win
204. concepts and terminology e Purchase Key The purchase key product key is a unique system identifier that was assigned to you when the NetVanta UC Server system was ordered The purchase key includes the core software and the bundled feature contents according to the original product purchase The purchase key can be identified as a unique key that XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX where X can be any combinations of numbers or capital letters e Upgrade keys An upgrade key represents a upgrade to an existing product and is used to generate a 190 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server license key Upgrade keys can be purchased to increment components of NetVanta UC Server independently of the core software The NetVanta UC Server software does not keep track of upgrade keys but they are maintained and used by ADTRAN to generate the correct license key In addition to product capabilities upgrade keys are also used to extend software assurance An upgrade key can be identified with the following format XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX U where X can be any combination of numbers or capital letters e Machine Identifier A unique signature that is automatically generated based on the computer platform installed hardware e License Key An encoded key generated by ADTRAN that includes product attributes that will only work with systems that have a specific purchase key and associated machin
205. copy of the cover page Right click the copy of the cover page Select Rename Enter a new name for the fax cover page p oS m pM e Double click the new fax cover page to open the Fax Cover Page Editor and make the changes that you want r Ifyou do not make a copy of the cover page before you make the changes the application permanently replaces the original cover page template with your changed copy Use the Fax Cover Page Editor to customize the cover pages that you create and to change those that 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 219 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide already exist You can design and manipulate images to give your cover pages a distinctive look according to your needs and preferences Your cover page is like a template you can use it store it change it and reuse it as often as you want You can access the Fax Cover Page Editor by creating a new fax cover page or by editing an existing fax cover page To access the Fax Cover Page Editor 1 From the NetVanta UC Client select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 To open the Fax Cover Page Editor right click anywhere in the summary pane select New in the shortcut menu and select Fax Cover Page Alternatively to open an existing fax cover page select a fax cover page right click and select Open 3 Inthe summary pane double click the icon of the new cover page The Fax Cover Page Editor consists of a standard Menu bar a
206. ct the Voices tab In the list of available voices select the voice you would like to make the default voice The voice will become highlighted Select the Default button above the list of available voices Default will appear in the Default column of the selected voice signifying that the selected voice is now the default voice Select OK below the list of available voices RE To revert the voice settings back to the system defaults select the Defaults button 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 35 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the Text to Speech Voice Properties The default TTS voice properties can be changed for available voices using the Edit Voice menu This menu allows administrators to configure the voice to use for TTS as well as the TTS volume and the sample rate The available TTS voices are dependent upon the TTS vendor that was licensed Wor Only one TTS vendor either Nuance Communications or Speech Technology Group STG can be licensed The table below shows the TTS voices available from each vendor and the voices with which they are associated by default i Default TTS Voice Name Voice Nuance Licensed STG Licensed English U S Male Speechify Solo Tom quality 01708 VW Paul English U S Female Speechify Solo Mara quality 01708 VW Julie French Canada Female VW Chloe To configure the TTS voice properties
207. cted On systems with more than 100 users system design and engineering must consider the increased load that keeping open large numbers of mailboxes will have on the Exchange Server Enabling monitoring of more than 500 mailboxes requires careful consideration and probably should not be done without a slow roll out procedure to validate the performance of both Exchange Server and the Net Vanta UC Server in the specific customer environment If your Exchange Server is at or near capacity then you may want to disable mailbox monitoring 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 361 Troubleshooting ECS BAS Administrator Guide Solutions The following are two possible solutions to improving performance on Exchange Server by disabling or decreasing mailbox monitoring Select the option you prefer and then follow the relevant instructions below to implement it e Disable mailbox monitoring system wide so that mailbox monitoring is disabled for all users regardless of individual user settings e Enable mailbox monitoring and set the default setting for mailbox monitoring for users to off then enable mailbox monitoring only for those users who require it To disable mailbox monitoring system wide 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select Servers 2 Double click on Exchange 3 Under Mailbox monitoring uncheck Enable mailbox monitoring Mailbox monitoring is now disabled for all users regardless of each users mailbox monitoring set
208. d PIN and mandating password and PIN changes after a certain amount of time 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 155 Configuring Classes of Service ECS BAS Administrator Guide Specifying these rules helps maintain a more secure voicemail system The following table describes the settings available in the Password rules section of the Security tab Minimum password length Specifies the minimum length of a password By default the minimum password length is 4 characters The valid password length range is 4 to 128 characters Maximum password age Specifies the frequency in days with which the user s password must be changed By default passwords can be used for 120 days To specify that passwords must be changed after a particular amount of time select the check box next to Maximum password age and enter the number of days until the next password is required The valid range is 1 to 9999 days Password must meet complexity requirements Specifies whether passwords must meet complexity rules By default complexity rules for passwords are enabled The complexity rules for passwords are as follows e Must not match the authentication name e Must have at least one uppercase and one lowercase alphabet character e Must have at least one digit or symbol A new password cannot be the same as the existing password This requirement is always in effect and cannot be disabled The following table desc
209. d by the data source and you should not make any assumptions about the order e Ifa sort order is defined the first row is the first row in the sort order specified However if the sort field contains duplicate values the order of rows with the same sort value is determined by the data source and you should not make any assumptions about the order For example assume that you have a data source with a Date field and that each row in the data source has a unique date value If the data source defines a sort order based on this Date field and descending order then any Fetch Data element that fetches from the data source will retrieve rows in descending date order If a Fetch Data element fetches multiple rows then the first row will be the row in the fetched set of records with the newest value in the Date field Thus another element referencing this Fetch Data element would always reference the newest row Without the sort you cannot predict which row in the retrieved set would be first 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 335 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide To define user data source sorting and retrieval options 1 2 3 4 In the Data Sources content pane double click the user data source that you want to define From the Sort Field list select the field that you want to sort From the Sort Order list select ascending or descending In the Maximum Rows box type the number of r
210. d information It also includes security information which allows you to define a user name and password to access the database 328 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services User data tables allow a user to manage personal data without setting up an entire database After the Administrator creates data tables users can manage them by adding changing and deleting the rows within the tables A set of elements allows users to access information in data sources while defining a service These elements allow users to retrieve data manage data sources and select from sets of values Most elements allow users to use information retrieved from data sources Lu The data sources feature is available only if database integration is licensed To make a user data source available to a user it must be accessed by an element in the user s active service Defining ODBC data sources To use an ODBC data source you must define an ODBC Data Source Name DSN that uses the related driver The DSN name user ID and password must be configured to connect to the source Microsoft Windows Wo You can define an ODBC data source by using the Administrator utility provided with After defining a DSN you can use the Data Source Editor to define ODBC Open Database Connectivity data sources ODBC data sources include relational databases and other kinds of data
211. d proxy Proxy port Proxy type 0 For Help press F1 Connected as Admin Summary Pane Detail Pane 3 Right click on the Classes of Service topic in the Administration navigation pane pane and select New User Class of Service from the drop down menu You can also create a new CoS by highlighting the Classes of Service topic in the Administration navigation pane and right clicking on the summary pane Select New User Class of Service from the drop down menu The New User Class of Service menu appears 152 New User Class of Service General Local Mailbox Limits Security Features General Name User Class of Service Use as default for new users Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Classes of Service 4 Inthe General tab of the New User Class of Service menu specify the name for the CoS in the Name field The name should be a unique identifier specifically for this CoS 5 Select the check box next to Use as default for new users if you want this user CoS to be the default 6 You can select OK to save the user CoS with the default settings or you can continue to edit the user CoS settings in the Local Mailbox Limits Security and Features tabs The following sections provide information for configuring the settings available in these tabs e Configuring the User CoS Local Mailbox Limits on page 154 e Configuring the User Co
212. d to the selected paging group Alternatively prerecorded announcements can be selected through a service to be played to the selected paging group For more information on temporary recordings refer to Allowing Callers to Make Temporary Recordings Within a Service on page 267 Paging requests are processed by the system in the order they are received All queued paging requests are processed before any Active Message Delivery AMD or Outdial requests The Page Recorded element is not available toPBA users However Admin users can Lu create shared services that contain the Page Recorded element and these services can be assigned by a PBA user to one of their identities 302 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services one For information on configuring paging refer to Configuring Paging on page 69 Using the Page Live or Page Recorded elements in a service is supported if your system ore is configured for SIP paging Using the paging elements in a service is not supported for paging using a sound card or a gateway To select a paging group to send a prerecorded page to 1 Under the Paging group submenu select one of the following Database Values Your NetVanta UC Server version must be licensed for database integration in order to use this mode Gather Digits Values Use the Gather Digits element in the service so that the c
213. d troubleshoot occasional problems Using the Import Export wizard you can export call logs as a tab separated or XML based file The call log files can be used by other reporting applications to provide historical reports on voicemail activity For more information about the Import Export wizard refer to Importing and Exporting on page 353 ex s ra 107 lw bestee ss Content pane TRS TRE AA Minnie Aires teint Maadan NS 111 Navigation pane Information pane es e peuti eremi e atese ee The Events log tracks information related to user attempts to perform mailbox management The System Errors and Warnings log provides information that you can use to troubleshoot problems that occur with your call answering Logs on page 375 S To troubleshoot specific system errors and warnings refer to Troubleshooting Warning The Sent Items log tracks information on outgoing faxes and events related to the use of the Notify Pager and Deliver Messages elements Details for each delivery or dispatch attempt are recorded including the date and time of the attempt the phone number dialed the port that handled the attempt and the final outcome of the delivery or notification attempt The Received Calls log tracks incoming calls regardless of whether the NetVanta UC Server answered them or not Information logged includes the caller name and phone number if available the date time and length of the call whether the ca
214. de 3001 and the external number as members of that ring group When a call is transferred to 300 it rings at both 3001 their desk telephone and their cell phone number A call that is answered on a users cell phone number the call must have been made to transferred twinned or forwarded from the NetVanta UC Server can then be picked up on another phone such as their desk phone From the phone on which the user wants to pickup the call on the user dials the connected call pickup feature code 27 lt called phone number gt The called phone number is the number of the phone that initially answered the call such as the cell phone number If restrictions were configured for using this feature then the user may only need to dial 27 to pickup the call from their desk phone Editing a Ring or Hunt Group Identity To edit a group identity follow these steps 1 2 138 In the Identities summary pane right click the group identity that you want to edit Select Open Enter changes in any of the following fields e Display Name e Address e Priority e Members enter the addresses of the members that you want to include in the group e Number of Rings enter the number of rings after which you want the call to be redirected For a ring group all members will ring simultaneously after which the call is redirected to the overflow behavior For a hunt group each member of the group will ring individually after which the call is redir
215. dial These elements are based on the advanced dialing properties that you specify 7 Select OK Setting Account Codes You can set a default account code that applies to any service or you can specify the account code dialing rules so the user can use any account code that follows the rules that you specify An account code is a specified set of digits that the caller must enter after completing the dialing pattern Account codes represent an accounting category for example expenditures revenues or salaries They are also used to ensure security because a caller who does not have an account code cannot access specified information The account code dialing rules let you specify the following e Account code dialing position determines the position where the account code is inserted in the dialing string You can insert the account code before the PBX external dialing prefix between the PBX external dialing prefix and the telephone number or after the telephone number e Account code dialing information specifies special digits or pauses that must be inserted before or after the account code A single comma represents a half second pause You can specify special PBX 40 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options dialing sequences or feature access codes Wor You can also specify multiple commas using the following syntax xx where xx is the number of commas
216. digit connector pin This mode is useful if you want to connect an Advanced Menu element Callers can then enter a single digit from 0 to 9 from the options available for example Press 1 to speak to an operator When using caller prompt a call follows the Otherwise connector pin when three sequential selections fail to match either an extension or a single digit if enabled When using a Data Source a call follows the Otherwise connector pin if the Data Source does not return a valid identity number The Select Extension element is particularly useful when you want to share a service so that it can be used by many users and you want to select a particular extension in which to apply some call answering behavior The examples below illustrate some ways in which you can use the Select Extension element in a service To record a message in a user s mailbox or select from a list of menu options ao D Play a Announcement 1 2 Play biel By prompting caller Selected Extension From 5 AutoAttendantMenu gt L PRE ee Greeting type IV Stop recording after Valid extension 8 0 seconds silence he J Play status message M On single digit Otherwise IV Stop when key pressed Stop when key pressed ie di IV Beep before recording Play entire message IV Review message menu 28 Advanced Menu 1 a ti 2 M Nokeyin 5 0 secs
217. does not enter any digits the call moves to the element connected to the Otherwise connector pin The caller is allowed three attempts to enter a valid user before the call exits the element The alphabetical characters are represented by numerical digits on the caller s telephone key pad The following is a list of the DTMF key to alphabetical character mappings on a standard telephone 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 275 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Dial by name also supports extended ASCII for users whose names have accented letters The following is a list of the accented vowels and the corresponding dial pad number and equivalent letter on the dial pad Accented Letter Dial Pad Equivalent Dial Pad naea r A a A A a A A rera p e mm a o p p i C __ F The Dial by Name element is not available for PBA users Voicemail element LE The Voicemail element provides basic voicemail service It plays the Voice Mail 1 al mailbox greeting and can take a message from a caller If the caller presses the access number for mailbox management the Voicemail Mailbox element allows mailbox management for the specified mailbox Called Extension V Play status message If the Mailbox selection is Called Extension the mailbox is the one l selected using a Select Extension element In this case the Select Add Menu Item Extension element must
218. dows Firewall and Windows Defender Symptoms e NetVanta UC Server services keep shutting down with Trend Micro software installed e The NetVanta UC Client crashes doesn t load forms or produces unknown software errors e The NetVanta UC Client crashes doesn t load forms or produces unknown software errors e ucCompanion doesn t load extensions with Symantec software installed Possible Causes Sometimes problems can arise from third party firewall or antivirus software installed on computers hosting the server or client software Solutions Proceed with the following potential solutions in the order in which they appear Only when solution A and B have been attempted and failed should solution C be tried Ifa problem occurs ADTRAN Technical Support advises that the third party product be Lu removed from the system prior to contacting Technical Support for assistance For more information refer to Accessing Technical Support on page 369 Verify that the following folders are excluded from antivirus software scanning as noted in the NetVanta UC Server Deployment Guide and in the NetVanta UC Server Installation Guide e C Program Files ADTRAN Or any folder in which the NetVanta UC Server application is loaded C ADTRANLogs Or the folder to which logging application is configured C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server Or the default location of the database folder 360 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001
219. dual users For more information refer to Configuring a user s message storage on page 113 Mailbox monitoring could negatively impact system performance Mailbox monitoring increases the traffic between the Microsoft Exchange Server and the NetVanta UC Server Depending on the number of users configured for mailbox monitoring the bandwidth between the Exchange Server and NetVanta UC Server and the CPU power performance can be affected On systems with more than 100 users system design and engineering UT must consider the increased load of mailbox monitoring on the Exchange Server Monitoring more than 500 mailboxes requires careful consideration and should not be done without a slow roll out procedure to validate the performance of both Exchange Server and NetVanta UC Server in the specific customer environment If your Exchange Server is at or near capacity then you may want to disable mailbox monitoring 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 173 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide To add a Microsoft Exchange Server MAPI Connection 1 2 In the Administration navigation pane select the Servers topic Right click in the Servers summary pane and select New gt Exchange to open the Microsoft Exchange Server Configuration menu box Wor You can add only one Exchange Server If you have already added an Exchange Server the option is unavailable Enter a name for the server in the
220. e 2 Inthe ADTRAN NetVanta Unified Communications CD Menu select Install UC Client The ADTRAN NetVanta Unified Communications Client Setup Welcome menu appears 3 Inthe Welcome menu select Next The End User License Agreement EULA will appear 4 Select the I accept the terms in the License Agreement check box and select Next The Custom Setup menu will appear 18 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Introducing the Administrator Application 5 Ifthe user requires the French spell checker function in the ucCompanion instant messaging feature select the plus symbol next to Clients to expand the components of the Clients feature B ADTRAN NetVanta Unified Communications Client Setup Custom Setup Select the way you want features to be installed Click the icons in the tree below to change the way features will be installed Base Files net Framework French Language 84 Clients Pack Required for French J UC Client Spellchecking E net Framework French Language Desktop Client Softphone Client This feature requires OKB on your Help Files hard drive Fax Printer Driver Files x Administration Tools ii Disk Usage Back net Cancel Select the down arrow next to the red X next to net Framework French Language Pack and select Will be installed on local hard drive from the drop down menu Then select Next The Ready to install NetVanta Unified
221. e You are connecting the NetVanta UC Server through a gateway to an existing PBX and the attached PBX does not have true answer supervision Solution To configure the PBX to avoid cutting off the beginning of playback and recording using the handset 1 Inthe Communication System content pane right click the Generic PBX via Gateway that you want to change and select Open 2 Inthe Options menu enable the Prompt for handset playback and recording option 3 Select Change Troubleshooting Voicemail Symptoms e Users complain that when they login to the telephone mailbox there is a delay before their mailbox and message information is available e You are using an IMAP server to access voicemail messages Causes IMAP servers vary in the methods they support for retrieving a user s voice and fax messages and the speed at which they retrieve such messages e No query optimization the slowest method was selected and a user has a large number of messages in their inbox e Another search method was selected that was not supported then the NetVanta UC Server automatically defaulted to the No query optimization method when the selected method failed and a user has a large number of messages in their inbox e The email server is slow in responding possibly due to a heavy load a large number of messages in a mailbox or slow or unreliable network connections Solutions To optimize IMAP server performance and to minim
222. e Delete existing owning Windows authentication if the Windows user is owned by a Windows authentication the authentication is deleted after the users migrates and the new Local authentication is created 5 Select the Windows users that you want to migrate to local users You can select each user by enabling the check box next to the user s name Select Select All to select all users or select Deselect All to clear all check boxes 6 Review the information on the summary menu and select Submit if the information is correct You must have already performed network integration on the system using the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Wizard prior to attempting to migrate users one Voice and fax messages do not migrate from one system to another Using the New User Wizard After you finish entering information on a menu select the Next button to move to the next menu If you are missing information that the NetVanta UC Server needs to create a user a warning displays with instructions about the type of information that is missing You can move Back through the menus at any time to change the information that you entered You can also select Cancel which closes the wizard and deletes all the information that you entered Restart the wizard to begin again If you want the new user to be linked to Active Directory select Windows User on the User Type Selection menu This mode allows user information and messaging options to
223. e Fax to Database The following table describes the configurable options in the Receive Fax element Save Fax to Mailbox Selecting this mode enables you to save incoming faxes to your mailbox Called Extension Saves the fax to the mailbox of the extension number that the caller called Selected Extension This mode refers to the Select Extension element which is available to admin users only If an admin user creates a service using the Select Extension element and makes this service available to other users by saving it to the Shared folder then PBA users will have this mode available However PBA users should not select this mode when creating their own service If an admin user selects this mode then they must place a Select Extension Element on page 289 somewhere before the Receive Fax element in the service User Extension Note Only the administrator can select a specific user s mailbox Save Fax to Database Selecting this mode enables you to save incoming faxes to a database if your system is licensed for database integration If you have the Database tab available in the NetVanta UC Client Service Editor then you can use the Data Source Selector to save incoming faxes to a database For more information refer to Using the Data Source Selector on page 339 Note If the Save Fax to Database mode is selected and the database is unavailable the incoming fax is delivered to the default mailbox Otherwise
224. e You must have a paging amplifier that accepts 4 or 8 ohm terminations e You must have specialized overhead speakers and amplifiers e The speakers or amplifier must be connected to the output jack of the sound card typically the green colored jack e Overhead paging must be enabled for the communication system To enable overhead paging refer to Configuring System Call Options on page 47 To properly detect the audio device that you will use for sound card paging you must oe remove or disable all other audio devices This must be done before deployment of the NetVanta UC Server Sound card paging does not support DTMF tones Therefore if you require additional paging zones or groups you must use SIP phone and VoIP paging devices or an FXO or Lu FXS gateway paging system so that callers can select the paging zone or group to page For more information refer to Configuring SIP Phones and VoIP Paging Devices on page 69 or Configuring Gateway Paging on page 72 Disabling Device Mapping for Windows Sounds for Audio Quality To prevent sound effects from the NetVanta UC Server computer being heard on the speakers during paging you must disable device mapping for Windows sounds 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 71 Configuring Paging ECS BAS Administrator Guide To disable device mapping 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel The path may vary slightly depending on the operating system installed
225. e absence for example Press 1 if your child is ill The options available such as illness appointment or unauthorized absence would be stored in a database as would the response received To prevent students from responding to the call you could assign a PIN to each parent and ask them to enter it The number entered would then be compared to the PIN assigned to the parent to determine whether they match You can use the Outbound Dialer to send appointment reminders In this case you might want your custom application to extract from a database a list of patients their contact numbers and their appointment dates and times The custom application then must initiate the OutDial exe to login into the NetVanta UC Server When the server runs the call request a call is attempted at each phone number listed until a successful connection is made or until the maximum number of attempts have been made When a call is made successfully then the service is run You can customize the service to meet your organization s needs but in this example it might play an announcement to notify the person about their appointment For example when a call is answered the 238 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Advanced Features caller might hear John Smith has an appointment at Park Hills Medical Clinic on Wednesday September 7th at 2 00 You can use the Outbound Dialer to send emergency respons
226. e based on the extension number For example extension number 300 is assigned the password 0300 14 If you would like to require the user to change the password after the next account logon select the User must change password at next logon check box 15 In the PIN field enter a numerical telephone access PIN for the user 16 Inthe Confirm field reenter the telephone access PIN 17 If you would like to require the user to change the PIN after the next account logon select the User must change PIN at next logon check box 18 After all user authentication information has been entered in the Authentication local menu select Next 19 In the Messaging menu use the Email Storage drop down menu to select a message store for the user 20 If you selected Local Message Store for the user s Email Storage and you want the new user to have integrated messaging then select the Enable integrated messaging client check box Enabling Integrated Messaging adds a Mailboxes tab to a user s Net Vanta UC Client Within the Mailboxes tab a user is then able to manage their phone and fax messages visually using Inbox and Sent Items folders in NetVanta UC Client Wor Regardless of the options that are selected messages accessed by local message store users are always played in order from oldest to newest 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 107 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide 21 If you selected an Excha
227. e call 198 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using SIP Telephones To park a call at the next available number 1 4 Place the active call on hold If there is more than one identity is assigned to your phone then Transfer the call instead of putting it on hold Dial 99 Note the hold position that plays over the telephone The hold position is used by the person who answers the parked call The NetVanta UC Server selects the park number for the caller begining at 1 or the next available higher number Press DIAL The call is removed from the hold position and put in the system park position To park a call at a selected park number 1 4 Put the active call on hold If there is more than one identity is assigned to your phone then Transfer the call instead of putting it on hold Dial 99 Enter the number that you want to use as the park number The hold position is used by the person who answers the parked call For example if you enter 1234 then the call is parked at 1234 and can be picked up at 1234 Press DIAL The call is removed from the hold position and put in the park position To answer a parked call 1 2 3 Typically a company announcement informs you that a call is on hold for you Dial 98 The system prompts you for the park hold position Dial the number of the park hold position The system disconnects the current call and
228. e check box and select the number of digits to apply the restrictions only to numbers above the specified number of digits Select OK To set dialing properties 1 2 3 4 5 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Dialing tab From the Country region field select the country or region that you want to dial from Enter the area code in the Area code field Select OK To define the keys that are used to obtain an outside line for local and long distance calls 1 2 3 4 S In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Dialing tab Enter a number in the To access an outside line for local calls dial field Enter a number in the To access an outside line for long distance calls dial field The number in each field represents the key that users press to access an outside Lu line for local and long distance calls That key depends on the configuration of the PBX The default key on most PBXs is 9 for both types of access Select OK Advanced Dialing Rules Advanced dialing rules allow you to specify the conditions under which you can dial telephone numbers from your office You can apply dialing rules to a specific area code or office code of outgoing telephone numbers The office code consists of the first three digits of a regular seven digit telephone number You can also specify local 10 digit dialing You can change
229. e client operating system is Windows 2000 The NetVanta UC Server is integrated with Active Directory Users and Computers Console which unifies and simplifies day to day system management tasks It allows administrators to create special tools to delegate specific tasks to users or groups Administrators can create unique consoles for workers who report to them or for workgroup managers They can assign a tool with a system policy deliver the file by email or post the file to a shared location on the network Access to Active Directory Users and Computers is automatic with the installation of the NetVanta UC Client Administrators can change and delete NetVanta UC Server user profiles from the NetVanta UC Server or from Active Directory oe For information on how to create change and delete user profiles from the NetVanta UC Server refer to Using the New User Wizard on page 101 For information on changing users to local or Windows users refer to Changing Users to Local or Windows Users on page 99 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 85 Integrating with Active Directory ECS BAS Administrator Guide To open the Active Directory Users and Computers Console 1 On the Windows desktop double click the shortcut Active Directory Users and Computers If there is no desktop shortcut select Start gt Programs gt Administrative Tools gt Active Directory Users and Computers If this shortcut doesn t exist se
230. e connector If an answering machine is detected it exits through the Answering machine connector pin when there is a minimum period of silence that exceeds the value defined in Wait for silence of You can set up the service so that if a call is answered by a fax machine then a log entry is made to note that the number is a fax number so that it can be removed from the list of one numbers to dial in future or alternatively you can configure a fax to be queued to be sent to the same telephone number Also you will want the service to disconnect the call if it is answered by a fax machine Voice default By default the call is considered to be answered by a live voice and exits through the Voice connector pin unless it is determined to be answered by a fax or an answering machine Answering machine Enable the Answering machine checkbox if you want the voice to be analyzed to determine whether the call is being answered by an answering machine Voice energy period greater than X seconds The period of time the element analyzes the audio before making a determination of the caller The default value is 2 5 seconds Wait for silence of Enable this check box if you want the service to wait for the period of silence noted before continuing with the service 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 309 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide X second
231. e files that you add to the custom directories to play in place of the default system announcements make sure that the file has the same name UT do not carry out this procedure unless you receive further instruction from ADTRAN Customizing system announcements is an advanced feature It is recommended that you If the format of the audio file is incorrect the new file is not heard Make sure that the Lu audio of the new file is recorded in G 711 mu law format 8 bit samples 8 kHz and Mono To customize server English U S Male system announcements 1 Navigate to the following file Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Data System CustomAnnouncements English U S Male 2 Change the desired system announcement To customize server English U S Female system announcements 1 Navigate to the following file Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Data System CustomAnnouncements English U S Female 2 Change the desired system announcement To customize server French U S Female system announcements 1 Navigate to the following file Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Data System CustomAnnouncements French CA Female 2 Change the desired system announcement 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 251 Using Advanced Features 252 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc ECS BAS Administrator Guide 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Creating Custom Call Answerin
232. e g 9 05 5551234 gt 9 5551234 e Account code dialing format specifies the minimum and maximum length of account codes that a user can enter when dialing out If users enter an account code that is too long or too short an error message states that they must enter an account that is within the specified range You can use account codes to allow long distance dialing in which the telephone company applies the long distance charges to your account code To set the default account code 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Dialing tab 3 Inthe Account code section enable the Enable account codes check box 4 Enter the account code in the Account code field 5 Select OK To set the account code dialing position 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Dialing tab 3 Inthe Account Code section enable the Enable account codes check box 4 Select the Details button to open the Account Code Dialing Rule field 5 In the Account code dialing position section specify where you want to insert the account code in the dialing string 6 Select OK To set the account code dialing format 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Dialing tab 3 Inthe Account Code section enable the Enable account codes check box 4 Select the Details button to open the Account Code D
233. e identifier How to make a request for a new license key 1 A license key request can be generated by using one of the following methods e Authorized resellers or customers who maintain their own system may make requests electronically by using their ADTRAN website account Once successfully logged into the ADTRAN website a request can be made by navigating to My Account gt License Key Request OR e Obtain the License Key Request form available from the product documentation section of the ADTRAN support center Complete the form and follow the instructions in the License Key Request form Product purchases and license key requests are typically fulfilled by ADTRAN one authorized resellers Please contact your ADTRAN reseller to purchase additional products or activate a license key To review the current licenses on the NetVanta UC Server 1 From the Administration application select Help gt License Information A list of the current enabled features appears The current license menu includes the following e Description The name of the NetVanta UC Server product feature or attribute e Value The current licensed maximum number for a specific product attribute e Notes The content is usually the actual number of a specific product attribute that is being used by the system The current license key field includes the license key that is currently installed To review the purchase key and machine ID on the N
234. e limits that will be enforced for members of the CoS Use the check boxes to enable the limits and specify the maximum for each limit using the up and down arrows or enter a value in the provided field New User Class of Service General Local Mailbox Limits Security Features Storage limits Select the limits that will be enforced for this class of service Select and configure all that apply v Maximum number of all voice messages in a mailbox 100 Maximum total length of all voice messages minutes 120 V Maximum age of any voice message days 90 The following table describes the available local mailbox limit options Maximum number of all Limits the maximum number of voice messages stored for a user By voice messages in mailbox default all mailbox limits are disabled When enabled the maximum number of voice messages allowed in the mailbox defaults to 100 minutes The valid maximum message range is 1 to 9999 Maximum total length of all Limits the maximum combined length in minutes of voice messages voice messages stored for a user By default all mailbox limits are disabled When enabled the maximum combined length of voicemail messages defaults to 120 minutes The valid maximum message length range is 1 to 9999 minutes Maximum age of any voice Limits the maximum amount of time in days a voice message is stored message for a user Messages older than the maximum voice message age are deleted
235. e listing that matches all criteria e Ifthe Fetch Data element fetches one row the call exits from the One row fetched connector pin ES Fetch Data 1 a 2 Source One row fetched Many rows fetched No rows fetched Otherwise Fetch Data element e Ifthe Fetch Data element fetches more than one row then the call exits from the Many rows fetched connector pin e Ifno rows of data are fetched then the call exits the No rows fetched connector pin e If any other condition exists such as an inability to access a Data Source such as an external database or internal User Data Table then the call exits the Otherwise connector pin A Fetch Data element can retrieve more than one row depending on the number of rows in the source and your filter conditions When one or more rows are fetched a reference to a field by another element is always a reference to the field s value in the current row in the set of rows fetched The Move Current Row and Prompt for Current Row elements can be used to change which row is current Immediately after a Fetch Data or Dial for Data element is executed the current row is the first row e When only one row is fetched the first row is the single row that was fetched e When multiple rows are fetched which row is first depends on whether a sort order was defined by the Administrator If no sort order was defined then the order of the rows is determined by the data source and you sh
236. e menu select a communication system from the Select a communications system drop down menu From the Select a user profile drop down menu select a user profile to which you want to associate the identity The user profile that you select is able to manage the behavior of this identity Select Attendant service as the new identity type On the Configure Attendant Identity menu enter a name for the new attendant identity in the Name field In the Address field enter an address for the new attendant identity An address is typically an extension number From the Run service drop down menu choose the service that you want to assign to the new attendant identity This option is available to Admin and PBA users only Select Next to proceed Select Finish to create the new identity The new identity appears in the Identities summary pane beside its distinctive icon ore By default only the auto attendant identities appear but you can display all the identities by selecting the View menu gt Display Identities for all Profiles Configuring a Fax Attendant Identity 1 2 3 4 134 Right click anywhere in the Identities summary pane Select Create Identity to display the New Identity Wizard menu Select Next to proceed In the Select Identity Type menu select a communication system from the Select a communications system drop down menu From the Select a user profile drop down menu select a user profile to which
237. e notifications Using the example of fire fighters when a fire is reported you might want the custom application to extract from a database a list of volunteer fire fighters and their contact numbers The custom application then must initiate the OutDial exe which logs in to the NetVanta UC Server to call each fire fighter on the list When the server runs the call request a call is attempted at each phone number listed until a successful connection is made or until the maximum number of attempts have been made When the call connects successfully then the service you have selected is run You can customize the service to meet your organization s needs but in this example it might play an announcement to notify the person about a fire You could create a service that requests that the person press a number to indicate that they have received the message e Ifthe correct response was received the database would be updated to show the message was acknowledged e Ifthe person hangs up the call goes to voicemail or if the number requested wasn t pressed for example if someone else answers the phone then the database could be updated to show that the notification was not acknowledged The custom application could scan the database notification records to determine if any calls were not acknowledged and if so new call requests could be made up to a specified number of attempts Configuring the Outbound Dialer To use the outbound d
238. e person s first or 4 last name The name is compared to the list of users defined by the contact list The alphabetic characters correspond to the numerical digits on the caller s telephone keypad For information on selecting the order in which callers enter a name refer to Selecting the Order for Dial by Name Dialing on page 36 On certain phone models the keys on which the letters Q and Z appear can differ The Dial by Name element works whether the letter Q corresponds to the 0 or the 7 key and whether the letter Z corresponds to the 0 or the 9 key Callers hear a standard announcement prompting them to spell either the first or last name A caller can attempt to make an exact match of a name by pressing the key after entering the digits This is useful for matching shorter names such as Li If a caller stops entering digits and if the digits entered match five or fewer names then the caller is presented with a list of names and is prompted to make a selection If more than five names match the digits entered then the caller is prompted with unable to match the dialed name and is prompted to try again If the name entered matches a NetVanta UC Server user the call exits the element by the Valid name connector pin and changes the Selected Extension and Selected User Name system values to the NetVanta UC Server user s extension and name If the digits that the caller enters do not match a valid user or the caller
239. e user can then manage their voice and fax messages visually through the Inbox and Sent Items folders in NetVanta UC Client 3 Select a server from the Select the server that handles contact information drop down menu To store a user s messages on Exchange Server 1 On the Messaging tab for email storage select Exchange 2 Select an Exchange Server mailbox from the drop down menu available 3 From the drop down menu select a server to handle the user s contact information 4 Select a message delivery mode from the following options e Use system wide setting e Send messages from system mailbox e Impersonate caller and store to mailbox 5 Select a mailbox monitoring mode from the following options e Use server default Enabled e Disabled 116 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles Configuring a user s message waiting indicator You can set how the message waiting indicator operates on users phones after the NetVanta UC Server receives a message The instructions below describe how to set the message waiting indicator behavior for an individual user however you can also set the message waiting indicator behavior system wide Users can also set their own message waiting indicator behavior Because message waiting indicator behavior can be set by both the administrator and the user and the administrator can set it both system wide and individually sometimes the
240. e users to which you want to apply the user CoS To select multiple users hold down the Shift key while making your selection Once you have selected the users to which you want to apply the CoS right click in the highlighted area and select Change Class of Service from the drop down menu The Change Class of Service menu appears 3 From the Change Class of Service menu select the desired user CoS from the drop down menu Change Class of Service Please select the class of service for the selected users System Voice Mail OK Cancel 4 Select OK The Class of service field in the Users summary pane will display the newly assigned user CoS You can also change a user s CoS in the Edit User menu To access this menu right click on a user in the Users summary pane and select Open In the Edit User menu select the General tab and select the desired user CoS from the Class of service drop down menu When you have finished with your changes select OK to apply the new CoS to the user Applying the CoS to Multiple Users Being Imported into the System If you are importing a large number of users into the NetVanta UC Server system you can apply a user CoS during the import process To apply a user CoS as you import users using the NetVanta UC Configuration Wizard follow these steps 1 Inthe NetVanta UC Configuration Wizard select the Users wizard The NetVanta UC Configuration Wizard can be accessed at any time by
241. each phone s assigned CoS You can also change a phone s CoS assignment in the Phone menu To access this menu right click on a phone in the Phones summary pane and select Open In the Phone menu select the desired CoS from the Phone class of service drop down menu When you have finished with your changes select OK to apply the new CoS to the phone Applying the CoS to a New Phone If you are manually adding a new phone to the NetVanta UC Server system you can apply a phone CoS to the phone during the configuration process Use the Phone class of service drop down menu in the Phone menu to apply a CoS when adding a phone For more information on adding and configuring new SIP phones refer to Installing and Configuring SIP Phones on page 143 164 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server 10 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server The NetVanta UC Server is typically configured at the time of installation using the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Wizard However further configuration may be required when hardware is replaced or when the network or system is upgraded This chapter presents information on configuring the NetVanta UC Server and includes the following topics e Configuring Gateways on page 165 e Configuring Ports on page 166 e Configuring Servers on page 169 e Configuring Communication Systems on page 185 e Configuring Licenses on page 190 You can
242. eate log archives based on a set of criteria that you configure allowing you to manage log information more effectively You can set the maximum size of an individual log file Once the size of a log file exceeds that threshold it 42 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options is automatically archived The NetVanta UC Server ensures that the log files do not fill the hard drive of the NetVanta UC Server The log system does not store logs to the NetVanta UC Server hard drive if the hard drive is lower than the limit configured for the disk threshold limit Lu For more information on logs and log archives refer to Managing logs on page 366 To automatically archive logs 1 In the menu bar Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 On the General tab check Enable automatic archiving 3 Set the log file size limit 4 Set the disk storage limit 5 Select OK Configuring Diagnostics System Options You can configure the system s diagnostics to notify ADTRAN of any problems with the NetVanta UC Server This information is then used to make improvements to the NetVanta UC Server You can also configure the exception reports and diagnostic notifications to be sent to you so or your reseller so that the appropriate action can be taken if the NetVanta UC Server is not functioning properly Multiple email addresses can be entered to receive the reports and notific
243. ecialized announcement for a service You can include company information office hours a list of people for whom to leave messages and the option of how to receive company literature by fax To create an announcement follow these steps 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Ifthe appropriate voice folder is not displayed in the Announcements navigation pane select the desired voice folder using the steps in Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 3 Select the folder where you want to store your new announcement The folder s contents are listed in the summary pane 4 Right click anywhere in the Announcements summary pane 5 Select New gt Announcement A new announcement is added to the list in the summary pane The announcement icon denotes the new announcement 6 Directly after adding the new announcement the announcement s default name will be highlighted in the summary pane and will be bound by an edit box Enter a new name for the announcement Name Length Announcement 0 0s AT 105 Fi sample UCNS Audio Files Fi shared Announcement 1 318 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Announcements in Call Answering Services 7 Double click the announcement that you want to record The Audio Editor appears In the text area of the Audio Editor you can enter the text to use as a scri
244. ecord the clock runs and the red record button turns grey 8 Select when you are finished recording 9 Select OK to keep the announcement and return to the NetVanta UC Client Audio Editor 10 In the NetVanta UC Client Audio Editor menu bar select File gt Update to update the recorded audio announcement To play a greeting from a mailbox using a Play Announcement element 1 Onthe Play Announcement element select the value selector gt on the Play field 2 Select Greetings gt Called Extension to fetch the greeting from the user profile in the current user context To enable the Play status message mode for greetings On the Play Announcement element enable the Play status message button element refer to Voicemail element on page 276 Wor Make sure that the Play status message mode is enabled on a corresponding Voicemail To play temporary recordings On the Play Announcement element select the value selector gt select Temporary Recordings and select one of the ten temporary recordings available You must use the Record Announcement element in the service in order for a caller to Lu record the temporary audio file For more information on temporary recordings refer to Allowing Callers to Make Temporary Recordings Within a Service on page 267 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 271 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Menu Element The Menu element a
245. ected to the next member of the group If the last member of the group does not answer then the call is redirected to the overflow behavior Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Extensions and Identities 4 If you want to change the group type choose a new type from the Group Type list e A ring group creates an identity that distributes calls to all members of the ring group at the same time e A hunt group creates an identity that distributes calls to members of the hunt group sequentially based on availability followed by the default overflow behavior 5 Ifthe group is a hunt group use the up and down arrows to change the order of identities in the group 6 Ifyou want to change the group identity overflow service use the Active service value selector gt to choose a new service 7 Select OK Changing the Number of Rings for an Identity To change the number of rings for an identity follow these steps 1 Inthe Identities summary pane right click the identity for which you want to change the number of rings 2 Select Open The Identity menu will appear 3 Inthe Identity menu use the Number of rings drop down menu to select the number of rings that you want for the identity The default number of rings is 4 4 Select OK Removing an Identity To remove an identity follow these steps 1 In the Identities summary pane right click the identity that you wa
246. ed of transmission outcomes The fax transmission includes a history of the attempts and outcome of the fax A fax transmission report is also available in the call logs You can specify the maximum number of transmission attempts For more information about setting fax options refer to Setting System Wide Options on page 21 If a fax is not successfully transmitted after the maximum number of attempts users receive an email message to signal the failure To specify the general mailbox 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Operator Definition tab 3 Inthe Default mailbox box specify a default mailbox To specify the maximum number of transmission attempts 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Fax messages tab 3 Type the number of transmission attempts in the Try box 216 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing To view the fax queue 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the Queue folder icon The folder s contents are listed in the summary pane Queue For each fax in the list you can see the recipient s name and fax number the scheduled transmission time and date and the number of pages including the cover page To view an individual fax listed in the fax queue 1 Select the Queue folder Faxes scheduled for transmission are listed in the summary pane 2 Right click the fax that you want to view and select Open To change recip
247. efer to To send a cover page only using Quick Fax on page 229 Sending faxes from other applications using the ADTRAN Fax Printer You can send faxes from other applications using the ADTRAN Fax Printer You can also change user profiles to send a fax from another user or to save a fax to another user s profile To send a fax document from another application 1 Open the document that you want to send as a fax 2 Select File gt Print to open the Print menu box Sample Fax Microsoft Word Ehe Edt View pret Format Toots Table Window tiep BEATER ICEA ess SHO w 0x noms 1212 Main Street z ars Suite 235 Smith Printing Inc Middle Town ON J85 2P2 Phone 613 555 1212 Fax 613 555 1213 Fax To Jonathan Smith Fax 613 555 1234 Phone 613 555 4321 Subject Data sheets 206 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing 3 From the printer name drop down menu select the ADTRAN Fax Printer and select OK 4 Ifyou are prompted enter the user name and password for the user from which you want to send the fax and select OK 5 Inthe NetVanta UC Client fax printer menu box select one of the following e Send now sends the fax now after having made your fax selections e Save to file allows you to save the file as a fax to send later Wor To change the user from which you want to send the fax refer to To change users when sending or saving a fax on p
248. elect OK Lu The changes that you make to the message waiting indicator options come into effect for new messages only 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 25 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide refer to Configuring a user s message waiting indicator on page 117 RTE For information on setting the message waiting indicator options for individual users To set the number of simultaneous message waiting indicator operations 1 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the message waiting indicator tab 3 In the Operational section enter a number in the Maximum number of simultaneous field Lu You can set the number anywhere between 1 and 16 inclusively The default is 1 4 Select OK To set the number of simultaneous event monitors 1 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the message waiting indicator tab 3 Under Operational parameters Maximum number of simultaneous monitors select a number Lu You can set the number anywhere between 1 and 16 inclusively The default is 1 4 Select OK Setting the Message Playback Order You can configure system wide the order in which new unheard and old previously heard messages are played over the telephone user interface TUI e If Enable sorting is checked then the default values are for new messages to be played in chronological o
249. elect the Phones tab Select a phone and select Open Change the phone s information You can only change some of the information associated with a phone for example IP Lu address or description If you want to reconfigure the phone remove it from the network and re install it using To add a phone manually on page 144 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 93 Integrating with Active Directory ECS BAS Administrator Guide 9 Select OK To change the button number for identities on a phone 1 Inthe Users content pane right click the user whose button number you want to change and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable Unified Communications Server for this user is checked Select the Advanced button Select the Phones tab Select the identity whose button number you want to change CO m Cr ES e p Select the up or down arrow to change the button number for the identity The button number refers to the line buttons on the phone 9 Select OK To delete an identity on a phone 1 Inthe Users content pane right click the user whose identity you want to delete from a phone and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable Unified Communications Server for this user is checked Select the identity that you want to delete Select the tr
250. element 1 From the Compare to value selector gt select the Gather Digits element System Value or database reference that you want to compare to Wor Refer to Selecting values within elements using the value selector on page 238 if you want to select a dynamic value for the Compare to field 2 From the drop down menu select a comparison mode that you want to associate with a specific caller 300 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services 3 Select Add to select additional comparison options You can add up to ten compare data connectors Create Log Entry Element EEPE The Create Log Entry element allows detailed call information to be b 1 teas al exported as a tab separated file or XML based file You can specify the type of information that you want to include in the call log entry Use the Enter text or insert value Create Log Entry element with the Gather Digits element if you want to log the digits that a caller enters To specify types of information using the Create Log Entry element 1 Inthe Enter text or insert value section select the value selector gt For more information refer to Selecting values within elements using the value selector on page 238 2 Select dynamic values for the log entry and enter any text that you want to appear in the log 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all the information that you w
251. em Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting Outbound Calls and Dialing Options Dialing rules allow you to restrict outgoing calls specify dialing properties and specify the keys that users must press to access an outside line for local and long distance calls Dialing options are used to set restrictions properties and rules related to outgoing calls and are used for services and many NetVanta UC Server features including e Active Message Delivery e Pager Notification e Transfer Call e Fax on demand element e Fax sending capabilities Active Message Delivery Pager Notification and Transfer Call are options available to Personal Assistant PA users The Fax on demand element is available for use in custom call answering services which are available to Personal Business Assistant PBA users The dialing options are not global dialing rules that apply to regular outgoing calls from phones These dialing options work in conjunction with the dialing restrictions set on the communication system The dialing restrictions set on the communication system Lu override those set from the Tools gt Options gt Dialing tab To set restrictions and rules for incoming and outgoing calls refer to Routing Calls on page 49 specifically the sections Routing calls using the dial plan on page 49 and Allowing and Restricting Long Distance and Other Calls on page 53 For more information on faxing refer to Faxing on page 205 Y
252. em wide setting Use the system wide setting for message delivery configured for Exchange Server This is the default value For more information on the system wide setting refer to Configuring Microsoft Exchange Server on page 170 Send messages from system mailbox Because voice and fax messages are sent from the system mailbox e User defined message rules set in Outlook or Exchange Server are applied For example a user s rule might direct messages from a particular contact to a specific folder e Messages are sent to any third party applications such as BlackBerry Enterprise Server e The message appears to be from the system mailbox so the From line does not include the caller s phone number 114 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles Impersonate caller and store to mailbox Because voice and fax messages are stored directly in the user s mailbox rather than being sent e User defined message rules in Outlook or Exchange Server are not applied For example a user s rule directing messages from a particular contact to a specific folder will not be applied e Messages are not sent to third party applications such as BlackBerry Enterprise Server e The From line includes the caller s phone number or the caller s name from a contact that matches the phone number Mailbox monitoring ensures that when a user accesses their voicemail messages through Microsoft Outlo
253. ent These elements reference the value in the current row A different current row can be selected using the Move Current Row element on page 350 or Prompt for Current Row element on page 351 For information about specifying data sources filter fields and values refer to Using the Data Source Selector on page 339 Lu You can put a Play Announcement element before a Dial for Data element to give the caller instructions about how to use the feature Add Data element FE Pr 2 Source lt none gt Add Data element The Add Data element allows callers to add to the data in a specified data source The Record Announcement element can be used to record temporary recordings which can be used with the Add Data element as a form filling application in order to request quotes have callers answer general customer service questions and so on For more information on temporary recordings refer to Allowing Callers to Make Temporary Recordings Within a Service on page 267 e Ifthe data is added successfully the caller exits the regular connector pin e Ifthe data is not added successfully for any reason the caller exits the Otherwise connector pin To specify a source and fields for the Add Data element 1 Select a data source from the Source drop down menu 2 Select the Add button to add a Field Assignment to the list 3 Select the Field column to obtain a drop down menu of fields in the data source 4 Select a field
254. ent Within the Mailboxes tab a user is then able to manage their phone and fax messages visually using Inbox and Sent Items folders in NetVanta UC Client Wor Regardless of the options that are selected messages accessed by local message store users are always played in order from oldest to newest 23 If you selected an Exchange Server message store for the user s Email Storage use the Mailbox drop down menu to select the the mailbox associated with the user If desired enable mailbox monitoring for the user Mailbox monitoring ensures that when a user accesses their voice mail messages through Microsoft Outlook Web Access or through a mobile device that their message waiting light on their phone updates accordingly Without mailbox monitoring enabled UC Server is unaware when a user accesses their voice mail messages through Outlook Web access or through a mobile device such that the message waiting light on their phone may continue to flash even after they ve accessed all their new messages Lu Mailbox monitoring works in conjunction with the message waiting light options set To enable mailbox monitoring for individual users you must also configure Exchange Lu Server to enable mailbox monitoring For more information see Adding and Configuring Exchange Server Performance issues may arise when mailbox monitoring is enabled For more information refer to Configuring Microsoft Exchange Server on page 170 Use s
255. enter a phone number manually 1 On the Flow Control element in the Compare drop down menu select Phone Numbers 2 Select the telephone button to open the Enter Phone Number menu box 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 273 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Enter the desired phone number in the Telephone number field and select OK oe You can also enter a phone number by right clicking the blank field in the Flow Control element and selecting New from the drop down menu i Control 1 7 Compare Times M Mon M Tue M Wed M Thu V Frill Sat Sun From Otherwise You can specify days of the week and a time range For time restrictions if either the From or To field is empty a 24 hour period is assumed eCalls received within the specified time range are directed through the Times connector pin eCalls received outside the specified time range move to the element connected to the Otherwise connector pin To set call flow according to time restrictions 1 On the Flow Control element from the Compare drop down menu select Times Enable the check boxes for the days of the week when the restrictions apply 2 3 Inthe From field select the hour and minutes when the time restriction begins Use a 24 hour clock 4 In the To field select the hour and minutes when the time restriction ends Use a 24 hour clock Dial by Extension Element A
256. entity Wizard menu 3 Select Next to proceed 4 In the Select Identity Type menu select a communication system from the Select a communications system drop down menu 5 From the Select a user profile drop down menu select a user profile to which you want to associate the identity The user profile that you select is able to manage the behavior of this identity 6 Select Ring group or Hunt group as the new identity type 7 Select Next 8 Inthe Name field enter a name for the new group identity 136 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Extensions and Identities In the Address field enter an address for the new group identity 10 Select Add to open the Select a Member Identity menu 11 If you want to add an external number to the group identity select Add External If your gateway does not support true answer supervision the ring group stops ore presenting the call to all the other internal extension numbers and rings only the external telephone number 12 Select the user identity that you want to add to the group 13 Select Select 14 Repeat Steps 6 to 8 until all the identities that you want in the group are listed in the Members section Lu Use the up and down arrow keys to change the order of the identities in the group 15 Select Next The Configure Overflow Options menu appears 16 From the Number of rings before overflow list select t
257. ents in a service refer to Using Database Elements on page 343 Configuring call queues You can configure the following call queuing options e Enable automatic logging out of agents after missing a specified number of calls e Set the amount of time that a call remains in the call queue unanswered before being directed to the overflow behavior e Set the amount of time that agents are given to wrap up a call after a call has ended for example to complete necessary paper work You can enable automatic logging out of agents after missing calls in a call queue and you can specify the number of calls missed from 1 to 99 before the agent is logged out When an agent is logged out either automatically or manually calls are no longer presented to that agent until the agent manually logs in again If auto logout is disabled then agents are not automatically logged out regardless of the number of missed calls so calls continue to be presented to those agents As long as an unanswered call remains in the queue then it is dispatched to the next available logged in agent until the overflow timeout expires Therefore the same call can be presented to an agent multiple 66 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Routing and Restricting Calls times in a round robin sequence until it is either answered or the overflow timeout expires and the call is directed to the overflow behavior You can set the durat
258. er Enabling and Disabling Voices The NetVanta UC Server administrator can enable or disable voices from the Voices tab in the Administrator Options Enabling a voice adds it to the list of voices a user or administrator can select for the user s voice and to the list of voices the administrator can select for prerecorded announcements Disabling a voice removes it from the list of voices a user or administrator can select for the user s voice and from the list of voices the administrator can select for prerecorded announcements Enabling or disabling a voice also affects the Change Voice element used in services service elements using the System Voice value such as the Compare Data element and database fields with a Voice data type To enable a system voice 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Voices tab 3 In the list of available voices select the voice you would like to enable The voice will become highlighted 4 Select the Enable button The Enabled column in the list of available voices will change from No to Yes 5 Select OK If the number of enabled voices exceeds the license limit then the attempt to commit the changes will be unsuccessful and the following error message is displayed The number of enabled voices exceeds the license limit To disable a system voice 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Voi
259. er and therefore are outside the scope of this document Users can search the Global Phone Directory database using simple and advanced searches In a simple search the user enters either the first name last name or phone number of the identity for which they are searching In the advanced search the user can search on one or more of the first name last name and phone number values For more information on using the Polycom Corporate Directory search feature refer to the user manual for you phone available from the Polycom Knowledge Base at http support polycom com Accessing Voicemail Messages Some telephones provide a single button to access your voicemail This is useful when accessing messages from your phone You can press your phone s Messages button and go directly to voicemail to check your messages 194 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using SIP Telephones You might have one or several identities typically extensions assigned to your telephone The number of buttons on the phone determines the number of possible identities that can be configured on it To use the message button on a phone with one identity 1 Press the Messages button on your phone The phone automatically dials a SIP URL voicemail 2 Enter your telephone personal identification number PIN at the prompt to access your personal voicemail To use the message button on a phone with more than one identity 1 Pr
260. er Computers any NetVanta UC Server unacknowledged errors or warnings will appear Mailbox message logging statistics In the information pane of the Logs menu two tables provide a visual representation of the message 364 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Troubleshooting summary and the summary of operations done by all users on the system that are managing their mailboxes e Message Count table e Summary of Operations table reese dit UNE Medea ewes Vere ead anne Modia LOS DE PM Die cathe harntenn at 0 malien management Message Count Table Summary of Operations Table If message summary is skipped during mailbox management the Message Count table is not displayed in the information pane The log entry types are represented by different icons The following table explains some of the icons that might appear in your list of log entries Table 21 1 Log entry icon definitions Icon Definition we ay E Error represents an error for example in voice message delivery Warning represents a warning Received calls represents calls that come in on a specified port 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 365 Troubleshooting ECS BAS Administrator Guide Table 21 1 Log entry icon definitions Voice Mail access represents a voice message event for example a voice message sent from a NetVanta UC Server user to another
261. er Pages icon The fax cover pages are listed in the summary pane 3 Select the fax cover page that you want to preview 4 In the detail pane select Download to get the file from the server The cover page appears in the detail pane 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 227 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 Use the cover page toolbar to view the cover page Zoom in Zoom to Page up Fit All Print ll amp lt Normal Page down 180 degrees Rotate single page 5 F Rotate single page left Rotate single page right Rotate document 180 degrees 9 F Rotate document left Rotate document right To rename a fax cover page 1 2 3 4 5 6 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu Select the Cover Pages icon The fax cover pages are listed in the summary pane Right click the cover page that you want to rename Select Rename Enter a new name for the cover page Select the icon of the new cover page to make the change To copy a fax cover page 1 2 3 4 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu Select the Cover Pages icon The fax cover pages are listed in the summary pane Right click the cover page that you want to copy Select Duplicate The copy of the cover page appears in the summary pane with Copy of before its name You can rename the cover page if you want to To delete a fax cover page 1
262. er in the list e If the call is answered then the service runs e Ifthe call is not completed then the next number is called This process continues up to a specified number of attempts before the request is deleted and a log entry is created Before the calls are made there are a number of intervening steps First the command line parameters must be verified When the OutDial exe is initiated it scans the command line parameters to ensure that the required parameters are included and that the parameters are properly formatted It verifies that both the u lt username gt and pw lt password parameters are provided for authentication or that both are omitted for single sign on It also verifies that the phone numbers in the list are properly formatted If any errors occur they are noted in a written error message and the OutDial execution ends If the parameters pass the validation then the utility attempts to connect to the server and login The connection uses the h parameter If the connection succeeds the login is done using the provided username and password or using single sign on If any errors occur they are noted in a written error 246 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Advanced Features message and the OutDial execution ends If the login is successful then the utility sends the call request to the server and waits for confirmation The server verifies the following
263. er profiles in EBS 1 Run EBS Administration Console and select the Business Applications tab 2 Select the UC Server Users tab 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 125 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 If prompted select the server to login to 4 Ifrequired login as Administrator or a user with administrative privileges A list of NetVanta UC Server users appears with the same headings and information available that appear in the NetVanta UC Client Users summary pane 5 Select a user The user s information appears in the pane below similar to the detail pane in NetVanta UC Client To add a NetVanta UC Server user from EBS 1 From the right hand pane select Add user The NetVanta UC Server New User Wizard opens 2 Follow the steps for the New User Wizard to add a new user Refer to Using the New User Wizard on page 101 To edit a NetVanta UC Server user from EBS 1 Select a user 2 From the right hand pane select Edit user The Edit user menu opens 3 Follow the steps for the Edit User menu to edit a user profile Refer to Configuring User Profiles on page 110 To delete a NetVanta UC Server user from EBS 1 Select a user 2 From the right hand pane select Delete user 3 At the prompt confirm that you want to delete the user 126 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Extensions and Identities 7 Managing User Extensions and Iden
264. ering the messages and the time between successive attempts at delivering the voice and fax messages to the user s mailbox After the mail server communication link has been re established with the NetVanta UC Server you can specify the message throughput to the mail server Lu For more information on mail servers refer to Configuring Servers on page 169 To configure mail server message buffering 1 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Message Buffering tab 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 45 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Enter a value in each of the following boxes e Maximum days to attempt delivery specifies the number of days the NetVanta UC Server attempts to deliver cached messages to the mail server the default is 7 days e Message re send time interval min specifies the period that the NetVanta UC Server waits between concurrent attempts to deliver messages to the mail server the default is 5 minutes e Message delivery rate specifies the number of messages per minute that are delivered to the mail server the default is 60 messages per minute e Maximum messages to queue specifies the number of messages that are temporarily stored on the NetVanta UC Server in the event that communication with the mail server has stopped the default is 10 000 messages 4 Select OK Specifying Active Domains Active
265. ers and the number of office locations Some possible deployment scenarios are described below and various options can be combined to accommodate your organizations needs Peer branch office deployment Main Office Peer Branch Active Directory aca optional SIPG E Se eWay S ne amp SIP Aware Firewall ALG Exchange Server optional NetVanta UC Server SIP Aware Firewall ALG A peer to peer configuration might involve two NetVanta UC Servers each configured to a different 12 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Introducing the Administrator Application branch Using the dial plan and call routing the NetVanta UC Servers can connect and communicate with one another through the PSTN an ITSP or through a virtual private network VPN Satellite branch office deployment Main Office acre Sa Satellite Branch Active Directory sas Exchange Server A s optional optional SP Gate O Perey KORA amp oe Fais Se SIP Aware SIP Aware i iS Firewall ALG NetVanta UC Firewall ALG si lt DATA Server D N LAN NW a _ G cio Me C4 N ct A Noon pa N POE A satellite branch office implementation might involve one NetVanta UC Server at one location and using the same NetVanta UC Server to connect to a different physical location at another branch
266. erver default Use the server default setting selected when configuring Exchange Server This is the default value Enabled Enabling mailbox monitoring opens the Exchange Server mailbox and starts monitoring the mailbox at system start up This applies only to the Inbox and other folders are not monitored When the user accesses messages through Outlook Web Access or through a mobile device the message waiting indicator synchronizes accordingly 104 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D 24 25 26 27 28 ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles Disabled If mailbox monitoring is disabled then when the user accesses messages through Outlook Web Access or through a mobile device the message waiting indicator does not synchronize accordingly The message waiting indicator turns on when a new message arrives and it is managed according to the message waiting indicator options set when messages are accessed through the regular Outlook client If you selected an IMAP message store for the user s Email Storage enter the user s IMAP Mailbox in the Mailbox field Then enter the password for the IMAP mailbox in the IMAP password field and reenter the password in the Confirm field Once you have configured all of the user s messaging settings select Next The Phone Selection menu will appear In the Phone Selection menu enable one of the following e Skip assigning a phone to this user e Assign to a n
267. ervices ECS BAS Administrator Guide and Select Extension do not change the user context The Select Extension element causes the selected extension to be saved in the current call object so that it can be used by other elements Synchronizing Contacts The Synchronize contacts mode is only available to users who have a client side contact database where contacts are stored on a user s computer and not on a server like Microsoft Exchange Examples of client side contact databases include Microsoft Outlook running in Internet Only Mode Outlook Express and Windows Address Book The NetVanta UC Server cannot access contacts that are stored in client side contact databases therefore in order to perform real time contact matching this contact information must be copied and stored locally on the server computer Client side contacts are synchronized with the server computer every time a user starts or shuts down the NetVanta UC Client If a user makes changes to their client side contact database while the NetVanta UC Client is open and they want the NetVanta UC Server to recognize these changes without having to shut down and restart their NetVanta UC Client the user can force a contact synchronization by using Synchronize contacts To synchronize a user s contacts to the NetVanta UC Server software On the menu bar select Tools gt Synchronize contacts Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector Use the value selector
268. es 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 149 Installing and Configuring SIP Phones ECS BAS Administrator Guide To reload a phone s configuration 1 Inthe Phones summary pane right click the phone whose configuration you want to reload More than one phone can be selected by holding down the CTRL key and selecting the desired phones 2 Select Reload Configuration from the drop down menu Depending on the make and model this could restart the phone phones Wor This method can only be used to reload the configurations of ADTRAN Connect PLUS Reducing Loss of Phone Service External problems that affect the IP connection or the availability of a SIP connection from your service provider could interfere with IP trunk availability Also local power outages can temporarily interfere with SIP phone operation You can reduce loss of phone service in the following ways e Use a PSTN gateway to provide backup phone service e Use an uninterruptible power supply UPS to maintain SIP phone operation during power outages of short duration e Install an analog phone on an analog trunk for basic and emergency phone service in case of a power outage of extended duration 150 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Classes of Service 9 Configuring Classes of Service The user and phone class of service CoS feature helps the system administrator configure settings for
269. es integration Authentications are automatically created when a user is added using the New User Wizard Manage authentications only when you want to add authentications that have not already been created for a Windows user or that do not have an associated user profile Single sign on is accomplished in Microsoft networks by ensuring the following e a Windows Active Directory user is created on the domain e aNetVanta UC Server Windows user is created The administrator can grant other users the ability to manage aspects of the system For example if the administrator adds the authentication Bob Jones to the Administrator user profile Bob Jones can now manage the NetVanta UC Server You can also enable Windows authentication which allows you to assign a role to a Windows user Authorization is the process by which it is determined whether a user can perform a certain operation on some object or objects for example identities profiles ports announcements faxes You can add or remove users from specific roles If you have created a custom authorization store on your system you can choose from the following roles e Administrator authentications have full access for example are fully able to manage system objects like users and ports and they can create change and delete objects in shared folders e Read Only Administrator authentications can do almost everything that Administrator users can do except tha
270. es a connection This element affects only call flow control Callers do not hear anything or perform an action In the Repeat up to field enter the number of times you want a connection to be followed Once the loop counter is encountered the number of times you have specified the call follows the When finished connection All loop counters are reset at the beginning of each call 298 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Text To Speech Element The Text to Speech element allows users to convert text to speech The ey Text To Speech 1 En 2 supplied text is spoken to callers by the Text to Speech engine You can use this element when you prefer not to make audio recordings Text to say y Enter the text manually or use the value selector gt to specify a dynamic value for the text For more information refer to Selecting values within elements using the value selector on page 238 Youcan also use a combination of typed text and selected values Stop when key pressed Play entire message Gather Digits Element f The Gather Digits element allows the caller to enter digits on the a al telephone keypad that are compared to a Compare Data element in the same service The Gather Digits element is typically used with an Number of digits to gather element that plays audio such as the Play Announ
271. es can be configured as phantom identities A phantom identity is not physically configured on a communication system which means that there is no message waiting indicator functionality Also any transfer to a phantom identity automatically runs the behavior associated with that identity A phantom identity does not ring at a phone but goes directly to voicemail Configuring a New User Identity To create a new user identity follow these steps 1 Right click anywhere in the Identities summary pane Select Create Identity to display the New Identity Wizard menu Select Next to proceed a In the Select Identity Type menu select a communication system from the Select a communications system drop down menu 5 From the Select a user profile drop down menu select a user profile to which you want to associate the identity 130 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Extensions and Identities 6 Select User as the new identity type 7 On the Configure User Identity menu enter a name for the new user in the Name field 8 Inthe Address field enter an address for the new user An address is typically an extension number Ensure that you do not add an extension that is restricted in the dial plan For example by default the NetVanta UC Server restricts the following dialing prefixes 0 1 411 611 911 1900 and 1976 If a call is routed to an extension number beginning with one o
272. es through Outlook Web Access or through a mobile device the message waiting indicator synchronizes accordingly Disabled If mailbox monitoring is disabled then when the user accesses messages through Outlook Web Access or through a mobile device the message waiting indicator does not synchronize accordingly The message waiting indicator turns on when a new message arrives and it is managed according to the message waiting indicator options set when messages are accessed through the regular Outlook client 22 If you selected an IMAP message store for the user s Email Storage enter the user s IMAP Mailbox in the Mailbox field Then enter the password for the IMAP mailbox in the IMAP password field and reenter the password in the Confirm field 23 Once you have configured all of the user s messaging settings select Next The Phone Selection menu will appear 24 In the Phone Selection menu enable one of the following e Skip assigning a phone to this user e Assign to a new phone e Assign to an existing phone 108 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles 25 26 If you selected Assign to a new phone enter the MAC Address and choose a phone type from the Phone Type drop down menu The MAC address is located on a sticker on the phone If you selected Assign to an existing phone select the phone to which you want to assign the new user Only existing pho
273. ess the Messages button on your phone 2 From the Line Select menu select using the telephone keypad or the arrow keys on the telephone line for which you want to review your messages The phone automatically dials a SIP URL voicemail from the line that you selected Wor As long as there is a user profile associated with the identity callers are prompted for their telephone PIN Transferring Callers Directly to Voicemail You can transfer a caller directly to voicemail without ringing the recipient s telephone This feature is useful if a caller needs to leave a message for a user but does not need to speak to the user directly After a direct transfer the caller hears the user s personal assistant greeting and can follow the prompts accordingly To perform a blind transfer to another user s voicemail 1 During an active call begin a blind transfer which puts the caller on hold The steps to perform a blind transfer vary depending on the type of phone you are using For more information refer to the user documentation for your phone 2 Enter 86 lt Destination mailbox number gt 3 Press Send or Dial depending on the phone type you are using To perform a supervised transfer to another user s voicemail 1 During an active call begin a supervised transfer which puts the caller on consultation hold The steps to perform a supervised transfer vary depending on the type of phone you are using For more information
274. ess to signal that they have finished entering their fax number 5 From the Cancel drop down menu select the key that callers can press to cancel their fax on demand request 6 Select OK 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 31 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide To set the maximum number of times a caller can attempt to enter a fax number and the timeout period 1 2 3 4 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Fax on demand tab Select Advanced to open the Advanced Fax on demand Options menu box In the Maximum attempts to enter a fax field enter the maximum number of times callers can attempt to enter their fax number When callers reach the maximum number of attempts the operation terminates In the Timeout after second s if caller does not respond field enter the number of seconds to wait for callers to enter a fax number before the operation terminates Select OK Select OK Message Archiving Options You can configure message archiving options for each user on the system To specify the message archiving mode 1 2 3 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Message Archiving tab Enable any of the following check boxes e Incoming fax messages e Outgoing fax messages e Incoming voice messages From the Select the user s mailbox that all duplicate messages will be reco
275. etVanta UC Server 1 From the Administration application select Help gt License Information 2 Select Modify License The purchase key and machine identifier are shown You can copy the contents to the Windows clipboard by selecting the purchase key or machine identifier and press Ctrl C 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 191 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide To modify the license key on the NetVanta UC Server 1 From the Administration application select Help gt License Information 2 Select Modify License 3 Enter the new license key that you received from ADTRAN If the license key was delivered in electronic format simply cut and paste the license key from the email body or accompanying attachment containing the license key into the Enter upgrade field 192 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using SIP Telephones 11 Using SIP Telephones SIP enabled phones in conjunction with the NetVanta UC Server offer a wide range of phone features such as call park pickup overhead paging auto attendant single button voicemail access caller ID conferencing hunt groups ring groups message waiting indicator music on hold and more The NetVanta UC Server works with many types of SIP compliant phones However phones from different manufacturers are configured differently and the phone features are accessed in different ways This chapter doe
276. ethod is attempted To maintain optimum IMAP server performance and to minimize message retrieval delay it is important that you select the fastest retrieval method possible that is supported on your system and only select the No query optimization method if neither of the other options are successful with your IMAP server To test the selected method of filtering messages 1 Leave a voice message for a user configured for IMAP 2 Login to the user s voicemail using the TUI 3 Check the user s voice messages to determine if the voice message left in step 2 is there If there is a time delay in the message being available over the TUI i e checking immediately after leaving the message fails to present the message but checking 20 minutes later works then this may be an indication that the selected method of filtering messages is not supported by your server 4 Play the voice message left in step 2 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 181 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide To check the software logs for message filtering fall back messages If a message retrieval method was selected but failed it is important to identify when the NetVanta UC Server falls back to the No query optimization method then this will be noted in the software logs 1 Navigate to the software logs The default location is C OWLogs The Software Logging Configuration Tool can be used to check the location The most
277. ew phone e Assign to an existing phone If you selected Assign to a new phone enter the MAC Address and choose a phone type from the Phone Type drop down menu The MAC address is located on a sticker on the phone If you selected Assign to an existing phone select the phone to which you want to assign the new user Only existing phones that have buttons available appear in the drop down menu To show all phones in the drop down menu enable the Show all phones check box If Lu you select a phone that does not have buttons available then the Replace Existing Identity menu appears when you select Next From the drop down menu select an existing identity to replace with the current identity 29 30 31 32 33 Once you have finished configuring a phone for the user select Next The Call Answering menu will appear In the Call Answering menu select one of the following call answering modes e Personal Assistant provides standard voicemail features and is the default call answering mode e Personal Business Assistant provides more advanced features for the user who wants to create personalized services and announcements Select the operator for the new user e System the general operator typically a company receptionist where calls are directed to when a caller presses O in a voicemail greeting e Personal operator a specific operator for example a personal receptionist or an individual user in a part
278. ey can save their personal data All the user data tables that are used in your active services are displayed in the Assistant pane For information about creating user data tables refer to Managing Data Sources on page 327 Managing Data Sources Using the Administrator tab you can create and users can manage data sources Data sources allow users to access and change information using the computer or over the telephone For example a real estate agent can create a data table that includes information such as address or price for each property that the agent has listed While away from the office the agent can call and access the data table to add change or 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 327 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide delete information about a particular property Net anta UC Client _ Ol x File Edit View Tools Help i Hs St oa yleeoe x gt e gt Tabs p Admin Eric wels Shaun Welt Administration Display Name Identities Class of Service Locked Out Phones Moc 1 Users Phones L Paging Groups Gateways Ports Ep classes of Service FA authentications Ay identities GX Data sources ent Servers User name Admin FR Communication Systems Most recent GUI access 9 22 2010 12 30 18 PM TA Netvanta 7000 Series J options TA netvants UC Server J Routing J Services Eric welis 2003 General Voice
279. f these restricted numbers the call will not be completed For more information refer to Routing calls using the dial plan on page 49 9 If you want to configure the identity as a phantom identity enable the Phantom check box 10 From the Run service drop down menu choose the service that you want to assign to the new identity 11 Select Next to proceed 12 On the Configure SIP Authentication menu enter a password in the Password field The password allows the phone to connect to the communication system 13 Select Finish to create the new user identity The new user identity appears in the Identities summary pane beside its distinctive Lu icon By default only the auto attendant identities appear but you can display all the identities by selecting View gt Display User Identity Details Assigning a User Identity to a New Phone To assign a user identity to a new phone follow these steps 1 In the Identities summary pane right click the user identity that you want to assign to a phone User identity 2 Select Assign to Phone The Assign Identity to Phone menu appears 3 Enable the Assign to a new phone button 4 Enter the phone s MAC address in the MAC Address field Lu The MAC address of each phone is printed on a sticker located on the phone 5 Select a phone type from the Phone Type list 6 Select OK 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 131 Managing User Extensions and Identities
280. fault call answering mode and includes access to all of the standard voicemail features e The PBA user has access to more advanced features and is for users who want to create personalized call answering services and announcements When a user is unavailable callers are transferred to an operator s extension by pressing a button in a voicemail greeting typically 0 You can specify the operator for the user either System or Personal e A System operator is the general operator and the call is typically transferred to the extension of the company receptionist e A Personal operator is an alternative to the System operator and callers are directed to a different extension for example to a personal receptionist or to an individual in a particular department or location You can specify the same operator number for several users To change a user s name information 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name that you want to modify and select Open 2 Change any of the following options e First name e Last name e Display name If the user is a Windows user with access to Active Directory you can select Browse to ome search the system for user name information For information about Active Directory refer to Understanding Active Directory on page 84 3 Enable Include in dial by name directory if you want the user to be accessible by the dial by name mode 4 Select OK To change the time zone for a si
281. file extension may not appear in the filename The file may appear as PagingServer exe in Windows Explorer 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 77 Configuring Paging ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Inthe PagingServer exe config file locate the following lines of XML code lt setting name HandsfreeMaxWaitTime serializeAs String gt lt value gt 2000 lt value gt The number 2000 between the lt value gt start tag and lt value gt end tag is the default value in milliseconds for the maximum wait time of an HFAA page If your maximum wait time value has been changed from the default this number will be different 4 To change the maximum wait time in milliseconds of an HFAA page replace the number 2000 between the tags with another number Valid entries are whole numbers from 100 to 30000 Do not add any spaces between the tags and the maximum wait time value The following example configures the maximum wait time for 4500 milliseconds lt setting name HandsfreeMax WaitTime serializeAs String gt lt value gt 4500 lt value gt 5 Save the PagingServer exe config file and close the text editor 6 For changes to take affect you must restart the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server service using the procedure outlined in Restarting the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server Service on page 81 Enabling and Disabling the HFAA Audio Prompt The audio prompt is a short tone that is issued to alert
282. for your operating system For 32 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Data System A nnouncements For 64 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files x86 ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Data System A nnouncements Copy the new HFAA audio prompt WAV file into the directory accessed using Windows Explorer in 1 On the NetVanta UC Server computer use Windows Explorer to navigate to the directory below that is appropriate for your operating system For 32 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin For 64 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files x86 ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin 4 Open the PagingServer exe config file using a text editor program such as Notepad Wor The config file extension may not appear in the filename The file may appear as PagingServer exe in Windows Explorer 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 79 Configuring Paging ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 Inthe PagingServer exe config file locate the following lines of XML code lt setting name HandsfreeAnnounceFile serializeAs String gt lt value gt PagingTone wav lt value gt The PagingTone wav between the lt value gt start tag and lt value gt end tag is the default audio prompt WAV file that issues to alert the recipient of the HFAA page If the default audio prompt WAV file has been c
283. format depends on the underlying transport Mark Jones 613 599 9698 Called ld Name ANetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the called party name as provided by the underlying transport Mark Jones Called ld Number ANetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the raw called party s telephone number as provided by the underlying transport 613 599 9698 Port Name The name of the port the call is using NetVanta UC Server Trunk Name The name of the trunk the call is using Admin Trunk 1 Current Date Time ANetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the current date and time Format depends on the location of the computer but is typically December 25 2006 12 02 PM Matched Contact Name The caller is matched to the called party s contacts This is a NetVanta UC Server Text Value containing the contact display name or blank if no match Sharon Allen Next Unique Id A NetVanta UC Server Text Value containing a globally unique string 36 characters long This value can be referenced only using the Add Data element and is used to assign a unique value to a database field The Add Data element is typically followed by a Fetch Data element accessing the same table and using the Last Unique Id value to fetch the record just added Do not depend on the specific format of these unique values Although the actual format is not important it is typically the following 0E49D1 1
284. formation that you want to include in the notification You can combine typed text and selected values in the Subject and Body sections of the element In the call flow the text and values are linked together From the Attach field you can also select attachments to send with the notification such as announcements greetings temporary recordings faxes or database values for example audio or fax Temporary recordings are created using the Record Announcement element Using the Send Email element with a temporary recording can be used as a form filling application such as requesting quotes or answering general customer service questions and so on For more information on temporary recordings refer to Allowing Callers to Make Temporary Recordings Within a Service on page 267 To specify the NetVanta UC Server to send an email when you receive a voicemail message 1 Select one of the following from the Send drop down menu e Entire Message sends an email of all the information associated with the voice message that you received including the voice message as a wav attachment e Notification sends only the information associated with the voice message Short Notification sends only some of the information associated with the voice message This mode is useful for small menu devices such as cell phones that are capable of receiving email e Custom allows you to add information that you want to include with the email notification
285. from the system By default all mailbox limits are disabled When enabled the maximum storage time for voicemail messages defaults to 90 days The valid storage range is 1 to 9999 days Configuring the User CoS Security The CoS security measures that can be configured include the account lockout behavior the minimum password and PIN lengths the frequency with which passwords and PINs must be changed and the complexity requirements for passwords and PINs These features can be configured in the Security tab 154 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Classes of Service when editing a user CoS profile New User Class of Service General Local Mailbox Limits Security Features Account lockout v Enable automatic lockout of accounts Number of failed attempts before lockout 10 Failed attempt tracking period minutes 30 Password rules Minimum password length 4 Maximum password age days 120 Password must meet complexity requirements PIN rules Minimum PIN length Maximum PIN age days VIPIN must meet complexity requirements Account Lockout In the interest of a more secure voicemail system administrators can enable an automatic lockout feature to lock users out of an account if there have been too many failed access attempts In addition NetVanta UC Server can track the number of failed login attempts for a specified amount of time If the user reaches the
286. g Services 15 Creating Custom Call Answering Services This chapter describes call answering services managing services and building services using the Service Editor This chapter covers the following topics e Overview on page 253 e Managing Services on page 254 e Using the Service Editor on page 257 e Working with Elements to Build a Service on page 259 e Customizing Services using Parameters on page 262 e Validating Services on page 263 e Troubleshooting Services on page 263 Overview A service is like a map that the NetVanta UC Server follows when it answers a call Services are made up of elements that are linked together to create a call flow You can design simple services made up of two or three elements or you can create complex call flows made up of a dozen elements or more Use the Service Editor to build a service You can build a service using the Service Editor and then assign it to an identity so that incoming calls follow the path that you specify You can create a new service for the purposes of setting up a 1 800 line a sales information line or a line associated with a menu of options that callers can select to obtain specific information Likewise you can set up a fax back service and activate it on an identity For information about designing and changing services refer to Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services on page 265 Services can be renamed copied organized in folders and deleted You can
287. g must be disabled 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 203 Using SIP Telephones ECS BAS Administrator Guide The connected call pickup feature is very powerful in that it allows any user to pick up any connected phone call that goes through the NetVanta UC Server as long as they know the number of the phone that answered the call This feature is enabled by default For information on restricting this feature refer to Restricting picking up connected calls on page 57 To change phones during a call 1 204 From the phone to which you want to transfer the call dial 27 lt called phone number gt The called phone number can be an internal extension number or an external phone number and refers to the number of the phone that answered the call If you restrict this feature you can configure this mode so that a user can only pick up connected calls from their desk phone If this is the case then dial 27 only To connect the call the phone from which you are dialing will ring Answer the ringing phone When you answer the phone the call automatically connects to this phone and is dropped from the phone from which you originally answered the call The call is transferred from one phone to another silently so the user may be unaware that you have changed phones Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing 12 Faxing This chapter provides information on receiving faxes on trunk l
288. gits 911 would show callers from the second location with four digit extensions starting with 3 with the regular expression 3 0 9 3 and the host GW2 If a caller from one of these locations then calls 911 the source pattern specified is identified and the call is routed accordingly so that the location of the call can be identified An alternative use for the Source Pattern would be to route calls from one source through a host that permits long distance calls while calls from another source are routed through a host that does not permit long distance calls Routing and Restricting Calls If you have more than one gateway you can create a gateway group and assign it to a dial plan entry If a gateway within the group is busy or unavailable the next gateway in the group is used instead This method provides increased capacity alternate routes for dialing and fault tolerance disaster recovery options For more information see To create a gateway group on page 165 To add a new dial plan 1 619510001 1D In the Administration navigation pane under Communication Systems select the communication system to which you want to add a new dial plan Select Routing From the Dial Plan table select the plus button to open the Dial Plan Entry menu Original Digits Description Priority Gateway or Host Call next member after X seconds Digits to Skip Prefix to Add Suffix to Add Transport Source Pattern Selec
289. hanged the filename will be different 6 To change the HFAA audio prompt WAV file replace the PagingTone wav value between the tags with the filename of the WAV file copied to the Announcements directory in 2 Do not add any spaces between the tags and WAV filename For example lt setting name PlayHandsfreeAnnounceTone serializeAs String gt lt value gt PagingAlert wav lt value gt 7 Save the PagingServer exe config file and close the text editor 8 For changes to take affect you must restart the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server service using the procedure outlined in Restarting the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server Service on page 81 To change the HFAA audio prompt WAV file using an absolute path 1 On the NetVanta UC Server computer use Windows Explorer to navigate to the directory below that is appropriate for your operating system For 32 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin For 64 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files x86 ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin 2 Open the PagingServer exe config file using a text editor program such as Notepad Wor The config file extension may not appear in the filename The file may appear as PagingServer exe in Windows Explorer 3 Inthe PagingServer exe config file locate the following lines of XML code lt setting name HandsfreeAnnounceFile serializeAs String gt
290. hat the service is probably started after the call is answered Note that using analog trunks with the Outbound Dialer is not recommended d Number of minutes delay When the server fails to connect to a specific phone before next attempt number the request is queued again The d option indicates the number of minutes delay before the request is attempted again If this mode is omitted the server uses the Active message delivery delay mode Tools gt Options gt Message Delivery for the user for whom the request is being processed r Number of retry attempts The server tries each number in turn until a call connects If all the numbers fail the server tries the first number again and so on This mode specifies how many times each number is called before the request is abandoned For example if the value of this mode is 2 then each number is attempted a maximum of two times If the mode is not specified then the server uses the Active message delivery retry mode Tools gt Options gt Message Delivery for the user for whom the request is being processed pm Additional Parameters List This is a comma separated list of additional parameters that are passed to the service when it executes These values can be accessed within a service definition as special Text values whose names are Parameter1 Parameter2 and so on The first value in the list becomes the value of Parameter1 and so forth or help List Paramete
291. hat they are the only person in the conference To access the conference bridge 1 From an internal telephone dial the conference bridge number The default number is 7050 Wor An outside caller can also access the conference through the attendant services using the dial by extension or dial by name directory 2 Enter the four digit conference ID 3 Follow the prompts to access the conference bridge Lu To access the list of options you can press while the conference is in progress When you press during a conference the following options are available The available options depend on when during the conference you press 196 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using SIP Telephones e Press 1 to mute yourself Response You are now muted e Press 2 to unmute yourself Response You are now unmuted e Press 3 to disable entry and exit notifications Response Entry and exit notifications have been disabled e Press 4 to mute all other participants Response All others have been muted conference To mute new callers press 4 again Wore When you press 4 to mute all participants this does not apply to new callers who join the e Press 5 to unmute all other participants Response All others have been unmuted e Press 7 to toggle between closing and reopening the conference to additional participants Response The conference is now closed to additional partic
292. hat you want for a voice message From the Fax Messages drop down menu choose the sensitivity level that you want for a fax message 4 Select OK Messages that have different sensitivity levels are managed by individual message Stores Lu You can check the email server s documentation for the specific capabilities that are available when using this mode Configuring Message Waiting Indicator Options You can specify how the message waiting indicator operates after a user receives a message The instructions below describe how to set the message waiting indicator behavior system wide however you can also set it individually for specific users Users can also set their own message waiting indicator behavior If a user selects Use system defaults then the message waiting indicator behavior defaults to the message waiting indicator behavior set system wide Because message waiting indicator behavior can be set by both the administrator and the user and the administrator can set it both system wide and individually sometimes these settings may differ The message waiting indicator behavior in effect corresponds to the last mode set Thus the administrator can set the system wide message waiting indicator behavior when a new system is installed or upgraded The user can then set their own message waiting indicator behavior which may differ from the system setting However if the administrator then changes the system wide setting this
293. hat you want to import and then select Next Make sure that the box next to the item has a check mark in it before you proceed 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 353 Importing and Exporting ECS BAS Administrator Guide If you want to delete an item in the change destination field select the item and then select the Delete button If you want to change the destination of an item select the item and then select the Change destination button Select Next to transfer the items Select Next when the wizard is done Select Finish To export an item 1 354 Using the Select task to perform drop down menu select Export to the File System and then select Next Select the directory where the items that you want to export are located and then select Next Select all the items that you want to export and then select Next Make sure that the box next to the item has a check mark in it before you proceed Select Finish when the wizard is finished exporting the items Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Maintaining the NetVanta UC Server 20 Maintaining the NetVanta UC Server Basic maintenance procedures such as backups are recommended in the event that disaster recovery is required Files and Settings on page 369 rg For information on restoring files and settings refer to Restoring NetVanta UC Server Backing up the NetVanta UC Server Backing up the NetVanta UC Se
294. he NetVanta UC Server or a system upgrade If another CoS has been configured it is also available during a new installation or system upgrade If another CoS is set as the default then it will be available as the default CoS to all new users If the default CoS does not exist then the CoS of None is available for all users Creating a User CoS To create a new user CoS follow these steps 1 From the Administration tab select the Administration navigation bar to access the Administration navigation pane 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 151 Configuring Classes of Service 2 Select the Classes of Service topic from the list Tabs Topics Navigation Pane Navigation Bars Identitites Pane Ef Netvanta UC Client File Edit View Tools Help ECS BAS Administrator Guide K a 7 TF Ss Phones Paging Groups E Gateways i Ports A Ciasses of Service RA Authentications Mm rae au Services Name Type i Phone Class of Servi Phone il Standard Phones al System Voice Mail User l User Class of Service User Phone Default DEFAULT FOR PHON DEFAULT FOR USER Announcements Distribution Lists Faxes Logs NV7100 Direct Voicemail 2 Direct Voicemail Transfer NV7100 External Check VE al Name Type Default Phone Class of Service Phone No Register with secondary server No Outboun
295. he toolbar Restoring NetVanta UC Server Files and Settings To restore data from a Microsoft backup file requires that the data has been previously backed up using 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 369 Troubleshooting ECS BAS Administrator Guide appropriate backup procedures 370 ih For disaster recovery purposes ensure that you backup the NetVanta UC Server regularly For information on backing up the NetVanta UC Server refer to Backing up the NetVanta UC Server on page 355 For more information on backup and restore procedures refer to the Backup and Restore Procedures technical note available from the ADTRAN Support Community httos supportforums adtran com This and other documents are also located on the NetVanta UC Server installation media Restoring the NetVanta UC Server from a backup file only restores the system to the State it was when the backup file was created Any changes made to the system since the backup file was created will need to be repeated Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Appendix A Installing and Uninstalling Software Appendix A Installing and Uninstalling Software Overview This appendix outlines the procedures for installing and uninstalling software for the NetVanta UC Server Installing Active Directory Users and Computers Console If you do not have automatic access to Active Directory Users and Computers console you must inst
296. he Diagnostics System Options tab In the Exception reports section select the Enable check box In the email address field enter the email address where you want the exception reports sent The default email address is exceptionreports adtran com You can enter multiple email addresses separated by semicolons Select OK Lu An exception report does not contain confidential company information Configuring Error Reporting You can configure whether NetVanta UC Server attaches a detailed error report to the exception report email if an exception or error occurs in NetVanta UC Server This detailed error report is the contents of the error report file generated when an exception occurs The maximum file size of the detailed error report can also be configured To configure the NetVanta UC Server to attach an error report to the exception report 1 2 3 4 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Error Reporting tab Select the Include error report details check box In the Maximum Size KB field enter the desired maximum file size in kilobytes for the error report that will be sent as an attachment to the exception report email The valid range is 1 to 10240 If the size of the error report attachment exceeds the specified maximum file size the one error report details file dmp file will not be sent however the error report email will still be sent To configure
297. he fields are displayed in the User Data edit window which is used to edit and change the entries in a user data table To delete a field in a user data source 1 In the Data Sources content pane double click the user data source from which you want to delete a field 2 Select the field that you want to delete 3 Select the Delete button 4 Select OK A Fetch Data or Dial for Data element can retrieve more than one row depending on the number of rows in the source and your filter conditions When one or more rows are fetched a reference to a field by another element is always a reference to the field s value in the current row in the set of rows fetched The Move Current Row and Prompt for Current Row elements can be used to change which row is current Immediately after a Fetch Data or Dial for Data element is executed the current row is the first row e When only one row is fetched the first row is the single row that was fetched e When multiple rows are fetched which row is first depends on whether you defined a sort in the data source definition Defining a sort order If you define a sort order in a User Data data source this defines the default order of the rows fetched by a Fetch Data or Dial for Data element However a Fetch Data element can override this order Sorting is always done by the NetVanta UC Server for this type of data source e Ifno sort order was defined then the order of the rows is determine
298. he number of rings e For aring group the number of rings determines the number of rings that are made simultaneously to all the members of the ring group before the call is redirected to the overflow behavior e For a hunt group the number of rings determines the number of rings that are made to a member of the hunt group before the call is redirected to the next member of the group The overflow behavior only occurs after the number of rings has been made to the last member of the hunt group 17 From the Run Service list select an overflow service for the group identity If the call is not answered after the specified number of rings for a ring group or the specified number of rings for each member of a hunt group the service that you select answers the call 18 Select Next 19 Select Finish Configuring Mobile Twinning Using a Ring Group Identity Mobile twinning refers to twinning devices that use one phone number to ring more than one device simultaneously For example an internal extension can be twinned to a cell phone When a call comes in both devices ring simultaneously If a user is away from their desk they can then answer the call on their cell phone This allows mobile users to be available for calls while away from their office The benefits of mobile twinning include e Users are accessible using one number and have only one voice mailbox to manage e Twinned calls that are placed to your cell phone can easily be m
299. he user that you want to have access 2 3 4 Repeat step 4 until all the users that you want are listed in the Accessible users field 5 Select OK To remove an accessible user from a user profile 1 Inthe Authentications summary pane right click the Login Name of the user for which you want to remove another user s access and select Open 2 Inthe Accessible users section select the name of the user that you want to remove 3 Select the trash can al 4 Select OK Managing User Profiles from EBS If your system uses Windows Essential Business Server EBS 2008 then you can manage NetVanta UC Server users from within the EBS Administration Console installed on EBS Lu To access NetVanta UC Server user profiles from EBS the NetVanta UC Client must be When the NetVanta UC Client is installed on EBS then under Business Applications a tab is added for NetVanta UC Server Users The information provided in the tab is the same information that is available from the NetVanta UC Client Users contents and detail panes Therefore you can add edit and delete NetVanta UC Server users from within the EBS Administration Console just as you would in the NetVanta UC Client Changes made to NetVanta UC Server user profiles from EBS are automatically updated in the NetVanta UC Client From within the UC Server Users tab you can also open the NetVanta UC Client or connect to another server To access NetVanta UC Server us
300. hen a user logs in with the primary authentication the user profile is on the main tab doing so Wor Although it is possible to remove the primary authentication ADTRAN does not advise When you add an authentication to a user profile the authentication then has access to another user s NetVanta UC Server client application The profiles that a user has authorization to access are displayed as a horizontal list of tabs across the top of the application window The user selects the tab of another user to change their greetings change transfer options or any other function that they might be required to perform You can change some aspects of authentications using the Users summary pane For full 120 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles authentications management use the Authentications pane te OR Yow Lock owe Fsmsrxr 1et erty ne ston intra authentication tab Lu You must restart the application to view changes to user authentication tabs To add an authentication to an existing user profile 1 In the Users summary pane right click the user name that you want to add an authentication to Select Open to open the User menu box Select the Authentications tab Select Add to add an authentication Select a user name from the Select Authentication drop down menu Select Select hy SU Re oe Repeat steps 4 to 6 until you have added all the
301. her a Park Zone button assigned to Park Zone 1 or the 99 feature access code another user can retrieve the parked call from Park Zone 1 using a park button assigned to Park Zone 1 on their phone Because each Park Zone button is assigned to a specific park zone users can only use Park Zone buttons to retrieve calls from park zones associated with their phone s Park Zone buttons For example a Park Zone button assigned to park zone I cannot be used to retrieve a call parked in park zone 2 To assign an Identity Speed Dial BLF or Park Zone button 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select the Phones topic 2 Inthe Phones summary pane right click on the phone to which you would like to assign a button 3 Select Open from the drop down menu The Phone menu will appear 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 147 Installing and Configuring SIP Phones ECS BAS Administrator Guide 4 148 In the Assigned Buttons section of the Phone menu select the Insert button A new button with an Empty value will appear in the Assigned Buttons list General information Assigned Buttons D MAC address IP address optional Description optional Phone type Number of buttons Number of lines 6 Number of expansion module buttons 0 of 0 Maximum Speed Dial 2001 Speed Dial 2002 BLF Jeremy Swanson 2006 on NetVa Jeremy Swanson Empty X Empty Identity Park Zone Speed Dial Double c
302. hnical Support 369 Restoring NetVanta UC Server Files and Settings 369 22 Appendix A Installing and Uninstalling Software 371 OVENWVIEW i sean dre qe Pt a SES TRS hela wean alae etd ee ees 371 Installing Active Directory Users and Computers Console 371 Uninstalling Server Software 372 23 Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs 373 OVEIVIEW A ena ite Le geht deen aie emda ete nn te NT aoe Eyes ae wks 373 Troubleshooting System Error Logs 373 Troubleshooting Warning Logs 375 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 7 Table of Contents ECS BAS Administrator Guide 8 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Introducing the Administrator Application 1 Introducing the Administrator Application Installing the NetVanta UC Server on a Windows operating system allows you to manage the business communications system within a Microsoft IT environment Integration with Active Directory allows IT administrators to manage the communications system using the same user accounts and security policies that are used in the Windows environment The automatic integration requires no extra programming or special integrati
303. ht 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server Microsoft Exchange Server Version Available Connection Method s Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 MAPI Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 MAPI Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 Service Pack 1 SP1 MAPI Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP2 MAPI Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 SP3 MAPI Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 MAPI Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 SP1 MAPI EWS Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 SP2 MAPI EWS Selecting the Client Access Server for MAPI Connections to Exchange Server 2010 The Client Access server CAS role was introduced in Exchange Server 2007 to accept client connections to services such as Outlook Web Access much like the Exchange Server 2003 front end server Nevertheless in Exchange Server 2007 exchange clients including NetVanta UC Server still connect directly to the Mailbox server via MAPI In Exchange Server 2010 the RPC Client Access service was introduced to allow the CAS to handle all client connections Instead of Exchange clients including NetVanta UC Server connecting to the Mailbox server directly they must connect to the CAS to access the Mailbox server If you are integrating NetVanta UC Server with Exchange Server 2010 this change can affect which physical server should be designated as the Server when configuring an Exchange Server 2010 connection in NetVanta UC Server
304. ial causes of the restart log entry 1 Validate the correct operation of voicemail and auto attendants 2 Validate the NetVanta UC Client connectivity to the server 3 Validate access to user mailboxes on all mail servers 4 Review previous logs of a similar nature to see if there is a pattern for example they all occur at 3 00 am e If there is an obvious pattern in the logs consider the possibility of other activities interfering such as virus scans application updates and so on e Iflogs occur rapidly or frequently there is likely a problem in the configuration or operation In this case contact ADTRAN Technical Support e Iflogs occur infrequently then continue with normal operation For information on contacting ADTRAN Technical Support refer to Accessing Technical Support on page 369 Troubleshooting Warning Logs The following is a list of potential warnings that may be noted in the System Errors and Warning logs To troubleshoot a warning search the list below for the log entry and note the possible causes of and solutions for the warning ore Not all warnings necessarily require action Log Entry Possible Causes and Solutions s display pattern not defined The Definity PBX configuration file NetVanta UC Server Data System Definity Definition cfg in use has been edited manually and a required display pattern is missing Call reason code s is invalid in key An analog PBX configuration file
305. ialer some configuration is required There are also options that do not require configuration but which can be configured to optimize the outbound dialer To use the outbound dialer you must configure a port for outbound dialing to process the call requests If you want you can increase the number of outgoing calls that can be made simultaneously Refer to To specify the maximum number of concurrent calls on page 23 for more information Server activities regarding outbound dialing are automatically noted in the Sent Items logs and can be viewed in the NetVanta UC Server Client The information that is logged includes the user making the call request the result the called number for successful calls only the date and time the number of attempts and any error conditions or failures to complete a call If you want you can create custom log entries for services that are run ore The logs are placed in the Sent Items log category 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 239 Using Advanced Features ECS BAS Administrator Guide To configure a port for outbound dialing 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select Ports 2 Right click on the port entry and select Open 3 Under General information ensure that Enable use of port for is enabled 4 Under Enable use of port for ensure that Outbound dialing is enabled and select OK When a call is made using the Outbound Dialer the call displays as Outbound Call in the Port
306. ialing Rule field 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 41 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 In the first Account code dialing format section specify pauses or dual tone multi frequency DTMF characters that you want to be inserted before or after the account code Lu A comma inserts a half second pause before or after the account code You can also specify multiple commas using the following syntax xx where xx is Lu the number of commas e g 9 05 5551234 gt 9 5551234 6 Select OK To set the account code dialing format length 1 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Dialing tab 3 In the Account Code section enable the Enable account codes check box 4 Select the Details button to open the Account Code Dialing Rule field 5 In the second Account code dialing format section specify the minimum and maximum length of account codes that a user can define 6 Select OK Setting Administrative Maintenance and Diagnostic Options The following administrative maintenance and diagnostic options can be set system wide e Automatically archive logs e Configuring diagnostic system options e Setting mail server message buffering e Specifying active domains e Configuring system call options Automatically Archive Logs You can enable automatic log archiving in order for the NetVanta UC Server to periodically cr
307. iated field You can specify the amount of time the NetVanta UC Server waits for a response before it moves to the next element To allow callers to move to the next element if they do not select a key 1 Enable the No key in check box 2 Inthe field enter the number of seconds to wait To set selection keys on a menu 1 Inthe first On drop down menu select the number of the key that you want The number one appears by default When callers press a key they are sent to the element that is adjacent to the connector pin depending on their choice 2 Select New to add an On drop down menu for setting an additional key The NetVanta UC Server enters the keys in numerical sequence You can also select a key from the drop down menu You can set a maximum of 12 keys Keys range from one to nine then include zero and When you have finished setting selection keys you can connect the subsequent element for each selection key that you set as applicable To remove a selection key from a menu Select the trashcan button to the left of the key that you want to delete Manage Mailbox Element E The Manage Mailbox element allows callers to retrieve messages Manage Malbox 1 a remotely over the telephone Called Extension refers to the identity originally called Selected Extension refers to the identity selected in Mailbox the last successful Select Extension element in the service If there was Called Extension none or the la
308. iately after a Fetch Data or Dial for Data element is executed the current row is the first row e When only one row is fetched the first row is the single row that was fetched e When multiple rows are fetched which row is first depends on whether you defined a sort in the data source definition Defining a sort order If you define a sort order in a data source this defines the default order of rows fetched by a Fetch Data or Dial for Data element However a Fetch Data element can override this order When an ODBC data source has a defined sort order the sorting is done by the ODBC server itself and not 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 331 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide by the NetVanta UC Server In most cases this distinction is unimportant however some data types supported by the NetVanta UC Server are not directly supported by ODBC Thus in some cases the sort order produced by the ODBC server is not the same as what would have been produced by the NetVanta UC Server e Ifno sort order was defined then the order of the rows is determined by the data source and you should not make any assumptions about the order e With a defined sort order the first row is the first row in the sort order specified However if the sort field contains duplicate values the order of rows with the same sort value is determined by the ODBC server and not by the NetVanta UC Server and you should
309. ications service from dial plan entry Died Sales Overflow irect to group ER Attendant Intelligent Routing through Attendant A Sewices i Attendant Support Overflow Skills based routing Support QucUC eoe Attendant Caller Selection Time of Day If no agent the call overflows Database Query to the NetVanta UC Server applications service Gather some information about your system and about how you want the call queuing feature to function on your system Note the called number DID number that is sent by the phone company If your company uses analog trunking you can have only one dialed number which is configured in the gateway If your company uses digital trunking you can negotiate how many dialed numbers you purchase for example all the numbers between 613 555 2170 and 613 555 2199 You can also negotiate what numbers the telephone company sends through the digital facilities You can for example request that the phone company deliver 4 digits to you In the example of 613 555 2170 you can have them send any number of digits up to the length of the telephone number In the same example you can have them send the entire telephone number 6135552170 You must know the called number in order to correctly configure a dial plan entry that routes callers into a queue Note whether multiple incoming numbers must be routed to the same queue Rather than telling callers which numbers to dial to enter the queue you
310. icons to scroll through a multiple page document Previous page gt Next page Wor To print the fax document from the Fax Viewer select the printer icon on the Fax Viewer toolbar To print a fax document 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the fax documents folder containing the document that you want to print The folder s contents are listed in the summary pane Faxes Folder 3 Right click the fax document that you want to print and select Open to display the fax in the Fax Viewer 4 Select File gt Print Setup to open the Print Setup menu box 5 Select a printer and select OK To print the first page only of a fax document 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the fax documents folder containing the document that you want to print The folder s contents are listed in the summary pane 3 Right click the fax document that you want to print and select Open to display the fax in the Fax Viewer 4 Select File gt Print First Page to print the first page only of the fax Depending on how your system is configured the fax transmission report may also be printed You can configure whether the fax transmission report is printed in addition to the first Lu page of the fax To configure this mode refer to Setting Fax Message Delivery Options on page 29 To rename a fax document 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu
311. icular department or location where calls are directed to when a caller presses 0 in a voicemail greeting If you selected Personal operator enter the operator s extension number in the adjacent field Select Next The Summary menu will appear 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 105 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide 34 Review the summary of the information for the new user oe If there is information in the Summary field that is incorrect you can select Back to the appropriate menu and change it 35 Select Submit to create the new user profile You cannot use the same name extension or mailbox number as another user The extension number cannot be the same as a port extension The NetVanta UC Server displays a warning if any of the above conditions exist and the New User Wizard restarts To create a local user 1 Follow all the steps in To start the New User Wizard on page 102 2 Select the Local User radio button and select Next 3 Inthe User Information Local menu enter the following new user information e First name e Last name e Display name 4 Enable the Include in dial by name directory check box if you want the user included in the dial by name directory 5 Use the Class of service drop down menu to select the Class of Service for the user 6 Use the Voice drop down menu to select the desired voice that the system will use for prerecorded announcement
312. id Consult the inline documentation for details about valid syntax rules Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 379 Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs 380 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc ECS BAS Administrator Guide 619510001 1D
313. ients or fax numbers of a fax listed in the fax queue 1 Select the Queue folder Faxes scheduled for transmission are listed in the summary pane You can change a scheduled fax only if it is in waiting status Right click the fax that you want to change and select Modify The Recipients menu box opens Make the changes that you want and then select Next 2 3 4 To remove a recipient from the list select the recipient in the list and then select Remove 5 To change a recipient s fax number select the recipient and then make the change 6 Select Next until the Finished menu appears 7 Select Finished To reschedule transmission of a fax listed in the fax queue 1 Select the Queue folder Faxes scheduled for transmission are listed in the summary pane You can reschedule a fax only if it is in waiting status 2 Right click the fax whose transmission you want to reschedule and select Reschedule to open the Scheduling menu box 3 Change the scheduling information that you want and then select Next 4 Select Next until the Finished menu appears 5 Select Finished 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 217 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide To forward a fax listed in the fax queue 1 Select the Queue folder Faxes scheduled for transmission are listed in the summary pane You can reschedule a fax only if it is in waiting status Q Queue 2 Right click the fax that you want to forward and select Forwa
314. if secondary server exists Proxy Cancel 162 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Classes of Service Configuring SIP Proxy Registration To configure the phones in this CoS to register to a SIP proxy server follow these steps 1 Use the Type drop down menu to select either Stateful or Outbound for the SIP proxy type This is the type of SIP proxy server to which the phones will register Stateful proxy mode is typically used with Business Continuity In stateful proxy mode each phone is registered to the proxy and SIP signaling is sent to the SIP proxy device Outbound SIP proxy only provides local phone survivability in the case of a Primary Server failure Edit Phone Class of Service A phone class of service can be applied to one or more phones and defines some common attributes for those phones Name Phone Class of Service Use as default for new phones Advanced connection options Enable secondary registration if secondary server exists Proxy Type Outbound Address 172 200 1 193 Port 5060 OK Cancel 2 Ifthe SIP proxy Type selected is Outbound enter the IP address of the SIP proxy server in the Address field If the SIP proxy Type configured is Stateful enter the hostname of the SIP proxy server in the Address field 3 Inthe Port field enter the port on the SIP proxy server to which the phones will register 4 Selec
315. ilar to the one provided Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc Conventions ECS BAS Administrator Guide 4 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Introducing the Administrator Application 9 CONVENTIONS A tre a e a E MS monter Mee malta asa mien Gre Siege teat aes 9 Product Features issus eee ae ns ee den ee Gok e ne dee eens 10 About the NetVanta UC Server 11 Starting the Administrator Application 14 Changing the Password 14 Navigating the NetVanta UC Server 15 Customizing the NetVanta UC Server 16 Installing the NetVanta UC Client 18 2 Setting System Wide Options 21 Setting User Options 22 Setting Auto Attendant and System Announcement Options 33 Setting Outbound Calls and Dialing Options 38 Setting Administrative Maintenance and Diagnostic Options 42 3 Routing and Restricting Calls 49 Routing Calls sta Seon redresser De
316. ill remain saved and will be presented to the user again at the next TUI access Users can skip bulletin messages but the bulletin message will be presented again on the next TUI access unless it has been deleted By default users cannot create bulletin voice messages To allow user CoS members access to sending bulletin messages enable the check box next to the feature To deny user CoS members access to a feature remove the check from the check box next to the feature The bulletin message feature is available for both Local Message Store users and Lt Exchange Message Store users 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 157 Configuring Classes of Service ECS BAS Administrator Guide Applying the CoS to User Profiles Once the user CoS is created it can be applied to user accounts in a number of ways You can apply the CoS to multiple or individual users already configured on the system or users as they are imported into the system The following sections outline the different methods of applying a user CoS to various user accounts Applying the CoS to Users Already in the System If you have users that have already been added to the NetVanta UC Server system you can apply the user CoS to an individual user or multiple users simultaneously To apply a configured user CoS to existing users follow these steps 1 Select the Users topic from the list in the Administration navigation pane 2 Inthe Users summary pane select th
317. ines sending faxes from other applications sending cover pages only using Quick Fax managing faxes creating and using fax cover pages queuing faxes and automatically sending faxes requested by callers This chapter covers the following topics e Overview on page 205 e Sending Faxes on page 206 e Receiving Faxes on page 230 For information on setting fax specifications for outgoing faxes or when using the Fax on demand element refer to Setting Fax Message Delivery Options on page 29 For information on setting dialing options related to faxing refer to Setting Outbound Calls and Dialing Options on page 38 Overview Use the Faxes menu to send and manage fax documents and their cover pages from the NetVanta UC Client There are several methods of sending faxes including e Sending a fax from other applications using the ADTRAN Fax print driver e Sending a cover page only from the NetVanta UC Client using Quick Fax e Sending a prepared fax from the NetVanta UC Client e Automatically sending faxes requested by callers using the Fax on demand element in a service e Sending faxes to a specific fax number using the Send fax element The Faxes menu is not used for receiving faxes Incoming faxes are received and viewed through a user s mailbox for example through Microsoft Outlook Microsoft Exchange Server Lotus Notes or through an Integrated messaging client a Mailboxes navigation bar on the user s NetVanta UC Client
318. information before validating and queuing the request e That the service specified exists e That the user profile for the login authentication is a system userThat the user is authorized to perform this operation If any errors occur for example the utility times out waiting for confirmation or the server returns an error then these are noted in a written error message and the OutDial execution ends If the server receives a request that matches an existing queued request then the request is rejected as a duplicate Two requests match if they are for the same user service parameters and phone numbers If there are no errors then the utility writes a message summarizing the request and the OutDial execution ends When the OutDial execution ends the utility returns a numeric return code that could be used by a shell or batch command processor If the execution is successful the utility returns 0 Unique non zero return codes are returned for the situations below and any other specific error returns from the server e Failed to connect to server e Failed to login e No response from request to server e Duplicate request e Invalid parameters If the outbound call request passes the server s validation then the call request is processed and the following actions occur e An attempt is made to call the first phone number in the list e Ifthe call succeeds then the service is executed The execution of the service may be delayed
319. ing Light Identities Phones Authentications Q 20 Everson Fax DID 2903 UC Server CPi customer Support Ring Group 2905 UC Server You can start the New Identities Wizard to create an identity for a user using the Users summary pane An identity that you create in the Users summary pane also appears and can be managed in the identities pane 118 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles When you create an identity SIP devices require both a SIP authorization and password to successfully register with NetVanta UC Server SIP registration The SIP authorization and password are associated with a user identity Some phones for example Polycom and ADTRAN branded Polycom phones support automatic configuration For more information refer to To obtain the SIP authentication and password for an identity on page 144 When configuring an identity on a SIP telephone that does not support automatic Lu configuration consult ADTRAN integration notes and manufacturer documentation for the specific configuration for your environment To create an identity in the Users summary pane 1 Right click the user to which you want to associate an identity 2 Select Create Identity The New Identity Wizard starts For information about using the New Identity Wizard to create a new identity refer to User Identities on page 130 To add an identity to an existing user profile 1 Inthe Users summary
320. ing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide To access user profiles In the Administration navigation pane select Users User names are displayed in the summary pane Net anta UC Client CL jo x File Edit View Tools Help K sg ts we e Ss ome x gt Admin Eric wets Shaun Wels M Users By Phones LS Paging Groups Gateways Ports GI classes of Service F3 authentications Ay identities GA Data sources Gy servers User name Admin F communication Systems Most recent GUI access 9 22 2010 12 30 18 PM TA Netvanta 7000 Series te Tabs Display Name Identities Class of Service Locked Out Phones Moc Admin Eric welis 2003 General Voicemail Pers Jane Doe 6010 General Voicemail Pers 2ohn Doe 6000 General Voicemail Shaun wells 2004 Summary Topics Pane J options TA netvants UC Server J Routing oJ Services Navigation Pane Services Detail g g Announcements P ane Navigation Distribution Lists Bars Fares Logs The Admin user profile does not have any associated Identitites Peek Pane For Help press F1 Connected as Admin The Users summary pane lists the following information for each user on the system Display name Displays the name of the user or mailbox Identities Displays the identity of the user or mailbox for example an extension number Phones Displays the phones that are associated with the use
321. ing user using the New Identity Wizard and selecting Receive Fax For more information refer to User Identities on page 130 Whether you assign a fax identity to a new or an existing user the result is the same Incoming faxes are received in the user s mailbox the Message Waiting Indicator MWI flashes on their phone and a voicemail message indicates that they have received a fax Fax reception can also be initiated by a Receive Fax element when you have included one in a trunk line service In this case a fax arriving on a trunk line is subject to the trunk s active service e You can also use the Receive Fax element in a voice service in conjunction with a Select Extension element so that the fax can be delivered correctly Thus when the call encounters the Select Extension element of the call flow callers are prompted to enter the extension of the user to whom they want to send the fax From there the fax message encounters the Receive Fax element When you have set this element to the Current Extension the fax message is routed to the extension that the caller specified and it is stored in the user s mailbox e Alternatively you can create a dedicated Receive Fax service to customize receive fax behavior For more information refer to Receive Fax element on page 284 Notifying users of an incoming fax on a shared voice and fax identity Personal Assistant PA users will be notified of an incoming fax using the same
322. ings Within a Service Some elements allow you to select audio files such as announcements greetings database values or temporary recordings Using the Record Announcement element a caller can record audio into a temporary recording and elements like Play Announcement can be used to play the audio Temporary recordings exist only for the duration of the service That is when a service starts no temporary recordings exist If a caller makes a temporary recording the recording is stored in a temporary file that can be played by another element All temporary recordings are discarded when the service ends Up to ten temporary recordings can be created Temporary recordings can be referenced in the following elements e Play Announcement element e Menu element e Send Email element custom e Record Announcement element e Page Recorded element e Add Data element e Update Data element Wor In order to use the Add Data and Update Data elements your system must be licensed for database integration Temporary recordings can be used with the Page Recorded element for a caller to review and confirm a page announcement before playing it over a paging system Temporary recordings can be used with a Send Email element or Add Data and Update Data elements to record audio for form filling applications such as requesting quotes or answering general customer service questions 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 267 Using Ele
323. installed in the default location Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin The OutDial exe is a command line utility that uses various required and optional parameters The command line syntax is OutDial followed by one or more parameters Each parameter is composed of a name and a value with at least one space in between them For example OutDial parameter_namel value Some parameters are required while others are optional An example of a command is shown below and the optional parameters are surrounded by square brackets The parameters are shown on separate lines 240 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Advanced Features for ease of reading only OutDial u lt username gt pw lt password gt h lt host gt ph lt phone number list gt p lt prompt delay gt d lt delay between attempts gt r lt maximum attempts gt s lt service gt pm lt parameters gt l help The default prompt delay between when the call connects and when the service runs is one I second The default delay between call attempts is 3 minutes and the default maximum number of call attempts is 3 Parameters can be specified in any order For example all of the following examples are valid as they have the required host phone number and service parameters and all would have the same result OutDial h somewhere com ph 6135551212 s myService OutDial ph 6135551
324. ion of time that a call remains in the queue unanswered before being redirected to the queue s overflow service The overflow timeout can range from 15 to 7200 seconds or two hours The default value is five minutes If no agents are logged in at a given time then calls are automatically redirected to the overflow service You can also set a wrap up time period which is the duration of time that an agent is given to finish up their work after finishing a call for example to complete relevant documentation or input data This time period can range from 1 to 7200 seconds or two hours To configure call queues 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane double click Communication Systems to open the Communications Systems options 2 Select Services 3 Under Global Advanced Call Queue ACQ check Enable auto logout agent after X missed calls if you wish to automatically log out agents after missing a call in a call queue Specify the number of missed calls from 1 to 99 before an agent is automatically logged out 4 Specify the amount of time in seconds that the call is presented to available agents until the Overflow timeout expires and the call is redirected to the overflow service This time can range from 15 to 7200 seconds two hours The default is five minutes 5 Specify the duration of wrap up time that an agent is given after finishing a call This number can range from 1 to 7200 seconds two hours 619510001 1D Copyright
325. ipants Response The conference is now reopened to additional participants e Press 9 to end the conference e Press 0 to report the number of participants Response Including yourself there are x participants e Press to return to the conference Paging You can send live pages and HFAA pages Live paging allows you to instantly broadcast a page to an analog audio device HFAA pages allow you to send a bidirectional page to a single recipient You can also send a live or recorded page from a call answering service For more information refer to Page Live Element on page 301 or Page Recorded Element on page 302 To send a live page Method 1 1 From your phone dial 72 or PA 2 After you hear the tone begin speaking 3 When you are finished with the page hang up or use the end call function on your phone If you are using sound card paging then you can send a live page or you can first record the page and then broadcast it While Method 2 for sending live and recorded pages is still supported Method 1 is the ome recommended method for sending a live page To configure sound card paging to use Method 1 refer to Configuring Sound Card Paging on page 71 To send a live page Method 2 1 From your phone dial 75 2 After you hear the tone begin speaking 3 When you are finished with the page hang up or use the end call function on your phone 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 197 Using SIP
326. it View Command Process PlayBack Tools Help Toolbar B ol RAX i leu te om eC RAaWH Ya 2K Viewing pane Marker Text area Connected as Sharon Doe Position 0 00 007 Selection 0 00 007 to 0 01 131 7 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 317 Using Announcements in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide The Audio Editor has a Viewing pane and a Text area The Viewing pane contains a waveform representation of your announcement As you play an announcement using the audio commands the vertical announcement Marker moves across the viewing pane from left to right so you can identify the exact location of different parts of your recording You can edit any part of your announcement by manipulating the waveform and using the commands located in the toolbar You can also remove parts of the message that are no longer required The Text area allows you to type a script for your announcement before recording it You can read the script from the menu while recording to help you eliminate pauses in your announcement The Toolbar contains visual shortcuts to the most frequently used menu items Hold the pointer over a button to show the tool tips The toolbar contains View Select and Process commands as well as standard Audio commands found on most applications ome Make sure that there is a sound card installed on the computer that you are using Creating Announcements You can record a new or sp
327. iteria you specify see the example below 2 Create the dial plan entry by following all the steps in the To create a call queuing dial plan entry on page 60 3 Create an identity for overflow calls by following all the steps in the Configuring overflow calls to queues on page 63 If you want to route calls to an appropriate queue during business hours and to voicemail after hours you can insert the Flow Control element in a service to intelligently route the calls Refer to the following procedure as an example To route calls to a queue using the Flow Control element 1 Create a service by following all the steps in To create a service on page 254 Double click the new service to start the Service Editor Drag a Flow Control element to the canvas 2 3 4 Using the Compare drop down menu select Times 5 Enable the check boxes for the days in which you want calls to the attendant routed to the queue 6 In the From and To fields enter the times each day when you want calls to the attendant routed to the queue 7 Drag a Transfer Call element to the Compare Times connector pin 64 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Routing and Restricting Calls 10 On the Transfer Call element enter the queue number to which you want calls routed during the times that you specified Drag a Voice Mail element to the Otherwise connector pin In the Mailbox drop down menu select the voicemail b
328. ived fax The Receive Fax service has additional requirements beyond regular service requirements If you are using the same identity to receive both voice and fax messages then you may want to use the Receive Fax element to create a specific Receive Fax service for example to send a notification to a pager a phone number or an email address to notify you that you ve received a fax The following is a list of requirements for a Receive Fax service e The Receive Fax service must be called Receive Fax e The Receive Fax service must contain a Receive Fax element e The Receive Fax element must appear as soon as possible within the service typically the first element of the service e You do not need to activate the Receive Fax service When a fax call comes in your active service will be initiated When the NetVanta UC Server hears the fax tone it automatically stops the regular active service and activates the Receive Fax service The Receive Fax service must be saved in one of the following two locations e The shared folder so that it is available to all users in the system that is Services Shared Receive Fax e The user s root folder so that it is only available for that user that is Services Receive Fax In order to receive a notification of a received fax you can follow the Receive Fax element in a Receive Fax service with any or all of the following elements e Send Email element e Deliver Messages element t
329. ize delay between when a user logs in to their telephone user interface TUI to check their mailbox and when the NetVanta UC Server can play mailbox and message information such as the number of new messages ensure that you select the fastest search method available that your IMAP server supports e Ifyou are using Gmail GroupWise or Lotus Notes then ensure that you have selected the recommended 358 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Troubleshooting method for message retrieval Refer to Configuring IMAP Server on page 177 for more information e If you are not using Gmail GroupWise or Lotus Notes with IMAP then ensure that you selected the fastest search method available that was successful as outlined in Determining the Appropriate Query Optimization Technique on page 179 Selecting a method that is unsupported for your configuration will decrease server Lu performance and increase message retrieval delay as the selected method is attempted and fails before the NetVanta UC Server defaults to the No query optimization method e Ifyou are using the No query optimization method then encourage users to avoid storing large numbers of messages in their inbox as this will delay the message retrieval process e Reduce the number of messages in the user s inbox e Ensure that the email server is operating correctly and that it is not overloaded or that it was not overloaded at the time of the
330. k the folder and then select Rename Enter the new name again and then select the icon next to the folder name to make the change To rename a folder 1 Right click the folder that you want to rename 2 Select Rename 3 Enter the new name for the folder 4 Select the icon next to the folder name to make the change To copy a folder 1 Inthe summary pane right click the folder that you want to copy 2 Select Duplicate The copy of the folder appears in the summary pane with the words Copy of before its name 3 Rename the copy of the folder 4 Select the icon next to the folder name to make the change To delete a folder 1 Right click the folder that you want to delete 2 Select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion To store a service in a folder e Drag the service to the folder where you want to store it Using the Service Editor To access the Service Editor From the Administrator application 1 Select the Services navigation bar to open the Services menu Services are displayed in the summary pane 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 257 Creating Custom Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide 2 To open the Service Editor right click anywhere in the summary pane In the shortcut menu select New gt Service The newly created service is listed in the summary pane Double click the service and the Service Editor opens ore Alternatively you can open the Se
331. kup you can seamlessly transfer calls from one device to another such as from a cell phone to your desk phone This feature is most commonly used with mobile twinning where calls to one phone number can ring simultaneously at multiple devices such as an internal extension number and a cell phone number For more information on connected call pickup refer to Changing Phones During a Call on page 203 For more information on mobile twinning refer to Configuring Mobile Twinning Using a Ring Group Identity on page 137 Connected call pickup is enabled by default so if your company policy restricts this behavior then follow the instructions below to disable connected call pickup using a dial plan entry This disables connected call pickup for all users unless you enable the feature for specific users For more information on dial plans refer to Routing calls using the dial plan on page 49 You can disable connected call pickup for most users while enabling it for some users To do so follow the instructions below to disable connected call pickup Then follow the instructions to enable connected call pickup for specific users using individual dial plan entries Specified users can then pickup calls from specific phone numbers such as their cell phones using particular phones such as their internal extension number To disable connected call pickup 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane under Communication Systems select the communication
332. lIN Server Data System Definity Definition cfg in use has been umber s edited manually and the allowedNondigitCharactersInExternalNumber tag has one or more invalid characters Illegal characters found in literals in s The Definity PBX configuration file NetVanta UC Server Data System Definity Definition cfg in use has been edited manually and an error was encountered in parsing a display format entry Incompatible match pattern s or An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC overrides in key s Server Data System has been edited manually and an In Band Signalling key s match pattern is invalid Input file xxx does not exist Verify the NetVanta UC Servers service accounts file permissions on the NetVanta UC Server folder Re run the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Wizard Invalid call progress tone spec s A PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and StandardTone x where x 1 9 is defined and formatted incorrectly Invalid disconnect spec s An analog PBX configuration file located in NetVanta UC Server Data System has been edited manually and there is an error with the value for the tag disconnectType It must match one of the following values positive disconnectTone disconnectDTMFSequence disconnectSilence 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 377 Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs Log Entry
333. layed for the previous six rows 8 The previous prompt is replayed 9 If there are more rows the prompt is played for the next six rows or less 352 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Importing and Exporting 19 Importing and Exporting This chapter explains how to use the Import Export Wizard and covers the following topics e Overview on page 353 Starting the Import Export Wizard on page 353 e Importing and Exporting Items on page 353 Overview The Import Export Wizard allows you to share announcements services faxes and fax cover pages by importing items from another location or exporting them from your computer to another location so that other people can import them and use them Starting the Import Export Wizard To start the Import Export wizard 1 Select File gt Import Export Wizard to open the wizard welcome menu 2 Select Next Importing and Exporting Items The Import Export Wizard guides you through the process of importing or exporting an item To import an item 1 Using the Task Selection drop down menu select Import data from the File System and then select Next 2 Inthe Import Directory field make sure that the destination folders are correct You can use the Browse button to change the default destination folder rg The default destination is C Documents and Settings username My Documents Export 3 Select Next 4 Select all the items t
334. lbox selection The Messaging tab is not visible for Microsoft Active Directory users where Use mailbox defined by Active Directory is enabled For more information refer to Understanding Active Directory on page 84 When selecting a message storage server consider the following e Selecting Exchange means that the user s messages are stored on Microsoft Exchange Server e IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol is a method of accessing and storing email messages This is the preferred configuration for Lotus Notes and Lotus Domino servers e Selecting Local Message Store means that the user s messages are stored locally on the NetVanta UC Server When you configure a user s messages to be stored on Exchange Server there are some additional options available related to message delivery and to mailbox monitoring which affects message waiting indicators The message delivery mode determines whether voice and fax messages are sent from the system mailbox or are stored directly in the user s mailbox This setting affects whether e User defined message rules in Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Exchange Server are applied e Messages are sent to third party applications such as BlackBerry Enterprise Server e The caller s phone number appears in the From line of the message The settings below determine message delivery for the individual user selected however message delivery can also be configured system wide Use syst
335. lect Start gt ore Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Active Directory Users and Computers 2 Once Active Directory Users and Computers Console is open navigate to the Users folder From here there are two ways to configure users for the NetVanta UC Server e Server User Tasks Wizard e NetVanta UC Server MMC snap in The Server User Tasks Wizard allows you to enable or disable users in the NetVanta UC Server and to change user attributes Follow the steps in the Server User Tasks Wizard to perform any or all of the following tasks e Enable a NetVanta UC Server user including e Identity and fax address PIN e Authorization role e Location of the user s mailbox and contact information e Phone selection e Call answering mode and operator properties e Modify NetVanta UC Server user specific attributes e Change PIN for TUI access e Disable a NetVanta UC Server user To start the Server User Tasks Wizard 1 From the list of users right click the user that you want to modify 2 Select All Tasks gt UC Server Tasks Similar to the Server User Tasks Wizard the MMC snap in allows you to enable or disable users in the NetVanta UC Server and to change user attributes Unlike the Server User Tasks Wizard the snap in provides the ability to configure additional user properties on an attribute by attribute basis For example the snap in allows you to configure additional identities for a user and allo
336. lect one of the following Database Values Your NetVanta UC Server version must be licensed for database integration in order to use this mode Gather Digits Values Use the Gather Digits element in the service so that the caller can select a paging group from a list provided Parameters View gt Parameters must be enabled Paging Groups Select from one of the paging groups available The paging group must be pre defined using the Paging Group Wizard For more information refer to Creating and Configuring Paging Groups on page 73 If the value selected matches a paging group then the caller is transferred to the paging system as if they had dialed the access code for the specific paging group If the value selected does not match a paging group then the element exits through the Otherwise connector pin Page Recorded Element If you are using SIP paging then you can use the Page Recorded 5 Page Recorded 1 me l d ded h identiti h a element in a service to send prerecorded pages to phones identities suc as extensions and Multicast paging groups Paging group The Page Recorded element queues a prerecorded page for a selected paging group The request is associated with an audio file to be played when the paging request is initiated The Page Recorded element is typically used with temporary recordings This allows a caller to verify broadcast paging announcements before they are playe
337. lement on page 350 or Prompt for Current Row element on page 351 elements For information about specifying data sources filter fields and values refer to Using the Data Source Selector on page 339 Dial for Data element The Dial for Data element allows you to specify a data source using the Data Source Selector It is similar to the Fetch Data element except the caller uses the telephone keypad to define the data that is fetched It is also similar to the Dial By Name element which is available only to the administrator except the search is done on a defined database The Dial for Data Source Selector allows you to specify the following e data source e optional filter condition for example a value e Select On field When a caller encounters the Dial for Data element the element selects the records from the source that match the filter condition it fetches all the records if no filter condition is specified Then the element prompts the caller to enter the value for the Select On field A search using the Dial for Data element ignores blanks and special characters The default search criteria include only alphabetic characters If you 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 345 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide specify Allow numbers numeric characters are also included in the search g Dial for Data 1 L 2 Source IT Allow numbers One row fetched Many rows fetched No
338. lement that deals with a database e The Assisted Transfer Transfer Call Deliver Messages Notify Pager and Send Fax elements can accept a parameter as a number to call e The Send email element can accept parameters for email addresses e The Text To Speech element can read parameters to the person called e The Compare Data element can compare a parameter against several values and route the service based on the outcome e The Create Log Entry element can write parameters into the log files Note that parameters can be used to obtain a specific record from a database To use parameters in defining a service for an Outbound Dialer request 1 From the Services navigation bar right click in the summary pane select New and Service 2 Select the service right click and select Open to open the Service Editor 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 245 Using Advanced Features ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Inthe Service Editor select View gt Parameters to enable the Parameters Once Parameters are enabled then parameter names are available for selection When an Outbound Dialer call connects and the service selected runs it initializes the values of the parameters based on the parameter values in the call request This uses the optional pm parameter which refers to any additional parameters Specific values for the parameters can be provided and system values are filled in as usual The values of Called ID and Called ID
339. leted messages are deleted If the local message store user also has messages stored on the NetVanta UC Server the UT Wor The user s email account is not affected when you delete the NetVanta UC Server user profile 122 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles Enabling Access to User Profiles using Authentications NetVanta UC Server allows you to manage multiple users using a single client application An authentication is a set of credentials that either allow or deny access to system resources You can allow specific users to have access to the profiles of other users For example department managers might want to have access to all the employee accounts so that they can change everyone s service at once There are two types of authentication e Windows user authentication whose credentials are based on the single sign on Active Directory account into which the user is logged e Local user authentication which is created and managed by the NetVanta UC Server When the authentication type is local users must enter a user name and password each time they log on Authentications are either dependent on an Active Directory user or are managed by the NetVanta UC Server If authentications depend on Active Directory single sign on can be used for managing the associated profiles and for automatically viewing voice and fax messages for Exchange or Lotus Not
340. lick Empty in the Type column From the drop down menu select the type of button you want to create BLF Empty Identity Park Zone or Speed Dial Double click the empty Value field next to the button type you selected in the previous step e Ifyou selected an Identity button type select the identity you would like to associate with the phone from the drop down menu ih When you assign an identity to a phone the phone immediately reboots e Ifyou selected a BLF button type select the extension you would like to monitor with BLF e If you selected a Speed Dial button type enter the extension you would like to add as a speed dial button e Ifyou selected a Park Zone button type enter the Park Zone number The Park Zone value is a non negative identification number for example 1 2 3 4 etc representing a shared park zone The value is not associated with an extension Park Zone values can be reused on Park Zone buttons on other phones however all Park Zone buttons that have the same value represent the same park zone and share the same behavior Double click the empty Description field and enter the description you would like to appear for the button label on the phone Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Installing and Configuring SIP Phones 8 Repeat Steps 4 through 6 for all the buttons you want to assign to the new phone 9 Select OK You can also
341. ll on an ADTRAN IP phone using a Park Zone button you must first ome place the call on hold then select the desired Park Zone button The label for the park button can differ depending on the description chosen by the system Lu administrator However park buttons are labeled Park lt zone gt where lt zone gt is the number of the Park Zone by default You can now inform the user for whom the call is parked To answer a parked call using a park button Once informed that a call is parked for you press the park button associated with the Park Zone on which the call is parked The button indicator will change from busy to idle Working with Call Queues Lu For information on routing calls to queues refer to Routing Calls to Queues on page 59 Call queuing allows incoming calls to be distributed to an individual within a specified group of agents This feature is useful for companies that handle large numbers of incoming phone calls where the caller is not trying to reach a specific individual but wants to speak to a member of an agent group such as a salesperson as quickly as possible Call queuing allows callers to remain in a queue while they wait for 200 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using SIP Telephones their call to be answered by the appropriate agent Lu The total number of simultaneous calls that can be queued in the system is 64 The agent is typically
342. ll was answered and by which port and whether a message was left or not Errors and Warnings Alert Notifications If an error or warning occurs for example the NetVanta UC Server was unable to deliver a message then the NetVanta UC Server generates an error or warning log When an error or warning log is produced and there were no previous unacknowledged errors or warnings then NetVanta UC Server also produces an entry in the Windows event log to indicate what has happened Administrators will see an orange bar displayed at the bottom of the NetVanta UC Client window as an alert that some action may be required To learn more about the alert refer to Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs on page 373 Conversely when errors and warnings are acknowledged and there are no more unacknowledged errors or warnings then a different entry is created in the Windows event log and the orange bar in the NetVanta UC Client disappears 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 363 Troubleshooting ECS BAS Administrator Guide To view system errors and warning logs 1 On the left side of the NetVanta UC Client select the Logs navigation bar to open the Logs menu 2 Select System Errors and Warnings On the right side in the Logs summary pane the errors and warning logs appear To acknowledge the alert notification On the right side in the Logs summary pane right click on an error or warning log to accept or acknowledge the error or warning The
343. lled select Run 2 Inthe Open field enter services msc and select OK The Services window appears 3 Inthe Services window scroll to the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server service 4 Right click ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server and select Restart from the drop down menu to restart the service Enabling Users to Access Paging Access to paging can be disabled by default for all users To enable selected users to send pages you must modify the toll restrictions For more information refer to Allowing and restricting access to paging on page 56 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 81 Configuring Paging 82 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc ECS BAS Administrator Guide 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Integrating with Active Directory 5 Integrating with Active Directory Overview All users on the system are characterized by user profiles identities and authentications Provided a user authentication has access to a system profile a user might manage user profiles identities authentications For management purposes authentications can give a user access to the profiles of other users to configure personal profile settings such as announcements and notification services Active Directory NetVanta UC Server User Authentication User Authentication Users may be authenticated with the NetVanta UC Server or by Microsoft Active Directory
344. ller listens to the message in its entirety Play Announcement element The Play Announcement element plays prerecorded audio to callers including audio files stored in a database announcements greetings or temporary recordings You can select one of the prerecorded announcements included with the NetVanta UC Server or one that you A Called Extension recorded Alternatively you can record one as you build the call flow Greeting type z Play status message Stop when key pressed Play entire message For the Play Announcement element to function there must be a sound card installed on the server computer 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 269 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide The greeting type is only enabled if Greetings was selected for the Play mode Database Values Supports playing audio stored in a Data Source The audio must first be fetched using a Fetch Data element on page 344 or a Dial for Data element on page 345 Database values come from a Data Source element and are not directly affected by user context Note Your system must be licensed for database integration in order to use this mode In the Service Editor if you have the Database tab of elements available then your system is licensed for database integration Announcements Announcements come from the list that belongs to the user profile in the use
345. llows you to make an announcement and then direct the call flow based on the DTMF input received when a caller presses a number on the telephone keypad This element can play an announcement database value greeting or temporary recording before it takes the specified menu action It retrieves announcements from the set of announcements that belong to the user profile in the user context Database values come from a Data Source element and are not affected directly by user context The service retrieves greetings from an explicit user if such a user is specified Temporary recordings are created using the Record Announcement element to record the audio for a specific temporary recording after a service has started which is discarded after the service ends For more information on temporary recordings refer to Allowing Callers to Make Temporary Recordings Within a Service on page 267 When Allow dial by Extension is enabled the caller can dial a user by entering the user s extension When Allow dial by Name is enabled the caller can dial a user by entering the first few characters of a NetVanta UC Server user s last name For more information on the operation of dial by name refer to Dial by Name Element on page 275 Callers are allowed to try three times to select from the menu If they make another attempt they follow the Too many attempts connector pin When callers press a selection key they move through the connec
346. located in NetVanta UC S Server Data System has been edited manually and a specified call reason code for an In Band Signalling key doesn t exist in the valid call reasons defined in the same file 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 375 Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs Log Entry Cannot write to file xxx Configuration file could not be copied S Configuration file does not exist s Display format definition error no matching found s Display format error illegal character C is found s Duplicate override spec s in key s Duplicate pattern type c in match pattern s in key s Error s compiling regular expression s in key s Error s compiling regular expression s from display rule s Error in reason code translation at most two characters are allowed in each field s Error in repeat count after _ in s Error in repeat count after c in s Exception s caught Wrong format in override rule file on line s Exception caught Wrong format in override rule file on line s 376 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc ECS BAS Administrator Guide Possible Causes and Solutions Verify the NetVanta UC Server s service accounts file permissions on the NetVanta UC Server folder Re run the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Wizard Occurs when the PBX specific configuration file doesn t exist and the template configuration file cannot be copied
347. low access uses regular expressions e Allow specifies if a call is blocked or allowed A 0 blocks calls a 1 allows calls e Priority allows you to assign priority to the rule that you want The default value for priority is 1 The lower the number the higher the priority e Description allows you to describe the toll restriction Toll Restrictions BER Calling Number __ Called Number Allow Priority Description audiocodes 10 To Pstn mediatrix 10 multivoip 10 To multivoip vega 10 To Pstn pstngateway1 pstngateway1 20 deny all calls From PSTN to PSTN public pstngateway1 20 deny calls From public internet to PSTN gateway Use the Toll Restrictions table to define rules for individual phones or groups of phones The table also uses regular expressions to specify calling and called numbers Configuring the priority determines the position of a rule within the table By changing the priority you can specify exceptions to the general rules Wor For information on setting dialing options refer to Setting Outbound Calls and Dialing Options on page 38 Allowing local and toll free calls You can give users access to local and toll free numbers First line allows any registered SIP phone to make local or toll free calls on the PSTN gateway Dialed numbers similar to the following are allowed by this rule e 9 123 4567 e 123 2345 e 1 800 234 4567 e 1 866 543 5678 54 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D
348. mail a Identitites z A Pane Direct Voicemail Transfer NV7100 External Check VE e Fyternal Cherk Vairemail gt Be For Help press F1 Connected as Admin Versions of prerecorded announcements in each system voice are supplied with the application They are displayed in the English U S Male English U S Female and French CA Female folders in the Announcements navigation pane These voice folders are displayed one at a time in the Announcements navigation pane To access the available voice folders refer to Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 Exporting on page 353 Lu For information about sharing prerecorded announcements refer to Importing and Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane To change the voice folder displayed in the Announcements navigation pane follow these steps The Change Voices drop down menu is available only to administrators while in the Lu administration tab The voice of the announcements available to PBA users is limited to the voice selected in the General tab of the Options menu 314 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Announcements in Call Answering Services 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Right click the topmost folder for example English U S Male and select
349. mail Per Jane Doe 6010 General Voicemail Pers 3ohn Doe 6000 General Voicemail shaun wells 2004 Summary Topics Pane Navigation Pane Services Det ail Announcements Pane Navigation Distribution Lists Bars Fares Logs The Admin user profile does not have any associated identities Identitites Pane For Help press F1 Connected as Admin Data sources are set up like tables Each table row corresponds to a data row or record Each table column corresponds to a field for example a name address or fax There are two types of data sources e User Data Sources the data is managed by the NetVanta UC Server and users have their own copy of the data e External Data Sources the data is managed by another server or process for example a relational database management system and is shared by NetVanta UC Server users and others External data is accessed using Microsoft s ODBC Open Database Connectivity so these sources are typically called ODBC database sources Installing a database directly on the NetVanta UC Server is strongly discouraged Doing so might cause performance problems Using the Administrator menu you can manage the following aspects of data sources e Defining ODBC data sources e Defining user data sources e Managing data in user data tables When you define ODBC data sources the definition includes table and fiel
350. mary pane right click the user name that you want to modify and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user 2 3 4 Ensure that Enable UC Server for this user is checked 5 Select the Messaging store button to open the Messaging tab 6 Select an email storage type from the Email Storage drop down menu 90 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Integrating with Active Directory 7 Check Enable integrated messaging client if you want the user to have access to integrated messaging 8 Select a server from the drop down menu 9 Select OK An identity is associated with a specific extension or SIP identity for a hard or soft phone A user profile can have zero or more identities for example a user might have several telephones However identities can only be associated to one user profile You can start the New Identities Wizard to create an identity for a user using the Users summary pane in Active Directory When you create an identity SIP devices require both a SIP authorization and password to successfully register with NetVanta UC Server SIP registration The SIP authorization and password are associated with a user identity Some phones for example Polycom and ADTRAN branded Polycom phones support automatic configuration For more information refer to To obtain the SIP authentication and password for an identity on page
351. mber s field select the value selector gt 2 Select a database value from Database Values or contacts from Contacts You can also enter phone numbers manually by selecting the telephone button to ore open the Enter Phone Number menu box Enter the phone number that you want in the Telephone number field and select OK Alternatively you can enter a phone number by right selecting in the Call numbers field and selecting New To select a service to run Use the value selector gt to select a database value or an existing service To set a delay before the outdial request is processed 1 Select one of the following e minutes e hours e days 2 Enter a number in the Delay field To specify parameter values to be used in the outdial request 1 Inthe Parameters section select the Value field Select the value selector gt that appears 2 Select one of the following e Database Value e Value obtained from a Gather Digits element e System Value 3 Continue the steps above to enter up to 10 parameter values 306 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Execute Program Element The Execute Program element provides the ability to launch an external 2 program from within a service Program to execute z The Execute Program element is only available to administrator profile users when creating and editing service
352. ments to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Standard Elements Select the Standard tab on the tool palette to view the standard elements The following table gives a brief description of each available element Hang up Element on page 268 Terminates the call Play One time Message Element on page 269 Allows you to leave a personalized message for a specific caller Play Announcement element on page 269 Plays a prerecorded announcement greeting temporary recording or audio database file to callers Menu Element on page 272 Allows callers to make a selection using the telephone keypad Flow Control Element on page 273 Controls the call flow according to phone number or time and day restrictions Dial by Extension Element on page 274 Allows callers to select an extension and be transferred to it Dial by Name Element on page 275 Enables callers to dial and be transferred to a user s extension by entering the user s name Voicemail element on page 276 Provides basic voicemail service Deliver Messages element on page 277 Delivers voice or fax messages from a selected mailbox to a specified number Transfer Call element on page 278 Transfers the call to another number or extension Assisted Transfer element on page 279 Allows call transfer recipients to accept or deny calls based on the caller s recorded name Notify Pager element on
353. message filtering fall back messages on page 182 4 Depending on the outcome of steps 2 and 3 above follow the relevant procedures below e If delay was not detected in step 2 and no message filtering fall back messages were found in step 3 then no further configuration is required e If delay was detected in step 2 or the software logs included message filtering fall back messages in step 3 then the steps above are repeated starting at step 1 and selecting the second fastest method of filtering messages e Ifthe second fastest method of filtering messages was selected in step 1 and delay was detected in step 2 or the software logs included message filtering fall back messages in step 3 then repeat step 1 only and select the No query optimization method To configure IMAP for searching and retrieving messages 1 From the Administration navigation bar select Servers 2 Right click on the IMAP Server and select Open 3 Select a Query optimization technique from one of the options listed below starting with the fastest to the slowest method in the order presented below Trial order jQuery optimization technique Description iH Search custom message headers This is the default value The NetVanta UC Server adds custom headers to voice and fax requires SEARCH HEADER fastest messages so that they can be identified and retrieved 180 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring
354. mine a more complex behavior For example such complex behavior could send some callers to a voicemail box but escalate others to another agent queue or send email notifications to agent mailing lists You can associate the attendant service with the administrator profile or any other user profile The service for overflow behavior can be as simple as a single Voice mail element To create an attendant identity for overflow calls 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select Identities 2 Right click anywhere in the Administrator Identities summary pane 3 Select New Identity to display the New Identity Wizard welcome menu 4 On the Select Identity Type menu select the communication system from the Select a communications system drop down menu that corresponds to the communication system on which you created the dial plan entry In the Select the class of identity section select Attendant service Select Next In the Name field enter a name for the attendant identity OP tt IO OA In the Address field enter an address for the attendant identity for example 5000 This must correspond to the dial plan entry Digits field which is used to dial the queue with the prefix queue removed 9 Enable the Run Service button 10 From the Run Service drop down menu select the service you want to assign as overflow behavior for the queue 11 Select Finish 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 63 Routing and Restric
355. ministrator If no sort order was defined then the order of the rows is determined by the data source and you should not make any assumptions about the order If a sort order is defined the first row is the first row in the sort order specified However if the sort field contains duplicate values the order of rows with the same sort value is determined by the data source and you should not make any assumptions about the order For example assume that you have a data source with a Date field and that each row in the data source has a unique date value If the data source defines a sort order based on this Date field and descending order then any Dial for Data element that fetches from the data source will retrieve rows in descending date order If a Dial for Data element fetches multiple rows then the first row will be the row in the fetched set 346 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services of records with the newest value in the Date field Thus another element referencing this Dial for Data element would always reference the newest row Without the sort you cannot predict which row in the retrieved set would be first When a Dial for Data element fetches one or many rows the first row becomes the current row The order of the rows is determined by the sorting modes selected as described above Other elements can refer to fields fetched by the Dial for Data elem
356. mode applies the services options to an extension service When a call is parked 99 with this mode selected the call is labeled with the extension parking the call for example extension 800 parks a call and to pick up the user dials 98 800 16 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Introducing the Administrator Application Choose System park if you expect users to want to park more than one call at a time Choose Extension park if there is only one call parked at a single extension at any time Services Audio FN Play background music when a caller is on hold JV Play warning prompts when an error occurs during a call Sound Card Paging IV Allow overhead paging Call Park NV Enable park pickup call Functionality Type Failover URL Failover timeout 120 seconds Global Advanced Call Queue ACQ JV Auto logout agent after 1 missed calls Overflow timeout 300 seconds Wrap up time 5 seconds To configure call options 1 In the Administration navigation pane double click Communication Systems to open the communication system options Double click the communication system for which you want to configure services options Select Services Enable any of the following check boxes e Play background music when a caller is on hold e Play warning prompts when an error occurs during a call e Allow overhead paging e Enable park pickup call functionality If
357. mpt for Current Row in the service that indexes the Data Source value that you wish to use For example use a database element to verify the password before the Verify Password element in a call flow so that you can reference it in the Verify Password element s Data Source selector e The Select Extension element is available to administrators only However an administrator can create a service that uses the Select Extension element and then share the service so that it is available to PBA users e Ensure that the Data Source value used is a number data type since only Data Source values of this type can be selected Data Source values that contain non numeric characters will not provide a valid UT identity and will cause the element to follow the Otherwise connector pin 7 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 289 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide In order to use the the Select Extension element you must define the list of extensions ome which can be selected For more information refer to Configuring Non user Extensions and Identities on page 37 When a caller enters a valid extension number or the Data Source referenced returns a valid identity number the call follows the Valid extension connector pin to the next element in the call flow If a caller enters a single digit when On single digit is enabled the call moves to the element connected to the On single
358. multiple user accounts or phones by configuring a single CoS and applying it to multiple users or phones The NetVanta UC Server user CoS includes settings for local voice mailbox limits specifying rules for user passwords and personal identification numbers PINs authentication lockout and tracking of user accounts and enabling user access to certain UC server features The NetVanta UC Server Phone CoS includes settings for registering phones to a secondary NetVanta UC Server or SIP proxy server for Business Continuity failover support Configuring a User CoS The user CoS feature helps the system administrator configure settings for multiple user accounts by configuring a single CoS and applying it to multiple users The user CoS features can be applied to multiple users or each feature can be configured individually on a per user basis without using the CoS However a CoS and an individual configuration cannot be applied to a single user at the same time If a CoS is applied to the user individual settings cannot be applied to override specific aspects of the CoS If a different variation of settings is necessary the user either must be individually configured or a new CoS with the desired settings must be created and applied to that user When adding new users to the NetVanta UC Server system the default CoS is available to all users The default System Voice Mail CoS is available as the user s CoS default during a new installation of t
359. munity https supportforums adtran com For instructions on configuring permissions for the NetVanta UC Server service account refer to Configuring Microsoft Exchange 2007 and 2010 Permissions for Integration with NetVanta UC Server available from the ADTRAN Support Community https supportforums adtran com To add a Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 SP1 EWS Connection 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select the Servers topic 2 Right click in the Servers summary pane and select New gt Exchange 2010 SP1 to open the Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Configuration menu box Server the option is unavailable Wor You can add only one Exchange Server If you have already added an Exchange 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 175 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Enter a name for the server in the Name field This name is used as a label to distinguish between different message servers and appears in the list of server names Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 SP1 Configuration xi General information Name Exchange Server 2010 SP2 Exchange Server options If necesary override the autodiscover Exchange Server and SMTP address I Override Exchange Server URL https server ews exchange asmx DEFAULT URL Tl Override service account smtp address user domain com DEFAULT SMTP ADDRESS Sender information When sending e mail notifications
360. n Exchange Server If you change a mailbox name the corresponding Exchange Server account might also need to be configured 5 To select the mailbox from which you want email notification sent enable one of the following System mailbox The email notification appears to come from the configured NetVanta UC Server Exchange Server account User mailbox The email notification appears to come from the user s mailbox 176 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server configured to send email notification Wor The sender information for Exchange Server applies only if the Exchange Server is 6 Inthe Message delivery section select one of the following options Send messages from Voice and fax messages are sent from the system mailbox system mailbox Impersonate callerand Voice and fax messages are stored directly in the user s mailbox rather store to mailbox than being sent 7 Inthe Mailbox monitoring section check Enable mailbox monitoring if you want to enable mailbox monitoring for any or all users Enable mailbox monitoring Opens the Exchange Server mailboxes of selected users at system start up The NetVanta UC Server monitors each mailbox for changes in new message status and depending on the MWI settings adjusts the MWI accordingly Default setting for users If mailbox monitoring is enabled then this mode turns mailbox monitoring for users on or
361. n an element of a service the information is taken from the current call and from within your system and used for example to fetch a value for a Fetch Data element The table below describes and gives examples for available System Values System Value Description Example Format Today A NetVanta UC Server Date value representing today s date December 25 2006 Current Time A NetVanta UC Server Time of Day value representing the current time Format depends on location For US and Canada 12 02 PM User Name The user profile name of the profile that owns the called extension Paul Smith User Extension The extension number where the call was initially received 224 Selected User Name If a Select Extension element is executed this is the user profile name of the profile that owns the selected extension Otherwise it is User Name Mark Jones Selected Extension If a Selected Extension element is executed this is the selected extension Otherwise it is User Extension 225 Caller Name The same as Matched Contact Name if the matched contact name is not blank If it is the value of Caller Id Paul Smith Caller ld A NetVanta UC Server Text Value representing the caller Typically it is the form name number However if the name is blank it is in the form number It might also have special values such as lt Private Number gt lt Long
362. nd Dialer to send school absentee Notifications In this case you may want the custom application to access a database and generate a list of absent students and their parents contact numbers The custom application then must initiate the OutDial exe which logs into the NetVanta UC Server When the server runs the call request a call is attempted at each phone number listed until a successful connection is made or until the maximum number of attempts have been made When a call is made successfully then the specified service is run You can customize the service to meet your organization s needs but typically it might play an announcement to notify a parent or guardian that a student has been marked absent that day For example when a call is answered the caller might hear John Smith is absent from school today The service could request that the person press a number to indicate that they have received the message and this would update the database to indicate that a response was received Note that if a home number was called it could be the student who answers the phone If the person hangs up or if the call goes to voicemail then no response is given The custom application could scan the notification records to determine if any calls were not acknowledged and if so new call requests could be made up to a specified number of attempts You could create a service that asks the person to press a number to indicate a reason for th
363. nd Toolbar a Tool palette Canvas area and FaxCoverPage 1 fcp UC Client Fax Cover Page loj x Menu bar ie Edit View Insert Format Layout Help Toolbar 1 teo fie JE Jiozru w ns my R Tool palette fevers E gt fe cor f e ani Mu 7s 2 N Canvas area D eee mu wee BH ry Status bar Connected as System 770 574 NUM Status bar You design your cover page on the canvas using the tools from the tool palette together with the toolbar and menu commands The Menu bar contains the File Edit View Insert Format Layout and Help menus The Toolbar contains shortcuts to the most frequently used menu items Hold the pointer over a button to show the tooltips The Tool palette contains tools for drawing editing and organizing your cover pages The Canvas is the design area This is where you customize your cover page The Status bar shows the pointer s status For example if you hold the pointer over a toolbar button a description of the button s function is displayed on the status bar The coordinates at the bottom right of the status bar provide precise information about the pointer s position 220 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing Inserting and changing labels and message information You can include information related to your workplace and your fax message with your cover page This information can include your w
364. ne Unknown and the contact s identity presence will appear as Unknown Refer to Deleting servers on page 185 for instructions on how to delete a Trusted UC Server Configuring email notifications To configure the Send email function 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Message Delivery tab 3 From the Send email using drop down menu select the server that you want to use 4 Select OK 184 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server Changing server information To change server information 1 Inthe Servers summary pane right click the name of the server whose information you want to change 2 Select Open to open the Server Configuration menu box The type of information that is available for you to change varies depending on the type Lu of server You cannot change the information associated with the Client side Contact server 3 Change the information that you want 4 Select OK Deleting servers To delete a server 1 In the Servers summary pane right click the name of the server that you want to delete 2 Select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion Lu You cannot delete an Exchange Server if there are users assigned to it You cannot delete the LMS Local Message Store server Configuring Communication Systems You can use the Communication Systems menu to add a communication system change information for
365. nect to the phone company also known as the public switched telephone network PSTN and allow users to make calls to people outside your company Some examples of PSTN connections are FXO loop start PRI primary rate interface for ISDN connections or T1 In addition SIP trunking can connect to ITSPs through a SIP aware firewall or application layer gateway ALG which then connects to the phone company PSTN over the Internet SIP telephones and gateways work within an existing network including networks that have a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server for assigning IP addresses to SIP devices You can configure specific options on the DHCP server to allow network devices to retrieve information such as an File Transfer Protocol FTP server for downloading files You might require some other network services to support the automatic configuration of the devices For example FTP or Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP The NetVanta UC Server provides a SIP registrar and SIP B2BUA proxy functionality which allow endpoints to register securely to facilitate routing to other SIP devices or advanced communications services like unified communications personal assistants and voicemail access The NetVanta UC Server integrates with other applications within your corporate environment such as email in the case of Microsoft Exchange How your site is configured depends on your operational requirements including the number of us
366. ned on to the NetVanta UC Client as an administrator select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Operator Definition tab 3 Select a mailbox from the Default Mailbox drop down menu 4 Select OK To troubleshoot any problems with the Receive Fax element refer to Troubleshooting Services on page 263 Fax on demand element The Fax on demand element allows the NetVanta UC Server to send a fax to callers who move through this element You can select the fax i document to be made available and a cover page to accompany the fax Fax document to send E gt Some callers might cancel their request You can add an element to the service to handle such cases and route the call to the next element in the call flow For information about configuring fax specifications for the F Use account code Fax on demand element refer to Setting Fax Message Delivery Options on page 29 E lso use For local calls If caller cancels fax To select a fax document for a Fax on demand element On the Fax on demand element select the value selector gt to select a fax document or dynamic database value The name and button of the document or value appear in the Fax document to send drop down menu To preview a fax document that you selected select the button in the Fax document one to send section The preview fax button works only with a real fax not a database reference To select a fax cover page to accompany the f
367. nes that have buttons available appear in the drop down menu To show all phones in the drop down menu enable the Show all phones check box If ore you select a phone that does not have buttons available then the Replace Existing Identity menu appears when you Select Next From the drop down menu select an existing identity to replace with the current identity 27 28 29 30 31 32 Once you have finished configuring a phone for the user select Next The Call Answering menu will appear In the Call Answering menu select one of the following call answering modes e Personal Assistant provides standard voicemail features and is the default call answering mode e Personal Business Assistant provides more advanced features for the user who wants to create personalized services and announcements Select the operator for the new user e System the general operator typically a company receptionist where calls are directed to when a caller presses 0 in a voicemail greeting e Personal operator a specific operator for example a personal receptionist or an individual user in a particular department or location where calls are directed to when a caller presses 0 in a voicemail greeting If you selected Personal operator enter the operator s extension number in the adjacent field Select Next The Summary menu will appear Review the summary of the information for the new user the appropriate menu
368. nformation as required You can only change some of the information associated with a phone for example Lu IP address or description If you want to reconfigure the phone remove it from the network and re install it using To add a phone manually on page 144 4 Select OK 146 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Installing and Configuring SIP Phones To remove a phone from the network 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select the Phones topic 2 Inthe Phones summary pane right click the phone that you want to remove 3 Select Delete from the drop down menu 4 Select Yes to confirm the deletion Wor If the phone that you remove is still connected to the network if might appear in the unconfigured phones area Assigning Phone Identity Speed Dial BLF and Park Zone buttons After a phone has been added to the system identities speed dial numbers BLF and Park Zone buttons can be assigned to the phone using the Phone menu Identities assign a user identity and its associated extension to the phone BLF buttons allow users to monitor whether or not another extension is busy Park Zone buttons allow users to park calls in and retrieve calls from a shared park zone associated with the Park Zone button Each Park Zone button is assigned to a single park zone and park zones are shared among users in NetVanta UC Server For example if a user parks a call in Park Zone 1 using eit
369. ng e Use Active Directory for messaging configuration switches users to the Exchange Server message store e Delete existing Local authentications that own each user causes the authentication to be deleted if the local user is owned by a local authentication Select the local users that you want to migrate to Windows users All to select all users or select Deselect All to clear all check boxes Wor You can select each user by enabling the check box next to the user s name Select Select Review the information on the summary menu and select Submit if the information is correct UC Server Configuration Wizard prior to attempting to migrate users Wor You must have already performed network integration on the system using the NetVanta one Voice and fax messages do not migrate from one system to another To change Windows users to local users 1 Right click anywhere in the Users summary pane and select Migrate Users 2 Select Next to begin the wizard 3 100 Enable Windows users to Local users and authentications Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles 4 Enable any or all of the following check boxes and select Next e Migrate to Local Message Store migrated users are switched if necessary to using Local Message Store e Create default login password the login password is initialized to the first identity for the user
370. ng and Restricting Long Distance and Other Calls on page 53 The following sections outline the settings that can be configured for HFAA paging e Configuring the HFAA Maximum Wait Time on page 77 e Enabling and Disabling the HFAA Audio Prompt on page 78 e Changing the HFAA Audio Prompt WAV File on page 79 e Restarting the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server Service on page 81 Configuring the HFAA Maximum Wait Time The maximum wait time is the maximum amount of time the system will wait while attempting to reach the page recipient during an HFAA page If the system cannot reach the recipient before the specified wait time expires the system will return to the caller with an error message By default the system will wait 2000 milliseconds 2 seconds before returning to the caller with an error message The wait time is specified in the PagingServer exe config file by altering the value of the HandsfreeMaxWaitTime parameter To configure the Maximum Wait Time for an HFAA page 1 On the NetVanta UC Server computer use Windows Explorer to navigate to the directory below that is appropriate for your operating system For 32 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin For 64 bit systems navigate to the following directory C Program Files x86 ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Bin 2 Open the PagingServer exe config file using a text editor program such as Notepad Wor The config
371. nge Server message store for the user s Email Storage use the Mailbox drop down menu to select the the mailbox associated with the user If desired enable mailbox monitoring for the user Mailbox monitoring ensures that when a user accesses their voice mail messages through Microsoft Outlook Web Access or through a mobile device that their message waiting light on their phone updates accordingly Without mailbox monitoring enabled UC Server is unaware when a user accesses their voice mail messages through Outlook Web access or through a mobile device such that the message waiting light on their phone may continue to flash even after they ve accessed all their new messages Lu Mailbox monitoring works in conjunction with the message waiting light options set To enable mailbox monitoring for individual users you must also configure Exchange Li Server to enable mailbox monitoring For more information see Adding and Configuring Exchange Server Performance issues may arise when mailbox monitoring is enabled For more information refer to Configuring Microsoft Exchange Server on page 170 Use server default Use the server default setting selected when configuring Exchange Server This is the default value Enabled Enabling mailbox monitoring opens the Exchange Server mailbox and starts monitoring the mailbox at system start up This applies only to the Inbox and other folders are not monitored When the user accesses messag
372. ngle user 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user whose time zone you want to change and select Open The Edit User menu will open 2 Inthe Edit User menu use the Time zone drop down menu to select the desired time zone for the user 3 Select OK 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 111 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide To change the time zone for multiple users 1 Press Shift and select each user for which you want to change the time zone setting The selected users will become highlighted 2 Right click one of the highlighted users and select Change time zone The Change Time Zone menu appears 3 Inthe Change Time Zone menu select the time zone from the drop down menu Lu You cannot change the time zone setting for the system profile The system profile time zone setting is always the same as the time zone of the server To change the system announcement voice for a single user 1 In the Users summary pane right click the user whose voice you want to change and select Open The Edit User menu will open 2 In the Edit User menu use the Voice drop down menu to select the desired system announcement voice for the user 3 Select OK To change the system announcement voice for multiple users 1 Press Shift and select each user for which you want to change the voice setting The selected users will become highlighted 2 Right click one of the highlighted users and
373. night bell support Many small companies have an audible bell that rings after business hours Night bell support can also allow employees to contact security after hours This feature can allow employees who are not stationed at a particular desk to answer any telephone To use ringing call pick up your phone must be configured to receive incoming calls Lu Make sure that such features as call forwarding and do not disturb are not enabled on the phone 202 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using SIP Telephones To answer a call on another user s phone 1 When you hear a phone that you want to answer dial 78 lt Extension gt from your phone 2 Ifthe phone has stopped ringing by the time you dial the 78 code the system prompts you to enter your pickup ID Wor If the pickup ID that you enter is invalid the system prompts you with That is not a valid pickup ID and asks you to enter a valid pickup ID Changing Phones During a Call Using connected call pickup you can seamlessly transfer calls from one device to another This feature is most commonly used with mobile twinning where calls to one phone number can ring simultaneously at multiple devices such as an internal extension number and a cell phone number For example if you were away from your desk and you answered a call that was transferred or twinned to your cell phone then when you return to your desk using the connected call
374. nnector pin To select an extension automatically based on some value selected or on information provided 1 Inthe Select Extension element choose From 2 Select Database Values Gather Digits Values or System Values 3 Select a specific value from the list available If you select a database value then you must include a database element in the service If you select a gather digits value then you must include a Gather Digits element in the service The On single digit mode is not available if a Data Source value is selected 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 291 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Record Announcement Element rrr ra The Record Announcement element allows callers to record over an 7 risk existing announcement or mailbox greeting record a temporary recording or record into a database using a remote telephone Record to Q Specific f This element is useful for audio information services that must be gt updated on a daily basis or at regular intervals A user can update the Greeting type recorded information remotely when you include this element in a service Database Make sure to include a Select Extension element before the Record Announcement element in the call flow if you want callers to record to a different extension than the one they called The Record Announcement element sends a voicemail prompt tone to the caller
375. ns a non zero return code The call flow exits through the Otherwise connector pin if the program cannot be executed for any reason Wait for Silence Element PE wait for sience 1 MG ue ee o is o used in an outdialing service to W enable the call to wait for a period of silence Look for silence of 0 8 secs No silence in 20 secs Look for silence in X secs Determines whether a specified period of silence has been detected If a continuous period of silence is detected then the call exits through the silence connector pin The default is 0 8 seconds No silence in X secs If the specified time period elapses without continuous silence being detected then the element exits through the No silence connector pin If any other significant event occurs such as the call being dropped then the element exits through the No silence connector pin The default value to wait for silence is 20 seconds 308 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Detect Remote Party Element 4 2 IDetectRemote ES Party 1 ki Voice default J Answering machine voice energy period greater N Fax machine The Detect Remote Party element is used to detect whether a call is answered by a person an answering machine or a fax machine The element analyzes the incoming sound and determines by the percentage of sound versu
376. nt connected to the Call is accepted connector pin when the transfer recipient answers and accepts the call A call that is answered and then declined by the recipient moves to the element connected to the Call is denied connector pin If the call is not answered is answered but not accepted within 10 seconds or is transferred to an invalid number the call moves to the element connected to the Otherwise connector pin The default is to wait 20 seconds for an answer before recalling an assisted transfer attempt To specify a call number for the Assisted Transfer element 1 Inthe Call number s section select the telephone button to open the Enter Phone Number menu box Wor You can also enter a phone number by right clicking the Call number s field and selecting New 2 Enter the telephone number to which you want to transfer callers 3 From the Prompt drop down menu select one of the following prompt types Never Never prompts the caller to record a name Always Always prompts the caller to record a name Unknown caller Prompts the caller to record a name if there is no match in the contact list Use the value selector gt to select a dynamic value for the element For more Lu information refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 For information about contact address book synchronization refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 266 61951
377. nt from within the Fax Cover Page Editor To change field content related to a specific fax Lu transmission you need to do so from the fax queue Select the fax that you want to change and right click to get a shortcut menu Using the tool palette to customize fax cover pages The tools available on the tool palette of the Fax Cover Page Editor can be divided into two groups the Text and Drawing group and the Alignment group The tools in the Text and Drawing group allow you to draw shapes and insert text or bitmaps on the canvas The drawing tools can be selected only from the tool palette They allow you to select use shapes and 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 223 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide zoom in on the canvas as you work on your design Selector k Lock selector 8h CE Zoom in Ce Zoom out amp Zoom full page Text abl Line N Rectangle E Ellipse a Insert bitmap ft __ Gridlines When it is enabled the Lock selector tool allows you to use the pointer to select and insert a shape line or text on the canvas Once you have inserted the item of your choice the pointer resumes its standard function If you select and insert a shape line or text when the Selector tool is enabled the selector tool does not resume the standard pointer function once you have inserted a shape line or text The Selector tool continues to insert the drawing tool that you chose from the
378. nt line or other set of digits You can add rules to the dial plan table that change system behavior You can also add special dialing requirements such as prefix or suffix digits or system wide speed dial numbers The rules are evaluated based on their priority The dial plan entries include NetVanta UC Server feature access codes to enable various NetVanta UC Server features You can edit existing dial plan entries for example changing a feature access code number if there is a conflict or replacing the current feature access code with a number that users used in a previous system However changing a dial plan entry incorrectly can UT cause the feature to no longer function Ensure that you follow the instructions given and only change those fields that are necessary in order to maintain feature functionality 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 49 Routing and Restricting Calls ECS BAS Administrator Guide The Dial Plan table uses the following information from the Dial Plan Entry menu Routing Rule Original Digits Description Priority Destination Gateway Host Call next member after X seconds Digit Manipulation Digits to skip Prefix to add Suffix to add Options Transport Source Pattern 50 Digits consist of a unique regular expression Incoming digits that match the expression in the digits field are passed to the host after the specified digit translations Allows you to descri
379. nt to remove 2 Select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion Configuring Identities Using the Identities Pane The sections below outline the configuration options available using the identities pane in the lower left quadrant of the NetVanta UC Client interface This pane allows you to directly edit an identity s active service locate the service currently used by the identity in the Service navigation pane and change an identity s active service Editing an Active Service Using the Identities Pane To edit an active service using the Identities pane follow these steps 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 139 Managing User Extensions and Identities ECS BAS Administrator Guide 1 In the Identities pane select the active service icon Active Service icon 2 Select Edit Active Service The service that is active on the identity opens in the Service Editor For information about editing services using the Service Editor refer to Creating Custom Call Answering Services on page 241 Locating an Active Service Using the Identities Pane To locate an active service using the identities pane follow these steps 1 In the Identities pane select the active service icon 2 Select Locate Active Service The Services navigation pane opens with the active service highlighted in the Services summary pane Changing a Service Using the Identities Pane To change a service using the identities pane follow these
380. nter the names and fax numbers 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 229 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Select Add to List for each recipient that you specify Lu To delete a recipient from the Recipient list select the recipient and then select Remove 4 Select Next to open the Scheduling menu box 5 Specify when you want to send the fax Lu When phone rates are discounted means at midnight of the same day Select Next to open the Select Cover Page menu box Select Next to open the Cover Page Details menu box 6 7 Select a cover page to use as your Quick Fax document 8 9 Enter the subject of your Quick Fax and then enter a message in the Notes section 10 Select Next and the Finished menu appears 11 Select Finish The Quick Fax message is sent according to the instructions Receiving Faxes There are different methods of receiving incoming faxes e The default behavior for incoming faxes is that the NetVanta UC Server detects the standard CNG tone that signals a fax the Net Vanta UC Server receives the fax and then stores it in a general mailbox Using email an office administrator can then distribute received faxes to user mailboxes No configuration is required for this method to work however no notifications are sent to the user that they have a received a fax e A company can have a corporate fax attendant identity using a direct inward dial DID number which receives all inc
381. number of an existing port To change an extension number you must remove and then re create the port 4 If you want to disable the port disable the Enable use of port for check box 5 If you want to enable the port enable any of the following check boxes to edit the configuration of port management e Handset call e Pager notification e Message delivery e message waiting indicator changes e Port audit e Fax transmission 6 Ifyou want to change the device select a new device from the Device drop down menu Devices are channels on the menuic card 7 Select OK To delete a port so that the application no longer answers it 1 Right click the port that you want to delete 2 Select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion It is not advisable to delete or change the primary port on the Norstar communication system If you do so all identitiestrunks and extensions must be re configured so that incoming calls are directed to the new primary port This is a time consuming process during which calls might not be answered Configuring Servers In the Administration navigation pane you can use the Servers summary pane to add servers You can add five types of servers Microsoft Exchange Server Microsoft Exchange Server 2010 SP1 IMAP SMTP and Trusted UC Server Lotus Notes and Lotus Domino servers use the IMAP integration Adding a server lets you configure a variety of functions For example adding an Exch
382. o Microsoft Exchange Server it will detect Exchange Server s version If the version of Exchange Server selected in NetVanta UC Server does not match the version detected an error is logged If the detected version of Lu Exchange Server is later than the current configuration then the later version will be used for connectivity settings For more information on how to access error logs refer to_ Using Logs in the NetVanta UC Server available on ADTRAN s Support Forum at http supportforums adtran com article 2605 Configuring message delivery When you configure a Microsoft Exchange Server connection you can set the system wide message delivery mode to determine whether voice and fax messages are sent from the system mailbox or are stored directly in users mailboxes This setting affects whether e User defined message rules in Microsoft Outlook or Microsoft Exchange Server are applied e Messages are sent to third party applications such as BlackBerry Enterprise Server e The caller s phone number appears in the From line of the message The message delivery modes are as follows Send messages Voice and fax messages are sent from the system mailbox This mode has the from system mailbox following effects e Any user defined message rules set in Outlook or Exchange Server are applied For example a user s rule might direct messages from a particular contact to a specific folder e Messages are sent to any third party
383. o consider the number of circuits or trunks when setting this value to ensure that you have enough PSTN gateways trunks that can be used at any one time For the Pager Notification feature you can specify the number of attempts to deliver messages You can also specify the interval between successive delivery attempts For the Sending Email field you can select the email service that is used to send notifications by email You can set the Message Sensitivity mode for the message that you want to deliver This mode lets you mark a message as one of the following e Normal this is the default mode e Private for personal or business related messages that you do not want others to see e Personal for personal but not business related messages e Confidential for business related messages that you want to be treated according to the confidentiality policy of your company You can set this mode for both voice and fax messages 22 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options To specify the maximum number of concurrent calls 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Message Delivery tab 3 Select the maximum number of concurrent calls 4 Select OK To specify the number of seconds to wait after connecting before prompting a caller 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Mes
384. o enter a customer account number Drag a Gather Digits element from the Advanced tab to the connector pin of the Play Announcement element In the example the service gathers 6 digits because all account numbers must be 6 digits long 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 65 Routing and Restricting Calls ECS BAS Administrator Guide 6 Drag a Fetch Data element from the Database tab to the top connector pin of the Gather Digits element 7 On the Fetch Data element specify the Data Source Filter Field and Equals if required information 8 Drag a Compare Digits element to the One row fetched connector pin of the Fetch Data element 9 Inthe Compare section select the value to which you want to compare the gathered digits in this example the customer account number The service compares the customer account number that the caller entered to the customer account number that it fetched from the database In this example the agent groups that correspond to the different customer status types have been named as follows Bronze Silver or Gold Each group corresponds to a customer status type 10 Drag a Transfer Call element from the Standard tab to the connector pin of each of the status groups to which customer calls can be routed Ce i sre 4 HP mte of digts to gather amp step after ome O Gata we te 20 dgts Me dore coliactec Oterma Ea For information about using database elem
385. o menu select 10 Using the Insert new drop down menu select at the current position 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 323 Using Announcements in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide 11 Select Le and then record your message As you record the clock increments and the red record button turns grey Lu The maximum length of a recorded announcement is 15 minutes 12 Select the stop button when you are finished 13 Select gt to review the announcement 14 Select OK to keep the announcement 15 From the menu bar of the Audio Editor select File gt Update to save the update to the announcement To change the volume of a recording 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Ifthe appropriate voice folder is not displayed in the Announcements navigation pane select the desired voice folder using the steps in Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 3 Inthe Announcements summary pane double click the announcement that you want to change The Audio Editor displays the announcement as a waveform After The Tone wav UC Client Audio Editor File Edit View Command Process PlayBack Tool Help SO RAX BN KH 4 hue e e RAR tuet yg 2 El Connected as Sharon Doe Position 0 00 000 Selection 0 00 0000 00 007 Z 4 From the menu bar select Edit gt Select All 5 On the toolbar select one of the f
386. o send a phone message e Notify Pager element If you want to specify the days of the week or times of day when you want notifications sent or specify from which phone numbers you want to be notified of a received fax then use the Flow Control Element on page 273 The following example shows how you might use the Receive Fax element in a Receive Fax service to notify you during particular days or times that an incoming fax has been received from a specific fax number The example below illustrates that when a fax is received during business hours from a specific number then notifications are sent to the user s cell phone pager and personal email account Receive Fax 1 ui Flow Control 1 a Deliver Messages Notify Pager 1 r 4 During Work Hour 2 2 1 To my cell Save Fax to Mailbox Called Extension Save Fax to Database Compare Times be MV Mon M Tue V Wed I Thu IV Fri Sat J Sun Otherwise Compare Phone Numbers as 1 256 555 8022 Play new messages Manage mailbox Call number s amp 1 256 555 9333 Mailbox Called Extension Append to message Pager Pager number toidal ol to dial 1 256 555 1772 a IF wait 10 seconds then Send message Add Caller Id z Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D 285 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide To specify a general mailbox 1 While sig
387. o start the New User Wizard on page 102 On the User Type Selection menu select the Windows User radio button and select Next On the User Information Active Directory menu and select Browse The Select User menu will appear If neccessary use the Object Types button to select the User object type After selecting the object type it will appear in the Select this object type field re If prompted to do so enter the name and password of an account with permissions for the network domain If neccessary use the Locations button to select the location of the Active Directory user object After selecting the location it will appear in the From this location field the network domain Wor If prompted to do so enter the name and password of an account with permissions for 102 In the Enter the object name to select field enter the first name and last name of the Active Directory user object associated with the user you would like to add Select the Check Names button to verify that the user object entered in the Enter the object name to select field matches a user object in the selected From this location field If more than one object matching the user object name exists the Multiple Names Found menu will appear In the Multiple Names Found menu select the desired object from the Matching names list and select OK The Select User menu will reappear Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administr
388. o transmit a fax You can also specify the interval between successive attempts Fax transmission options allow you to specify what is included with a fax transmission report Fax transmission reports go to a user s Sent Items folder when a fax is sent successfully If the fax is unsuccessful an email stating the failure appears in the user s inbox Lu For more information on faxing refer to Faxing on page 205 To set the number of transmission attempts for outgoing faxes 1 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Fax Messages tab 3 Inthe Try drop down menu select the number of transmission attempts for outgoing faxes 4 Select OK 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 29 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide To set the delay between transmission attempts for outgoing faxes 1 2 3 4 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Fax Messages tab In the Delay drop down menu select the number of minutes between transmission attempts Select OK To set the number of simultaneous outgoing faxes 1 2 3 4 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Fax Messages tab From the Send up to drop down menu select the number of simultaneous faxes that you want to send Select OK To specify fax transmission options 1 Ds 3 In the men
389. of the queue 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 201 Using SIP Telephones ECS BAS Administrator Guide Temporarily setting your status to unavailable does not change your longest idle position in the agent group When you make yourself available again by logging back into the queue your idle time is based on the time since your last call including the time that you were unavailable To set your agent status to unavailable 1 Dial 83 2 Press a number from 1 to 9 to indicate your reason for being unavailable 3 Hang up To set your agent status to available 1 Dial 83 2 Press 0 at the prompt 3 Hang up You can check your agent status to verify whether you re currently logged into a call queue whether your status is set to temporarily unavailable or whether you re currently logged out of the call queue To check your agent status 1 Dial 84 lt QueueNumber gt Ensure that you enter the correct queue number The system will indicate your current status as e The agent is logged in e The agent is not available service code lt gt e The agent is not logged in 2 Hang up Picking up Ringing Calls Ringing call pick up allows you to answer other user s ringing telephones You can divert a ringing call from another telephone typically within earshot to your own telephone to answer To use ringing call pick up you must know the extension of the phone that is ringing This feature also allows for
390. ofile To delete a user profile 1 From the Users folder in Active Directory right click a user name 2 Select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion You have deleted the NetVanta UC Server user profile 96 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles 6 Managing User Profiles This chapter outlines the types of user profiles that you can create and add to the system using the New User Wizard and how to manage users in the NetVanta UC Server It includes information about Active Directory local users and Windows users so that you can decide the types of users that you want The chapter covers the following topics e Overview on page 97 e Creating User Profiles on page 99 e Changing Users to Local or Windows Users on page 99 e Using the New User Wizard on page 101 e Configuring User Profiles on page 110 e Enabling Access to User Profiles using Authentications on page 123 e Managing User Profiles from EBS on page 125 Active Directory Users and Computers Console on page 5 Wor For information on managing user profiles from Active Directory refer to Using the Overview Accounts for all users on your system might have been imported from the Microsoft Exchange Server when the NetVanta UC Server was configured at your work site If accounts were successfully imported using the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Wizard you do not have to set up user acc
391. ok Web Access or through a mobile device that their message waiting indicator on their phone updates accordingly Without mailbox monitoring enabled the NetVanta UC Server is unaware when a user accesses their voicemail messages through Outlook Web access or through a mobile device For example a user s message waiting indicator on their phone may continue to flash even after they ve accessed all their new messages Mailbox monitoring works in conjunction with the message waiting indicator options set For example the message waiting indicator options determine if the message Lu waiting indicator is turned off when the first message is read or when all new messages have been read For more information refer to Configuring Message Waiting Indicator Options on page 24 In order to enable mailbox monitoring for individual users you must also configure Exchange Server to enable mailbox monitoring For more information on configuring one Exchange Server to enable mailbox monitoring refer to Configuring Microsoft Exchange Server on page 170 Performance issues may arise when mailbox monitoring is enabled For more UT information refer to Configuring Microsoft Exchange Server on page 170 Use server default Use the server default setting selected when configuring Exchange Server This is the default value Enabled Enabling mailbox monitoring opens the Exchange Server mailbox and starts monitoring the mailbox at system
392. ollowing process commands e Increase Volume e Decrease Volume e Maximize Volume It is advisable to maximize the volume to make sure that your recording is audible to callers 324 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Announcements in Call Answering Services 6 If you select Increase Volume or Decrease Volume enter the percentage you want to increase or decrease the volume of the announcement and then select OK 7 Select gt to review the changes 8 From the menu bar select File gt Update to save the update to the announcement Managing Announcements You can keep track of your announcements more efficiently by organizing them in folders You can also duplicate announcements duplicate announcements in another voice and rename and delete announcements To create a folder for announcements 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Ifthe appropriate voice folder is not displayed in the Announcements navigation pane select the desired voice folder using the steps in Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 3 Right click anywhere in the Announcements summary pane and select New gt Folder A new folder is added to the list in the summary pane Gi Announcements Folder 4 Enter a name for the folder To put an announcement in a folder In the summary pane select the announcement that you
393. omain and any domains connected to it with which it has a two way trust relationship If any of the 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 371 Appendix A Installing and Uninstalling Software ECS BAS Administrator Guide domains are inaccessible for example one domain is a test domain and its domain controller is shut down it can take up to 20 seconds for MMC to determine this which slows initialization To overcome this problem you can specify the explicit list of domain names to search for NetVanta UC Servers These names are put one per line in the configuration file If there is no configuration file then all domains are searched The configuration file if it exists is in the same folder as the DLLs Uninstalling Server Software Uninstalling the server software does not automatically delete the NetVanta UC Server user account or remove the Exchange mailbox or Exchange permissions for the NetVanta UC Server To uninstall the server software 1 Select Windows Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 2 Select the Add Remove Programs icon 3 From the list of programs select UC Server 4 Read the instructions and then select Remove 5 Restart the computer All components of the software are removed Deleting the server user account Deleting the server user account does not remove the Exchange mailbox for or Exchange permissions To delete the server user account 1 Select Windows Start gt Programs gt Administr
394. oming faxes e A user can have a shared voice and fax number using the same identity A shared voice and fax number is not recommended for high numbers of incoming fax Lu calls If an incoming fax call is answered at the user s extension the user will have difficulties transferring the call into their service Incoming faxes are received and viewed through a user s mailbox for example through Microsoft Outlook Microsoft Exchange Lotus Notes or through an Integrated messaging client a Mailboxes navigation bar on the user s NetVanta UC Client or IMAP4 230 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing Receiving Trunk Line Faxes Trunk lines can receive fax transmissions in various ways Receiving faxes is automatic when the application detects the standard CNG tone that signals a fax receives the fax message and then stores it in a general mailbox Using emails an office administrator then distributes received faxes to user mailboxes You can set up this mailbox on the Options tab for Operator Definition For information about using the Options tab refer to Setting System Wide Options on page 21 When you specify user information you can assign a DID trunk to a user so that faxes arriving on that trunk go to that user s mailbox For information about assigning a DID trunk to a new user refer to Creating User Profiles on page 99 You can also create a fax attendant identity for an exist
395. ommunications Server for this user is checked Select the Authentications button to open the Authentications tab Select Add to add an authentication Select a user name from the Select Authentication drop down menu Select Select IGN p o GP Repeat steps 6 to 8 until you have added all the users that you want The users that you select appear in the Authentications field 10 Select OK To delete an authentication from a user 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name from which you want to remove an authentication and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable Unified Communications Server for this user is checked Select the Authentications button to open the Authentications tab Select the authentication that you want to delete Select the trash can al Select OK o mom oa e E Deleting user profiles from Active Directory When you delete a user profile all of that user s data is lost For example all greetings the user recorded 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 95 Integrating with Active Directory ECS BAS Administrator Guide all announcements and all services the user created are deleted If the local message store user also has messages stored on NetVanta UC Server the UT messages are deleted Sr The user s email account is not affected when you delete the NetVanta UC Server user pr
396. ompt replace the true value between the tags with false Do not add any spaces between the tags and audio prompt value For example lt setting name PlayHandsfreeAnnounceTone serializeAs String gt lt value gt false lt value gt To enable the HFAA audio prompt replace the false value between the tags with true Do not add any spaces between the tags and audio prompt value For example lt setting name PlayHandsfreeAnnounceTone serializeAs String gt lt value gt true lt value gt Save the PagingServer exe config file and close the text editor For changes to take affect you must restart the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server service using the procedure outlined in Restarting the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server SIP Paging Server Service on page 81 Changing the HFAA Audio Prompt WAV File When an HFAA page is initiated an audio prompt issued on the recipients phone to alert the recipient of the page This audio prompt can be changed by specifying a different WAV file for the HandsfreeAnnounceFile setting in the PagingServer exe config file The WAV file can be specified using an absolute path or only the file name If a file name only is specified the file must be placed in the ADTRAN NetVanta UC Server Data System Announcements directory To change the HFAA audio prompt WAV file using only a filename 1 On the NetVanta UC Server computer use Windows Explorer to navigate to the directory below that is appropriate
397. on For more information about the NetVanta UC Server refer to the ADTRAN Support Lu Community at https supportforums adtran com Here you will find training documentation and technical notes This chapter introduces the NetVanta Unified Communications UC Server Administrator application and presents some basic operations This chapter covers the following topics e Conventions on page 9 e Product Features on page 10 e About the NetVanta UC Server on page 11 e Starting the Administrator Application on page 14 e Changing the Password on page 14 e Navigating the NetVanta UC Server on page 15 e Customizing the NetVanta UC Server on page 16 e Installing the NetVanta UC Client on page 18 Conventions Bold font is used to indicate important input data and keywords Steps for procedures generally instruct readers to use shortcut menus although commands can also be made using menus and toolbar buttons To obtain a shortcut menu right click the icon or folder you want to access then select the command you want Computer audio card device w Telephone handset device a Record button amp 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 9 Introducing the Administrator Application ECS BAS Administrator Guide Stop button i Play button p Wor You can select the icon of the audio device when you play or record The application saves the setting and automatically uses the last device that you selected Product Feat
398. on cfg in use has been edited manually and an error was encountered in parsing a display format entry The file NetVanta UC Server Data System CalllnfoOverride cfg has been edited manually and one or more of the entries in this file are invalid Consult the inline documentation for details about valid syntax rules 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Appendix B Troubleshooting Logs Log Entry Possible Causes and Solutions Failed to parse pattern line s The Definity PBX configuration file NetVanta UC ignoring Server Data System Definity Definition cfg in use has been edited manually and a display pattern has an invalid value Failed to retrieve server address The NetVanta UC Server is unable to find the network address on the associated network adapter This commonly occurs if the files were copied from one NetVanta UC Server machine to another To correct navigate to the communications system network information and re select the adapter that you want to bind with the NetVanta UC Server Once selected select OK Failed to update s s database with the There was a problem communicating with the database received fax The fax will be saved defined in the Receive Fax element instead to the default mailbox Check your database connection parameters and ensure that the database is available Illegal characters found in The Definity PBX configuration file NetVanta UC allowedNondigitCharactersInExterna
399. on for more information About the NetVanta UC Server The NetVanta UC Server is a combination of many applications e Session Initiation Protocol SIP communication system including SIP registration and SIP proxy Back to back User Agent B2BUA e Core application service unified communications services functioning as an attached voicemail and unified messaging server that execute both system and user behaviors as well as integrate with the messenger server This includes support for Personal Assistant and Personal Business Assistant e Integration with traditional communication system e Unified messaging plug ins e Administration managed through standard Microsoft tools NetVanta UC Server integration Active Directory Exchange Server optional optional SIP Aware NetVanta UC Server 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 11 Introducing the Administrator Application ECS BAS Administrator Guide The NetVanta UC Server provides advanced business communications A System profile allows you to configure all aspects of the business communications environment The SIP telephony environment allows you to integrate any hardware that conforms to the SIP standard for example SIP telephones SIP gateways and SIP trunking to internet telephony service providers ITSPs SIP telephones hard phones and soft phones allow users to make and receive telephone calls SIP gateways con
400. on of a real estate listing service to illustrate how the Move current row element works For example e The first element is a Fetch Data element that fetches some real estate listings e The second element is the Text to Speech TTS element which speaks the property identifier from the current row and introduces the audio that follows e The third element is a Play Announcement element that plays the audio for the current row and contains the address and price for the current listing 350 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services e The fourth element is the Move current row element which moves the current row to the next row e If there is another row the service loops back to the TTS element which now uses the value from this row e Ifno more rows are available the Move current row element exits through the No more rows connector pin Text To Speech il Play pa Move Curert 2 Announcement Row 2 Text to say Play KN ie Da A Source element DS the address and price T Forch Data 1 Adcess gt Fetch Data 1 x For property W Fetch r Move current row to the Data 1 Property 1D Gis keton as follows stop when kay pressed Mant hed Play entire message Stop when key pressed Play entire message Prompt for Current Row element The Prompt for Current Row element prompts c
401. on page 351 to allow callers to select a result from a set through automated prompts e Ability to sort database data from elements in a service refer to Fetch Data element on page 344 e The service code and service expiry date are available from the About NetVanta UC menu box refer to Accessing Technical Support on page 369 e Support for ITSP Gateways refer to Configuring Communication Systems on page 185 e Improved gateway management refer to Configuring Communication Systems on page 185 e Dial plan improvements refer to Routing calls using the dial plan on page 49 e Importing users from text files supports importing phone information resulting in faster on site deployment refer to the NetVanta UC Server Configuration Guide Users section 10 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Introducing the Administrator Application e Ability to restart or reboot phones from the Administrator user interface UD refer to Restarting Phones and Reloading Phone Configurations on page 149 e SIP phone user guides available in the NetVanta UC Server help files on the installation media and on the ADTRAN website at http kb adtran com e Ability to change phones during a call using the connected call pickup feature refer to Changing Phones During a Call on page 203 e ucCompanion Console application provides phone call and availability status information at a glance Refer to the ucCompanion documentati
402. one of the following e Analog e TAPI Wave requires a license for the remote IP Office e Digital requires a physical digital phone plugged into the corresponding digital port but must not be used by anyone e Each remote IP Office site must have a short code defined that allows for forceful redirects over the IP trunk connecting the remote and main site IP Offices Requirements at the Main IP Office Site e Small Community Network enabled e The NetVanta UC Server must be configured for all of the remote agents and the extensions they are monitoring For more information on configuring IP Office remote agents refer to the ZP office Integration technical note available from the ADTRAN Support Community https supportforums adtran com The Advanced communication system options allow you to configure a CTI link The CTI link enables the NetVanta UC Server to obtain external calling line ID link Wor You must subscribe to Calling Line ID from your local telephone company to use a CTI 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 187 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide Consult the manufacturer s documentation about how to install and configure the CTI link for your particular communication system If you are connecting the NetVanta UC Server to an existing PBX through a gateway then there are a few options to configure You must enter an IP address or a Fully Qualified Domain Name FQDN and a por
403. ong to a phantom mailbox enable the corresponding Phantom check box RE Phantom extensions can also be created for extensions with no physical phones attached 17 If the user requires a fax number enter a fax number for the user in the Fax field This is the number that callers dial to send faxes to the user The user receives any faxes directed to them in their Inbox The Message Waiting Indicator MWI also flashes on their phone and a voice mail message notifies the user that a fax has been received 18 From the adjacent drop down menu select a server for the fax number and select Next The Authentication Active Directory menu will appear 19 In the Authentication Active Directory menu enter a numerical telephone access PIN in the PIN field Wor The PIN number is used to access a mailbox using the telephone user interface TUI either locally or remotely 20 Reenter the PIN in the Confirm field and select Next The Messaging menu will appear 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 103 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide 21 In the Messaging menu use the Email Storage drop down menu to select a message store for the user 22 If you selected Local Message Store for the user s Email Storage and you want the new user to have integrated messaging then select the Enable integrated messaging client check box Enabling Integrated Messaging adds a Mailboxes tab to a user s Net Vanta UC Cli
404. onnected status 2 Inthe drop down menu select Disable 3 The Status of the connection will appear in the Servers summary pane as Unauthenticated Click Invite menu item to start authentication The trusted connection is now disabled between the two NetVanta UC Servers To delete a Trusted UC Server connection Like disabling a trusted connection deleting a trusted connection between two NetVanta UC Servers disables the use of all ucCompanion features Presence IM click to dial etc between the two server systems However the behavior on the Servers summary pane and in ucCompanion differs depending on which NetVanta UC Server deletes the connection For example if the connection is deleted by the local NetVanta UC Server the Trusted UC Server entry will be removed from the Servers summary pane on the local NetVanta UC Server Additionally all ucCompanion user contacts associated with the users on the deleted remote NetVanta UC Server will be removed from the local NetVanta UC Server If the connection is deleted by the remote NetVanta UC Server the Trusted UC Server entry will remain in the Servers summary pane on the local NetVanta UC Server with a status of Unauthenticated Click Invite menu item to start authentication Additionally all ucCompanion user contacts associated with the users on the remote NetVanta UC Server will remain however the remote contact s user presence will appear in the local user s ucCompanion client as Offli
405. ons Server Wor Only phones that support dual registration can register with a secondary NetVanta UC The phone CoS features can be applied to multiple phones or each feature can be configured individually on a per phone basis without using the CoS However a CoS and an individual configuration cannot be applied to a single phone at the same time If a CoS is applied to the phone individual settings cannot be applied to override specific aspects of the CoS If a different variation of settings is necessary the phone either must be individually configured or a new CoS with the desired settings must be created and applied to that phone When adding a new phone to the NetVanta UC Server system the default CoS is available to all phones The default CoS of Standard Phones is available as the phone s CoS default during a new installation of the NetVanta UC Server or a system upgrade If another CoS has been configured it is also available during a new installation or system upgrade If another CoS is set as the default then it will be available as the default CoS to all new phones If the default CoS does not exist then the CoS of None is available for all phones Creating a Phone CoS To create a new phone CoS follow these steps 1 From the Administration tab select the Administration navigation bar to access the Administration navigation pane 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 159 Configuring Classes of Service ECS
406. or Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services Update Data element J bass Dotsi 2 Source Update Data element The Update Data element allows callers to update the data in a specified data source The Record Announcement element can be used to record temporary recordings which can be used with the Update Data element as a form filling application in order to request quotes have callers answer general customer service questions and so on For more information on temporary recordings refer to Allowing Callers to Make Temporary Recordings Within a Service on page 267 e Ifsome rows are updated successfully the caller exits the regular connector pin e If some rows are not updated the caller exits the No rows updated connector pin e Ifany other condition exists the caller exits the Otherwise connector pin To specify field assignments for the Update Data element 1 Use the data source selector arrow to specify the data source that you want Select the Add button on the Update Data element to add a Field Assignment to the list Select the Field column to obtain a drop down menu Select a field from the drop down menu Select the New Value column to specify a value for the field Enter a new value or select the value selector gt in the blank new value field Select anywhere outside the new value field CO AC EX Re e e Repeat steps 2 to 7 to add more fields to the Field Assignments list means that all r
407. or IMAP4 The NetVanta UC Server can always receive a fax provided adequate fax channels are available whenever a fax tone CNG tone is detected Other methods of receiving faxes include e A dedicated fax number fax identity That is a Personal Fax DID direct inward dial number e A shared voice and fax number using the same identity A shared voice and fax number is not recommended for high numbers of incoming fax Lu calls If an incoming fax call is answered at the user s extension the user will have difficulties transferring the call into their service 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 205 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide You can also use the receive fax element in a service to customize receive fax behavior Sending Faxes You can send a fax document from another application or using the Faxes menu of the NetVanta UC Client When a fax document is ready to send the fax is added to the fax queue Before you send a fax you can change the user that you want to send the fax from This is useful if a user manages several mailboxes or as part of a Fax on demand element For information on setting fax specifications for outgoing faxes refer to Setting Fax ome Message Delivery Options on page 29 For information on setting dialing options related to faxing refer to Setting Outbound Calls and Dialing Options on page 38 You can send a fax cover page only using Quick Fax For more information r
408. orange bar will no longer appear and the error or warning message is no longer visible at the bottom of the NetVanta UC Client window Microsoft Windows Small Business Server SBS 2008 records unacknowledged errors or warnings in the NetVanta UC Server This simplifies management such that Administrators do not need to have the NetVanta UC Client open in order to be aware of any error or warning messages When the NetVanta UC Server is installed on Windows SBS 2008 a custom alert is automatically configured for the SBS 2008 Console If the NetVanta UC Server is not installed on the SBS 2008 system but is installed on another system on the network then consult the Microsoft documentation for how to create a custom alert To create a custom alert definition when the NetVanta UC Server is not installed on the SBS 2008 system 1 Refer to www msdn microsoft com en us library cc721719 aspx for details on how to create a custom alert 2 Specify the following Path Application Provider NetVanta UC Server SetEventiD 256 ClearEventID 512 The Windows SBS Console display is refreshed every 30 minutes This means that the one console display will not change immediately when an error or warning occurs or when all errors or warnings are accepted or acknowledged To access the NetVanta UC Server alerts from Windows SBS 2008 1 From the Start menu access the Event Viewer 2 Open the Windows SBS Console and select the Network tab Und
409. ord over this file with the announcement in the appropriate language To duplicate an announcement in another voice follow theses steps 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Ifthe appropriate voice folder is not displayed in the Announcements navigation pane select the desired voice folder using the steps in Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 3 Inthe Announcements summary pane right click the announcement you would like to duplicate in another voice or select multiple announcements and right click one of the selected announcements 4 Select Duplicate in other Voice and use the submenu to select the voice in which you would like the selected announcement s to be duplicated 5 The announcements will be duplicated in the corresponding announcement folder in the selected language If the announcement already exists in the corresponding folder of the selected voice you will be presented with an error message and the duplication will fail In cases where multiple files are selected after selecting OK on the error message NetVanta UC Server will attempt to duplicate the remaining files To delete an announcement 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Ifthe appropriate voice folder is not displayed in the Announcements navigation pane select the desired voice folder using the steps in Ch
410. orkplace name and telephone number a subject line and short note related to the fax along with the transmission date for example A complete list of information options is provided within this section Note that you cannot insert labels with recipient information This is because recipients are callers who use the Fax on demand services that you set up Such callers are unknown to you Callers are prompted to enter their fax number when their call encounters the Fax on demand element The fax number is captured and automatically entered on the cover page The recipient s name may also be captured This is the only recipient information that appears The same is true for transmissions initiated by the Send Fax element the recipient s fax number and name will appear on the fax cover page When you create a cover page you select the type of information you want to include from the list of information options You do not enter specific sender or message content manually when designing your cover page because content will vary depending on each Fax on demand service that you set up Instead you insert labels for the information using the Fax Cover Page Editor A field is created on the canvas for each of the labels you insert To Label Recipient s Name field When a fax is transmitted the NetVanta UC Server captures the fax number and associated name then inserts the information as content in the field following the appropriate label on
411. ou can set restrictions for outgoing calls for example to prevent users from transferring calls to long distance numbers You can also set exceptions to the restrictions For example you might restrict long distance calls in general but allow long distance calls to a specific area code where another office or a customer is located In addition you can define when dialing restrictions are applied for PA PBA and Attendant services For example a restriction set to prevent long distance calls denies calls starting with 1 However this restriction also prevents calls to extensions starting with 1 If internal extensions were a maximum of four digits then enabling Enforce only for numbers longer than 4 digits prevents long distance calls while allowing calls to extensions starting with 1 Rules relate to the number that users must enter on their telephone keypad to access an outside line for local or long distance telephone calls To restrict outgoing calls 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Dialing tab 3 In the Exclude prefixes field enter the restrictions that you want to apply to outgoing calls Use a semi colon to separate each restriction 38 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options In the But allow field type any exceptions that are not restricted In the Enforce only for numbers longer than x digits enable th
412. ou can use the Service Editor to view a service and change it If you want only an overview of a service you can preview it in the Services menu To preview a service 1 Inthe summary pane select the service that you want to preview 2 Ifthe service is in the cache it appears immediately in the detail pane Otherwise select the Download button in the detail pane to get the preview To activate a service on an identity 1 Right click the service that you want to activate and select Activate Service 2 Inthe Activate on section enable the check box of the identity or identities to which you want to assign the service The Already activated on section allows you to see on which user identities the service is already active 3 Select OK Lu The service must already be created and validated before activating it Once you have activated a service on an extension you cannot deactivate that service To change the service activate another service on the extension To rename a service 1 Right click the service that you want to rename Select Rename Enter the new name for the service a 7 oe Select the icon next to the service name to make the change 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 255 Creating Custom Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide To copy a service 1 Right click the service that you want to copy 2 Select Duplicate The copy of the service appears in the summary
413. ou want to define 2 From the Table list select the table that you want to associate with the data source 3 From the Available Fields list select the fields that you want to include 4 Select the Select gt gt button to include the selected fields 5 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all the fields that you want are included Lu If you want to include all the available fields select the All gt gt button If you want to exclude fields that you have included select the fields and select the Lu lt lt Selected button or select the lt lt All button to exclude all the selected fields 6 Select OK To change ODBC field attributes 1 In the Data Sources content pane double click the ODBC source that you want From the Table list select the table that contains the fields that you want to change In the Included Fields list select the value for the field attribute that you want to change 2 3 4 Inthe new window type the change 5 Select outside the window to close it 6 Select OK to save the changes A Fetch Data or Dial for Data element can retrieve more than one row depending on the number of rows in the source and your filter conditions When one or more rows are fetched a reference to a field by another element is always a reference to the field s value in the current row in the set of rows fetched The Move Current Row and Prompt for Current Row elements can be used to change which row is current Immed
414. ould not make any assumptions about the order If a sort order is defined the first row is the first row in the sort order specified However if the sort field contains duplicate values the order of rows with the same sort value is determined by the data source and you should not make any assumptions about the order For example assume that you have a data source with a Date field and that each row in the data source has 344 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services a unique date value If the data source defines a sort order based on this Date field and descending order then any Fetch Data element that fetches from the data source will retrieve rows in descending date order If a Fetch Data element fetches multiple rows then the first row will be the row in the fetched set of records with the newest value in the Date field Thus another element referencing this Fetch Data element would always reference the newest row Without the sort you cannot predict which row in the retrieved set would be first When a Fetch Data element fetches one or many rows the first row becomes the current row The order of the rows is determined by the sorting modes selected as described above Other elements can refer to fields fetched by the Fetch Data element These elements reference the value in the current row A different current row can be selected using the Move Current Row e
415. ounts or profiles unless a user is new to the system If user profiles were not imported you need to set up a user profile for each user in your office Each NetVanta UC Server user needs a profile to access unified communications services A user profile is associated not only with the general information about a user such as first and last name but also with authentications and identities An authentication determines whether a user can access the system For example an authentication might correspond to a login name and password or a Windows log on An identity is the address of a user on some device for example an extension number It might be an extension on a communication system or a SIP address that can be used on a SIP hard phone or soft phone Each user profile consists of one mailbox and at least one identity or possibly several identities You can also have phantom mailboxes that are not associated with a physical identity such as an extension number NetVanta UC Server routes incoming calls for each user to the user s extension number so that messages can be received and then stored in the user s mailbox for later retrieval Each identity can have a separate set of behaviors but messages are saved in the message store that is associated with the user profile page 127 oe For more information on identities refer to Managing User Extensions and Identities on 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 97 Manag
416. oved to your desk phone using the connected call pickup feature 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 137 Managing User Extensions and Identities ECS BAS Administrator Guide e Mobile twinning increases your availability to customers while minimizing costs The connected call pickup feature allows users to seamlessly transfer a call from one device to another for example from a cell phone to a desk phone For more information refer to Changing phones during a call on page 188 The connected call pickup feature is very powerful in that it allows any user to pickup any connected telephone call that went through the NetVanta UC Server as long as they know the number of the phone that answered the call for example the extension number Lu or the cell phone number If your company policy restricts this behavior then follow the instructions to disable connected call pickup For more information refer to Restricting picking up connected calls on page 57 To configure mobile twinning using a ring group identity follow these steps 1 Create a ring group identity for the user using the steps above in Configuring a Fax Attendant Identity on page 134 Include any numbers in the ring group at which the user can be contacted for example both their internal extension number and their cell phone number For example if the extension number is 300 then change the extension identity to 3001 create a ring group as 300 and inclu
417. owing This number if you want to specify a number to transfer callers to e The operator if you want to transfer callers to the operator 2 Ifyou selected this number do one of the following e Use thevalue selector gt to specify a value e Select the telephone button and enter the number where you want to transfer the caller e Right click the This number field select New and enter the phone number that you want For information about selecting a dynamic value using a value selector gt refer to Lu Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 For information about contact address book synchronization refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 266 278 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Assisted Transfer element a The Assisted Transfer element allows a transfer call recipient to accept Assisted Transfer die gt 2 1 al or deny a call based on the caller s recorded name Call number s You can enter the telephone number to which you want to transfer calls Specify the conditions under which you want to prompt callers to record their name When you enter a list of telephone numbers calls are transferred to the numbers in the order that they appear You can use the arrow f 4 buttons to change the order of numbers in the list ck Unknown caller aller E A call moves to the eleme
418. own menu select one of the following e Latest Fax in Mailbox e All Faxes in Mailbox e All Unread Faxes in Mailbox Follow all the steps in To specify a fax number for the Send Fax element on page 282 If you want to include a cover page follow all the steps in To include a cover page for the Send Fax element on page 283 From the From drop down menu select the mailbox from which you want to send the fax Called Extension refers to the identity originally called Selected Extension refers to the identity selected in the last successful Select Extension element in the service If there was none or the last one failed it defaults to be the same as the Called Extension 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 283 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Receive Fax element The Receive Fax element receives incoming faxes and places them into LE ified mailbox or database Use the Receive Fax el l CA a specified mailbox or database Use the Receive Fax element along with other elements in a service to customize receive fax behavior Save Fax to Mailbox Called Extension The default behavior for admin users using an attendant service is that the NetVanta UC Server detects the standard CNG tone that signals a fax the NetVanta UC Server receives the fax and then stores it in the default mailbox An office administrator can then send received faxes by email to a user s mailbox Sav
419. ows are updated using the specified assignments Make sure that you specify the filter condition correctly For example no filter condition UT 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 349 Using Databases in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Move Current Row element Move Curent a By ro Source element z Move current row to the Move Current Row element When using the Fetch Data element on page 344 or Dial for Data element on page 345 a set of rows are fetched from the database The Move Current Row element moves the current row in a set of rows fetched The current row can be moved to be the first row in a set of rows the last row the next row or the previous row The Source element for a Move Current Row element can be the name of any other Fetch Data or Dial for Data element in the service The current row can be moved to the first row last row next row or previous row in the set of rows associated with the Fetch Data or Dial for Data element e Ifthe current row moves to another row then the element exits through the Source element connector pin e If moving the current row moves it beyond the last row before the first row if there are no rows or if the Source element has not been executed yet then the element exits through the No more rows connector pin e Ifan error occurs then the element exits through the Otherwise connector pin We ll use a simplified versi
420. ows that you want to retrieve for each query The default number of rows is 200 Select OK Managing data in user data tables After you create a user table you can add change and delete the information included in your copy of the table Od AG Lating to odd ered estate bang Che ef oy dat te edly Gd Date Lo delete e saated record One time Messages My User Data 1 Source R Jom Lennon 201 o UC Save Mt ar t T Reg Dae tax Le The information represented above by the numbers 1 to 5 that you enter when you create a user data 336 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Databases in Call Answering Services table in the administrator application on the top appears in the user s copy of the table on the bottom The user data tables are only visible if a service that is associated with an identity has an element in the service that uses the data source This allows the administrator to create multiple user data sources without users getting confused by information that is not relevant to them To add information to a user data table 1 In the Data Sources content pane right click the user data source that you want to add information to 2 Select Edit to open the user data source 3 Select the Add button to add a row to the table Each field has the default value defined in the data source definition Lu The Add button is
421. ox to which you want to send callers outside business hours a er Control p gt Transfer Call a 2 4 sj Compare Times Transfer call to This number amp V Mon V Tue IV Wed S sooo gt Vv i _ Thu I Fril Sat D Sun FREE From Otherwise 9 Voice Mail Otherwise 2 Mailbox ows ales gt IV Play status message Add Meru Item For information about building services to create a call flow refer to Creating Custom Call Answering Services on page 253 Use a service with database elements to route calls to the appropriate agent group based on dynamic database information about the caller Play Announcement element informs callers they must have their account number handy to proceed Gather Digits element gathers the account number Fetch Data element finds a match in the Account Status database Compare Digits element compares the gathered digits to the digits fetched from the database Transfer Caller elements route the calls to the appropriate queue Refer to the following for instructions on how to route calls using database integration To route calls using database integration 1 2 3 4 5 Create a service by following all the steps in To create a service on page 254 Double click the new service to start the Service Editor Drag a Play Announcement element from the Standard tab to the canvas Record or select a greeting that informs the caller to be prepared t
422. pane with the words Copy of before its name 3 Rename the copy of the service by following all the steps in To rename a service on page 255 To delete a service 1 Right click the service that you want to delete 2 Select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion Lu You cannot delete a service that is active on an identity Creating and changing service folders You can create and manage folders in much the same way as services and you can use folders to organize your services For example you can create a folder for each of your identities and then store associated services in it ore Only one service can be active on an identity at any time When you want to change the active service on an identity you can quickly do so if related services are kept in the same folder You might have built some services that you are not currently using for example those designed for statutory holidays Store these together in a folder called Holidays and then retrieve them when you need them To create a folder 1 Right click anywhere in the summary pane 2 Select New gt Folder to add a new folder to the list in the summary pane The folder icon denotes the new folder and the default name is New Folder Folder icon 256 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Creating Custom Call Answering Services 3 Enter a name for the folder RE You can also right clic
423. phone to appear in the Phones pane of the NetVanta UC server Administrator application The identity and other phone features can be configured through the Administrator application If you install a SIP phone on a network on which neither the NetVanta UC Server n the phone will not be able to retrieve the correct IP and MAC addresses however the NetVanta UC Server gives you the option of entering MAC addresses manually or using a barcode scanner If you are installing a large number of SIP phones on the network ADTRAN recommends you use a barcode scanner To add a phone with automatic configuration 1 Provide power to the phone 2 Connect the LAN cable from the phone to the same subnet as the NetVanta UC Server computer The phone will automatically appear in the Phones summary pane Wor The phone cannot make an outgoing call or receive a call until it is properly configured by the NetVanta UC Server administrator Installing SIP Phones Manually It is not necessary that the phones that you add support automatic configuration You can add any SIP phone but you must configure the phones manually according to the manufacturer s instructions To complete the configuration and for the phone to connect to and register with the communication system 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 143 Installing and Configuring SIP Phones ECS BAS Administrator Guide you must supply a SIP authorization and password The SIP
424. ppears in the Specific field 292 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services To enable callers to change a specified extension or user greeting using a remote telephone 1 Enable the Specific button Select the value selector gt select Greetings and select one of the users or Called Extension Called Extension refers to the identity originally called Selected Extension refers to the identity selected in the last successful Select Extension element in the service If there was none or the last one failed it defaults to be the same as the Called Extension The name of the greeting appears in the Specific field Only administrator users can add a Select Extension element to a service However if an administrator user shares such a service with a PBA user then the Select Extension element within that service becomes available to the PBA user 2 From the Greeting type drop down menu select one of the following greeting types e Internal Greeting e External Greeting e Out of Office Greeting e Mailbox Identifier access oe Put a Verify Password element before this element if you want to prevent unauthorized You can use the Record Announcement element to record audio in a specific temporary recording and elements like Play Announcement can be used to play the audio Temporary recordings exist only for the duration of the execution of a ser
425. pplication to meet your particular business requirements Ideally the application would gather information from a database such as the names and the phone numbers of the people to call Your custom application must then initiate the OutDial executable which makes a call request to the NetVanta UC Server to initiate the calls When a call is made successfully then the service you selected is run Lu To create the customized application requires scripting knowledge Knowledge of databases would also be beneficial Outbound Dialer Requirements For the Outbound Dialer to function optimally there are some requirements that must be met and some 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 235 Using Advanced Features ECS BAS Administrator Guide options that can be configured For best results the Outbound Dialer should be used in combination with a database For example your custom application might access a database to gather the names and telephone numbers of the people to call While a database is not required to use the Outbound Dialer not accessing a database limits the capabilities of this feature The following requirements must be met in order to use the Outbound Dialer e The Outbound Dialer is a licensed option Only NetVanta UC Server configurations with the Outbound Dialing Support license have this option available e The Outbound Dialer should only be used on trunks with true answer supervision that can accu
426. presentation of the announcement appears in the detail pane with a set of audio commands above the waveform 6 Select the icon of the device that you want to use either or The icon that you select is enclosed by a dotted line 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 315 Using Announcements in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide 7 Select gt to listen to the announcement You can also preview announcements using the Service Editor while you are building a service You must first select a Play Announcement element and then use the Browse button to choose an announcement to preview For more information on using the Service Editor refer to Using the Service Editor on page 257 Selecting a Prerecorded Announcement for an Element After you preview the announcements and decide which you want to use open the service to which you want to add prerecorded announcements Locate an element that you want to change or add one to the service To select a prerecorded announcement for an element follow these steps 1 Select the Services navigation bar to open the Services navigation pane EX Netvanta UC Client File Edit View Tools Help K 87 a T amp Admin John Jeffries John Roebuck Administration Name Services 8 Direct Voicemail Tra BP Services 8 External Check Voic H D Samples amp samples N Shared 8 Service amp Shared File is not in the cache Press
427. protocol is UDP however you can select TCP Allows you to route calls based on the calling and called parties who is calling and where they are calling Matches are then performed for both of these using regular expressions The default is which is a wildcard expression that matches all number patterns by default For specific matches the source pattern requires a complete IP address with a port number such as 5112 10 10 8 143 5060 Alternatively add to the end of a regular dialing expression in order for the source pattern matching to occur Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide The Source Pattern can be configured so that calls originated by dialing the same digits are routed to different places depending on who is calling This is most commonly used for 911 calls In this instance the source of the call must be identifiable so that 911 services can locate the origin of the call For example assume that users with extensions starting with 2000 are in one building while users with extensions starting with 3000 are in another The first building has a gateway GWI while the second building has a gateway GW2 This would be handled by having two entries where the digits dialed are 911 One entry would have the source pattern with the regular expression 2 0 9 3 to indicate callers with four digit extensions starting with 2 where the call is then routed to host GWI Another entry for the di
428. pt for the Lu announcement that you want to record This is useful for eliminating pauses when you are recording 8 On the toolbar select el to open the Record Audio menu 9 Using the Insert new drop down menu select at the beginning Record Audio Time 0 00 000 Insert new at the beginning 10 Select el to begin recording your message As you record the Time will increment and the red record button turns grey Lu The maximum length of a recorded announcement is 15 minutes 11 When you are finished recording select Di 12 Select OK to keep the announcement 13 In the menu bar of the Audio Editor select File gt Update to save the update to the announcement Changing Announcements You can change an announcement by deleting a part that you no longer need adding recorded audio to it or adjusting the volume You can delete portions of the waveform by selecting a portion in much the same way as you select text using a word processor A number of commands allow you to change announcements The following illustrations provide details about the command icons located on the Audio Editor toolbar Use the edit commands to cut copy paste and erase sections of the waveform These commands operate in a fashion analogous to the same commands found in a word processor amp H Cut Paste Copy Erase Use the audio commands to play announcements position the marker in the waveform and make recordings
429. r Mode Displays the call answering mode that is configured for the user or mailbox for example Personal Assistant or Personal Business Assistant Message Store Displays the name of the message store type The New User Wizard helps you set up each new user profile You can create either an internal or local user or a user based on a Windows user Local users require a password each time they log into the application The message store for local users can be Exchange Passwords for Windows users are maintained by Active Directory so that Windows users do not have to enter a password each time they log on This functionality is called single sign on Windows users can automatically choose to configure an Exchange mailbox from Active Directory 98 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles Creating User Profiles Select the Admin tab to obtain the Administration navigation pane After you connect the SIP telephones to the network the NetVanta UC Server automatically recognizes the phones and allows you to assign user identities to the phones using the New User Wizard For information about installing and configuring SIP telephones refer to nstalling and Configuring SIP Phones on page 143 You can also edit user profiles identities or phones after you create user profiles For information about editing users identities and phones refer to Configuring the NetVanta UC Server
430. r context For more information refer to User Context and Service Elements on page 265 Greetings You can select Called Extension or a specific user s greeting The Selected Extension mode is available to Administrators only For more information refer to the Se ect Extension Element on page 289 If you select Greetings then select a greeting type as described below If the greeting selected is Called Extension it is recommended to include a Play Announcement element before in the call flow because the Administrator application has no greetings Temporary Recordings Temporary recordings can be used to record audio temporarily after a service has started Use the Record Announcement Element on page 292 to record the audio for a specific temporary recording The recordings are then stored in a temporary file which can be played by another element that plays audio such as the Play Announcement element All temporary recordings are discarded when the service ends Up to 10 temporary recordings can be made For more information on temporary recordings refer to Allowing Callers to Make Temporary Recordings Within a Service on page 267 Active Greeting This is the default greeting Internal Greeting Internal greetings are intended for callers calling from extensions at your workplace External Greeting External greetings are intended for callers calling from outside your workplace Out of Office Greeting Ou
431. r than one digit An operator number does not need to be a user extension it can be a phantom mailbox To select an operator for multiple users 1 Press Shift and select all users for which you want to specify the same operator number 2 Right click the selected user names and select Set operator identity 3 Enter the extension number that you want in the Operator identity field need to be a user extension it can be a phantom mailbox Wor The operator extension must be longer than one digit An operator number does not 4 Select OK If you leave the Operator identity field blank or enter the system operator extension you are prompted to confirm the selection If you do not specify an extension number for a user callers are transferred to the system s operator extension number when they dial 0 Configuring a user s message storage For each user profile you can specify the email storage type mailbox and server which determines where voice fax and email messages are stored You can also select a server to handle contact information including contact matching for messages call routing based on contacts and other mailbox functions such as contact searches for managing your mailbox forwarding messages to contacts and reply or callback to 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 113 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide contacts The Messaging tab is linked to the user profile mai
432. rately determine when the called party answers the phone such as digital trunks Using the Outbound Dialer with analog gateways may not function reliably e By default only Admin users can use the Outbound Dialer If you have created a custom authorization store then PBA users can also use the Outbound Dialer if they have the right to SubmitOutboundCallRequest e You must create a custom application script or NET application according to your particular business requirements For maximum functionality the application should access a database and the application must also initiate the OutDial exe which logs into the NetVanta UC Server to make the calls e You must create a service to run when a call connects e You must configure a port for outbound dialing To verify the Outbound dialing support license 1 From the Administrator application select Help gt License Information A list of the current enabled features appears 2 Ensure that Outbound dialing support has the value Yes If Outbound dialing support has the value No then you do not have a license to use the Outbound Dialer To change your current license contact your system integrator or reseller Try the Outbound Dialer The Outbound Dialer requires some customizing to use as a business solution however we ve included a simple example for you to try in order to see how the Outbound Dialer works Entering the commands below into a Command Prompt causes the OutDial exe
433. rd to open the Recipients menu box 3 Select Addresses to select a recipient from your Outlook contacts list Otherwise enter the name and fax number of the recipient to whom you want to forward the fax one When you forward a fax document it appears as a new entry in the fax queue 4 Select Add to list 5 Select Next until the Finished menu appears 6 Select Finished To suspend transmission of a fax listed in the fax queue 1 Select the Queue folder Faxes scheduled for transmission are listed in the summary pane You can suspend a fax only if it is in waiting status 2 Right click the fax whose transmission you want to suspend indefinitely and select Suspend The fax transmission is suspended indefinitely View this information in the status field To resume transmission of a fax that had been suspended 1 Select the Queue folder Faxes scheduled for transmission are listed in the summary pane 2 Right click the fax whose transmission you want to resume and select Resume The fax transmission is resumed View this information in the status field To delete a fax listed in the fax queue 1 Select the Queue folder Faxes scheduled for transmission are listed in the summary pane Queue 2 Right click the fax that you want to delete and select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion 218 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing Using fax cover pages This sec
434. rded to drop down menu select the mailbox of the user that you want to apply message archiving to Select OK To specify the user s mailbox for duplicate messages 1 2 3 32 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Message Archiving tab Select a user s mailbox from the Select the user s mailbox that all duplicate messages will be recorded to drop down menu Select OK Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options Setting Auto Attendant and System Announcement Options You can set the following auto attendant and system announcement options e Setting Operator Options on page 33 e Configuring Voices for System Announcements on page 34 e Selecting the Order for Dial by Name Dialing on page 36 e Configuring Non user Extensions and Identities on page 37 Wor For more information about auto attendants refer to Auto Attendant Identities on page 133 Setting Operator Options You can set system wide options for the operator typically the company receptionist To set operator options 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Operator Definition tab 3 Check the Enable operator key check box if you want to allow callers to enter the operator access key and be transferred to the operator extension 4 From the Operator access key drop down menu select
435. rder oldest messages first while old messages are played in reverse chronological order newest messages first Enable sorting is the default value e If Enable sorting is unchecked then messages will be played in an order that is dependent on the server That is the user cannot rely on any specific order for message playback If a specific order of message playback is required then Enable sorting should be checked e Users do not have the same options for setting message playback sort order and instead have the following options available to them e Listen to voice and fax messages only 26 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options e Listen to voice and fax messages first then email messages e Listen to all messages in the order they were received If Enable sorting is checked and a user has selected Listen to voice and fax messages one only or Listen to voice and fax messages first then email messages then all voice fax and email messages if selected are sorted together To set message playback order for new and old messages 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Mailbox Management TUI tab 3 Check the Enable sorting checkbox Play new unheard messages defaults to playing in chronological order while old heard messages defaults to playing in reverse chronological order 4 Select the radio
436. recent log is swlog txt and log files will rotate as they get larger 2 Look for the following messages after the voice message was left in step 2 of the previous set of instructions IMAP optimization technique may be This indicates that the IMAP server does not support the set wrong SEARCH HEADERS selected message retrieval method and has switched to the switching to brute force technique No query optimization method IMAP optimization technique may be This indicates that the IMAP server does not support the set wrong SEARCH CUSTOM selected message retrieval method and has switched to the switching to brute force technique No query optimization method Failed to brief summary information This indicates that the IMAP server does not support the about message selected message retrieval method Not connected or unable to reconnect This indicates that the server cannot be reached to server 3 If you did not find one of these messages in the software logs then no further steps are required 4 Ifyou find one of the messages noted above in the software logs then repeat the configuration steps above and select the next fastest method Repeat the testing procedures starting at To configure IMAP for searching and retrieving messages on page 180 to determine if the method selected is supported by your server If another one of these messages is found in the software logs then select the No q
437. ribes the settings available in the PIN rules section of the Security tab Minimum PIN length Specifies the minimum length of a PIN By default the minimum PIN length is 4 characters The valid PIN length range is 4 to 15 characters Maximum PIN age Specifies the frequency in days with which the user s PIN must be changed By default PINs can be used for 120 days To specify that PINs must be changed after a particular amount of time select the check box next to Maximum PIN age and enter the number of days until the next PIN is required The valid range is 1 to 9999 days PIN must meet complexity requirements Specifies whether PINs must meet complexity rules By default complexity rules for PINs are enabled The complexity rules for PINs are as follows e Must not match the mailbox number e Must not be the reverse of the mailbox number e Must not be a single repeated digit for example 1111 e Must not be a consecutive sequence of ascending or descending numbers for example 1234 e Must not be a consecutive sequence of ascending or descending odd or even numbers for example 7531 A new PIN cannot be the same as the existing PIN This requirement is always in effect and Lu cannot be disabled 156 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Classes of Service Configuring the User CoS Features The user CoS features that can be configured include
438. rom their mailbox over the telephone IMAP servers vary in the methods they support for retrieving a user s voice and fax messages and these 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 177 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide methods vary in the speed at which they retrieve such messages To optimize IMAP server performance and to minimize delay between when a user logs into the telephone user interface TUI to check their mailbox and when the NetVanta UC Server can play mailbox and message information such as the number of new one messages ensure that you select the fastest search method available that your IMAP server supports For more information refer to Determining the Appropriate Query Optimization Technique on page 179 You can add multiple IMAP servers This can be used to connect to different servers or to create different servers with different configuration options To add an IMAP server 1 2 178 Right click anywhere in the Servers summary pane Select New gt IMAP to open the IMAP4 Configuration menu box Enter a server name in the Name field The server name is used to distinguish the IMAP server from other server types This is a descriptive name and cannot be changed after creating the server Ensure that you use a distinct and meaningful name Enter a host name in the Host name field The host name or IP address must be the host name or IP address of the IMAP server
439. ronization refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 266 282 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services To specify a list of faxes for a Send Fax element 1 2 3 4 Select List of Faxes from the Send drop down menu Follow all the steps in To specify a fax number for the Send Fax element on page 282 In the To field select the value selector gt and select the database value or fax that you want to send The fax appears in the To field Repeat step 3 until all the faxes that you want are added to the To field To include a cover page for the Send Fax element 1 mo o p p On the Send Fax element enable the Include cover page check box which opens the Fax Cover Page Details field Select the browse button to open the Select Cover Page field Select the fax cover page that you want to include Select Select The name of the fax cover page appears in the Select cover page field In the Fax Cover Page Details field enter information about the fax recipient the subject of the fax and comments that you want to include on the cover page You can use a combination of typed text and dynamic values select dynamic values for the cover page information Wor Refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 to Select OK To send faxes in your mailbox using a Send Fax element 1 From the Send drop d
440. rovided by a telephone company that are typically mapped to attendants user extensions fax machines or PBX services Through the dial plan you can map any incoming or outgoing numbers to either a block of telephone numbers or to an individual number Using regular expression codes you can use one rule to map all numbers rather than mapping numbers individually Example e A company has purchased a block of 100 DID numbers e Using 10 digit dialing the numbers include 613 555 11xx where xx ranges from 00 to 99 e The company extension numbers are 3 digit numbers beginning with the number 2 or 2xx You can map all incoming numbers 613 555 11xx to extension numbers 2xx by entering the following 52 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Routing and Restricting Calls information in the Dial Plan Entry menu Dial Plan Entry x Routingrue Original digks 61355511 0 9 2 Priority co Destination C Gateway ostrgabewn a auaa Coll next member after o seconds Digk manipulation Digtstosp fo Prefix to add Suffix to add Options Transport udp bd Source pattes emo te You can also route a particular DID number to an individual extension number Example To map the incoming DID number 613 555 1100 to extension 271 you would enter the following information in the dial plan Assign the priority number to a higher priority than the general r
441. rows fetched T On single digit Otherwise Dial for Data element The letters Q and Z appear on different keys on different phones The Dial for Data element works whether the letter Q corresponds to the 0 or the 7 key and whether the letter Z corresponds to the 0 or the 9 key e Ifthe Dial for Data element fetches one row the call exits from the One row fetched connector pin e Ifthe Dial for Data element fetches more than one row then the call exits from the Many rows fetched connector pin e Ifno data rows are fetched then the call exits the No rows fetched connector pin e Ifyou enable the On Single Digit check box the call exits that connector pin when the caller enters only one digit or the call times out after one digit is entered e If any other condition exists such as the inability to access a Data Source such as an external database or internal User Data Table then the call exits the Otherwise connector pin A Dial for Data element can fetch more than one row depending on the number of rows in the source the filter conditions and the field the user will select on When one or more rows are fetched a reference to a field by another element is always a reference to the field s value in the first row in the set of rows fetched e When only one row is fetched the first row is the single row that was fetched e When multiple rows are fetched which row is first depends on whether a sort order was defined by the Ad
442. rs and network components such as printers file shares and permissions Active Directory organizes information about network elements in a tree structure similar to the way that Windows uses folders and files to organize information on a computer When you use the NetVanta UC Server New User Wizard to create a new user you must choose the user type that you want to create either a Windows user or Local user Some users and authentications might be defined entirely within NetVanta UC Server These are called local authentications and users Authentications might also be defined based on some Windows user This Windows authentication is logically linked to exactly one Windows user defined in a domain that has a two way trust relationship with the domain within which the server is located Windows authentications are used to enable single sign on Windows users are linked to Active Directory Certain attributes of a user are linked to Active Directory as well including the display name first and last name Exchange mailbox and Contacts Database IDs The last two are used only if the user is configured to use Exchange Server for messaging Using Active Directory the NetVanta UC Server is able to identify and authenticate Windows user logon using Microsoft credentials and allow Windows users specific privileges and permissions based on their system defined roles Active Directory provides 84 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D
443. rs This parameter requests the utility to list a description of valid parameters and their meanings Creating Outbound Dialing Services The Outbound Dialer can be used from a command prompt to make outgoing calls and to run a service when a call connects You can also create a service that uses the Queue Outdial element to launch an outdial request after a specified period of time The information in this section explains how to create an outbound dialing service to run when an outbound dialing request is made from a command prompt For information on creating a service to initiate an outbound dialing request refer to Queue Outdial element on page 305 The type of service you create to run when an outbound call connects can be as simple or as complex as you wish What elements you choose to include in the service depend on your business requirements 244 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Advanced Features At a minimum you may want to use the Play Announcement element to play a message for the person answering the call For more information refer to Play Announcement element on page 269 You may also want to use some database elements so that the person answering can input a response into a database For more information refer to Using Database Elements on page 343 For example you may want the person to enter a PIN if it s important to ensure that a particular person receives the mes
444. rs to signal the end of their message enable a beep before recording and enable review message menu To limit the length of a recorded message Enter a number of seconds in the Record for at most field Callers cannot leave a message that lasts longer than the time limit that you specify To avoid recording silence 1 Enable the Stop recording after check box 2 Enter a number of seconds in the field between phrases or speaking quietly Wor If you set the number of seconds of silence too low callers might be cut off while pausing To set Take Message specifications Enable any of the following check boxes Stop when key pressed callers proceed to the next element after they press a key e Beep before recording e Review message menu 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 295 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide Advanced Menu Element 4 The Advanced Menu element allows callers to make a selection using Advanced Menu 1 q the telephone keypad It is advisable to put an audio element such as Play Announcement that specifies menu options before the Advanced Menu element The Advanced Menu element can also be attached to the on single digit connection of certain elements Some callers might not make a selection from the menu For this reason the No key in check box is provided Select the check box and then enter in a number of seconds to wait in the assoc
445. rver and its data are essential for disaster recovery The NetVanta UC Server backup should conform to the site policy for backups It may be useful to backup the NetVanta UC Server in a working state using third party Lu tools Combined with current data backups a good image can result in a quick system restore in the event of a total system failure For more information on backing up and restoring the NetVanta UC Server refer to the Backup and Restore Procedures technical note available from the ADTRAN Support Lu Community httos supportforums adtran com This and other documents are also located on the NetVanta UC Server installation media 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 355 Maintaining the NetVanta UC Server 356 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc ECS BAS Administrator Guide 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Troubleshooting 21 Troubleshooting Overview Occasionally problems may occur where the NetVanta UC Server does not function as expected Some potential problems and their solutions are noted below Note that this is not an exhaustive list You can use NetVanta UC Server logs to review calls events system errors or warnings You can configure the NetVanta UC Server to automatically generate diagnostic information in the event of errors or problems You can also configure the diagnostic system options such that ADTRAN your reseller and or yourself is notified if the NetVanta UC Ser
446. rvice Editor by double clicking an existing service The Service Editor consists of a standard Menu Bar and Toolbar a Tool Palette of Elements and a Canvas pjectworld Main Autoattendant srv UC Client Service Editor _ 10 x Menu bar a eb zzi M Anrmuncenert 7 Element Fa vel D Truien ja Step when key pressed C Ply entre message DE Play Onetime Message 4 Play Announcement Cun Tool Palette amon One sow fetched Mary ovr totched dotilendant Greeting and Mora No rows letched of Elements Gaya v menon Othernice J Compare T mes gt Pha be 3 F Mon P Tue P Wed HD Trunicreeting es Dial By Name Pin AP MP sel r ty Voice Mal Fn T f Siop mhen key pressed cre A Play eviire message Canvas area a a gt Transfer Cal es g Artisted Transfer Nobly Pager amp Send E mad amp Send Fax KR noaveFax EP Facordemand Ready Connected as System NUMI area You design a service on the canvas using a combination of elements that you choose from the tool palette The Menu Bar contains the File Edit View Tools and Help menus Use these menus to manage the service design The Toolbar contains visual shortcuts to the most frequently used menu items Hold the pointer over a button to show the tool tips The Tool Palette contains all available elements It has Standard Advan
447. s Using the Alignment tools to customize fax cover pages The second group of tools in the Fax Cover Page Editor is the Alignment group These tools are used to space or align selected objects on the canvas Alignment tool commands can also be found in the Layout menu Bring to front Send to back iit Space evenly across Space evenly down Align left edge E Align right edge To move a shape to the front back in relation to a second shape 1 Select the shape that you want to move to the front send to the back to select it 2 On the tool palette select Bring to front Send to back as desired a The shape that you selected is brought forward sent back ss 226 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing To space two or more objects evenly across down the canvas 1 Select the objects that you want to space 2 On the tool palette select one of the following e Space evenly across e Space evenly down jii Ei Spacing tools The items that you selected are spaced evenly on the canvas To align two or more objects on the canvas 1 Select the objects that you want to align 2 On the tool palette select the alignment tool that you want to apply Alignment tools The items that you selected are aligned by the edges that you specify To preview a fax cover page 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the Cov
448. s and is not available to PBA users Parameters To avoid security concerns the Execute Program element is limited to server side configuration files Applications for the Execute Program element include the following e Integrate with an electronic control system for example door controls alarm systems or climate control systems to retrieve information or to invoke changes to the system e Integrate with an Instant messaging IM client to provide another way of notifying callers of messages e Invoke an application that validates information received from a user for example a credit card transaction e Integrate with a third party display device You can select which programs can be executed from within a service by including them in a configuration file stored on the server A sample configuration file programs sample xml has been provided for your use and is available in the default location listed below The XML configuration file defines any programs that are permitted to be executed by a service Copy and rename the sample file provided and using a text editor such as Notepad manually edit the file to define the following e The programs which can be executed from within a service e The complete path of the programs to be executed e Aunique logical name for the programs The logical name is what is displayed in the Execute Program element in the drop down list of programs to execute e A list
449. s voice mailbox management and voice mail behavior for the Voice Mail element and Personal Assistant mode The properties of a voice combine features of language gender and Text to Speech TTS For example the English U S Female voice provides audio prompts and TTS spoken in American English by a female speaker 7 Enter an extension number in the Identity field This extension number is also known as an Identity 8 Using the adjacent drop down menu select a server for the identity 9 If you want the identity to belong to a phantom mailbox enable the corresponding Phantom check box Wor Phantom extensions can also be created for extensions with no physical phones attached 106 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles 10 Ifthe user requires a fax number enter a fax number for the user in the Fax field This is the number that callers dial to send faxes to the user The user receives any faxes directed to them in their Inbox The MWI also flashes on their phone and a voice mail message notifies the user that a fax has been received 11 From the adjacent drop down menu select a server for the fax number and select Next 12 On the Authentication Local menu in the Password field enter a login password for the user 13 In the Confirm field reenter the login password If you do not enter a password the NetVanta UC Server assigns a 4 digit password o
450. s If enabled this is the period of time that silence must exist before proceeding with the answering machine behavior This is an assumed amount of time when the answering machine or voice messaging system stops speaking and plays a beep The default period is 0 8 seconds however this number can be modified as required Fax machine If a fax machine is detected as answering the call then the element immediately exits via the Fax machine connector pin Change Voice Element The Change Voice element is used to change the voice used by elements Change Voice 1 A see in the service s call flow It can be used when creating a service to change the voice used by other elements in the call flow to a specific Voice voice the calling party s voice or the called party s voice Also it can be voice used by the service Otherwise icaling Extension v used in conjunction with the Menu element to allow a caller to select the The Change Voice element affects other elements using audio or TTS during service execution Examples of elements that use audio or TTS are the following Voicemail Send Email Send Fax Record Announcement Play Announcement and Menu Additionally the Transfer Call element is affected by the Change Voice element If the call is transferred to voicemail the called party did not answer the call the voicemail greeting is played in the called party s voice Voice Specifies the
451. s not replace individual phone installation and configuration manuals SIP telephone user guides for manufacturers that are part of the ADTRAN Connect or Connect PLUS program are available on the ADTRAN website www adtran com support Refer to the SIP user guide for information about how to use the phone with the NetVanta UC Server This chapter presents the basics of using SIP telephones and includes the following topics e Customizing Your Phone on page 193 e Using SIP Phones on page 194 Customizing Your Phone In the NetVanta UC Server you can customize your phone to suit your personal preferences For example you can set the number of rings before your phone goes to voicemail You can also customize your phone according to your particular phone s make and model For information on customizing your phone in the NetVanta UC Server refer to the following section Changing the Number of Rings Before Calls Transfer to Voicemail You can change the number of times a call rings on your extension before the call is directed to voicemail An identity refers to a user extension an auto attendant or an email address If you have identities assigned they appear in the identities pane on the bottom left of the NetVanta UC Client window M Joon Everson 2902 on UC Server 5 Number of ings a Joan Everson FAX DID 2303 on UC Server MA Customer Support Ring Group 2905 on UC Server Number of rings 2 gt 619510
452. s on page 69 e Configuring Sound Card Paging on page 71 e Configuring Gateway Paging on page 72 For information on paging devices refer to the NetVanta UC Server Planning and Lu Deployment Guide available on the ADTRAN Support Community at httos supportforums adtran com Configuring SIP Phones and VolP Paging Devices SIP and VoIP paging includes the following paging features e Pages can be received both over the phone and through overhead speakers e Additional equipment is not required to receive pages over the phone e Supports multicast paging using phone handsets or overhead speakers that support multicasting e Allows callers to select from multiple paging groups or zones by supporting dual tone multi frequency DTMF also known as touchtone dialing tones e Supports sending live pages 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 69 Configuring Paging ECS BAS Administrator Guide e Supports sending live and recorded pages from call answering services Requirements for SIP Phone and VoIP Paging Devices The requirements for SIP phone and VoIP paging devices are as follows e Ensure that the phones you are using support SIP paging e Ifyou are using multicast paging optional then ensure that the phones and speakers you are using support multicasting For a list of devices that support SIP paging and multicast paging refer to the NetVanta Lu UC Server Interoperable SIP Device Features and Comparisons technical
453. s or Times which determines the comparison element For example you could use the Flow Control element with a Receive Fax element to call your cell phone send a pager notification or send an email to your personal email address to notify you when you receive a fax from a particular number after business hours Routing incoming calls based on phone numbers The NetVanta UC Server compares the incoming caller ID to those telephone numbers included in the Flow Control element list Telephone numbers in the list can be entered manually or they can be pulled from your contact address book by using the value selector gt For more information refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 For information about contact address book synchronization refer to Synchronizing Contacts on page 266 The NetVanta UC Server compares the numbers of incoming calls with those included in the list e Ifthe numbers match the call is routed to the subsequent element that you specify e Ifthe numbers do not match the call moves to the element connected to the Otherwise connector pin To set call flow according to an unknown phone number category 1 On the Flow Control element in the Compare drop down menu select Phone Numbers Select the value selector gt 2 3 Select Contacts gt Unknown 4 Select one of the following categories e Unknown Number e Private Blocked Number e Out of area Number To
454. s silence whether it s a live voice or an answering machine or alternatively a fax machine The Detect Remote Party element is typically used with outdial requests For more information on creating outbound dialing Lu services refer to Creating Outbound Dialing Services on page 244 _ The element modifies the call flow when a call is answered by an answering machine Usually this element is the first or close to the first element in a service As an example you may want to create a service that prompts callers to complete an audio survey If a person answers the phone you can instruct them on how to complete the survey and then questions can be responded to with dual tone multi frequency DTME also known as touchtone dialing tones If it is determined that the call has been answered by an answering machine then you may want to leave alternate instructions instead e When the element is first executed the Voice connector pin is taken unless the NetVanta UC Server has already determined that the remote party is a fax machine As service execution continues the NetVanta UC Server monitors the call to determine if the remote party is a fax or an answering machine It will continue monitoring the call for the entire duration as specified by the voice energy period If during this period it is determined that the called party is an answering machine the default voice path is terminated and the call flow exits the appropriat
455. s summary pane To view Outbound Dialer logs 1 Select the Logs navigation bar to open the Logs menu 2 Select the Sent Items menu to view the Outbound Dialer call logs The Outbound Dialer call logs are listed in the summary pane The information for a specific log is shown in the preview or information pane of the Logs menu Creating a Custom Application for Outbound Dialing Wor To create the custom application requires scripting knowledge and knowledge of databases would also be beneficial The Outbound Dialer can be used for a variety of purposes whether to convey information only or to input responses into a database The custom application you create and the service created to run when the call connects can be as simple or as complex as you wish How you create the custom application script or NET application and what you decide to include depends on your particular business requirements Ideally the application would gather information from a database such as the names and the phone numbers of the people to call Your custom application must then initiate the OutDial exe which makes a call request to the NetVanta UC Server to initiate the calls For best results the Outbound Dialer should be used in combination with a database Lu While a database is not required not having access to a database seriously limits the capabilities of this feature The OutDial exe is available in the following folder if the was
456. sage Alternatively you may want the person to press a number to indicate a response for example Press 1 to indicate that you have heard the message Press 2 to repeat the message You could also use the Generate Tones Element on page 304 for an outbound dialing service to enter DTMF tones also known as touch tone dialing For example the Generate Tones element could be used to enter DTMF digits to dial an extension number for a specific caller in an automated attendant to access an external paging system or to enter an account code You can use the Queue Outdial element on page 305 to determine if a call is answered by an answering machine so that the behavior of the service can be varied accordingly You may want to use additional parameters to customize the outbound dialer service In the Service Editor parameters are not visible by default so you need to modify the view to enable parameters Parameter Value Description pm Additional Parameters List This is a comma separated list of additional parameters that are passed to the service when it executes These values can be accessed within a service definition as special Text values whose names are Parameter Parameter2 and so on The first value in the list becomes the value of Parameter and so forth Parameters can be used with the following elements to create custom outbound dialing services e The Equals field in the Data Source Selector element any e
457. sage Delivery tab 3 Inthe second s after connecting before prompting callee field select the number of seconds to wait after connecting before prompting the callee for a password 4 Select OK To specify the number of delivery attempts using the pager notification feature 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Message Delivery tab 3 Inthe maximum attempts to deliver to the pager system field select the number of attempts for delivery to the pager system 4 Inthe Delay drop down menu select the number of minutes to wait between notification delivery attempts 5 Select OK To specify the email service that is used to send email 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Message Delivery tab 3 From the Send Email using drop down menu select the email service that you want to use for the Send email feature The Send email using drop down menu consists of servers that have already been configured on the system 4 Select OK To specify the message sensitivity mode 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Message Delivery tab 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 23 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide 3 Inthe Message Sensitivity section do one of the following e From the Voice Messages drop down menu choose the sensitivity level t
458. se settings may differ The message waiting indicator behavior in effect corresponds to the last mode set Thus if you set the message waiting indicator behavior for an individual user then this setting takes effect rather than the system wide or the user selected mode However users can reset the message waiting indicator behavior by selecting an mode themselves For message waiting indicators to update when messages are accessed in Microsoft Outlook Web Access or on a mobile device you can configure Microsoft Exchange ore Server to monitor for changes in users mailboxes and for the NetVanta UC Server to adjust the waiting light accordingly For more information refer to Configuring Microsoft Exchange Server on page 170 To change a user s message waiting indicator behavior 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the name of the user whose message waiting indicator behavior you wish to change 2 Select Open 3 Select the message waiting indicator tab 4 Choose one of the following options Use system defaults The message waiting indicator behavior for the user is set according to the system wide settings made in the Tool gt Options gt message waiting indicator menu This is the default setting for new and upgraded users Never turn on or off The NetVanta UC Server does not manage the message waiting indicator Turn on when new message arrives Turn off when first message is accessedin The light turns off when
459. sed to login to the server If both parameters are omitted the utility attempts to connect using single sign on sd Start Delay The delay before the outdial request is executed If this mode is not specified then the outdial request is executed immediately or as soon as possible depending on the number of requests in the queue The default value is zero sdu Start Delay Units The units used for the delay This may be minute minutes hour hours day or days The default is minutes The start delay is calculated from the time the request is entered The request will not be processed before the time delay has elapsed however it is possible that it may be processed somewhat later if the system is heavily loaded for example with many Active Message Delivery AMD requests 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 243 Using Advanced Features ECS BAS Administrator Guide Parameter Value Description p Pause in seconds before The number of seconds to wait after the call has connected starting service before starting the service If the parameter is not specified the value of the outgoing call prompt delay from the Admin options Tools gt Options gt Message Delivery is used On trunks with no true answer supervision such as analog trunks the NetVanta UC Server can determine when a call is connected but it cannot determine precisely when the call is answered This delay can be used to ensure t
460. select the desired system announcement voice for the users using the Change Voice submenu To change a user s call answering mode 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name that you want to modify and select Open 2 Select one of the following answering modes for the user e Personal Assistant PA this user has access to all the standard voicemail features This is the default call answering mode e Personal Business Assistant PBA this user has access to more advanced features than the PA user This call answering mode is for users who want to create personalized call answering services and announcements 112 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles To select a user s operator 1 In the Users summary pane right click the user for which you want to select an operator and select Open 2 Select one of the following operators for the user e System the general operator typically a company receptionist where calls are directed to when a caller presses 0 in a voicemail greeting e Personal operator a specific operator for example a personal receptionist or an individual user in a particular department or location where calls are directed to when a caller presses O in a voicemail greeting If you selected Personal operator enter the operator s extension number in the field 3 Select OK Sr The operator s extension must be longe
461. send using System mailbox User mailbox Message delivery Specify the system default delivery mechanism For voice and Fax messages Send messages from system mailbox id Mailbox monitoring wg Mailbox monitoring provides an alternate method For synchronizing message waiting lights Monitoring can be turned off completely or can provide a default setting For users IV Enable mailbox monitoring Default setting for users On C off Cancel Help 4 NetVanta UC Server will automatically detect the Microsoft Exchange Server URL and service account SMTP address If necessary the detected values can be overridden To override the automatically detected Exchange Server URL select the Override Exchange Server URL check box and enter the Exchange Server URL in the provided field using the format https lt server gt ews exchange asmx The lt server gt variable is the fully qualified domain name FQDN of the physical Exchange Server that hosts the CAS role or the FQDN of any Exchange Server hosting the CAS role in a CAS array To override the automatically detected service account SMTP address select the Override service account smtp address check box and enter the Exchange Server mailbox name for the NetVanta UC Server service account The format for the service account mailbox is user domain com for example UCServer ADTRAN com This mailbox is the Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox that has special access privileges i
462. setting overrides the user s setting and they will have to reset it if they want a different setting Disable the mode if you do not want to manage the message waiting activity If you enable the mode the message waiting indicator turns on when e A caller leaves a message in the user s mailbox e The user receives a message sent using the manage mailbox feature e A forwarded voice or fax message arrives in the user s mailbox Lu A voice or fax message that is forwarded by email does not turn on the recipient s message waiting indicator You can specify the message waiting indicator to turn off when the user listens to the first new message or the last new message in the mailbox If the system is busy and is using voicemail ports to manage the message waiting indicator activity you can increase the number of simultaneous operations Doing so can reduce the time it takes to deliver changes to message waiting indicators Set the number at about 1 8 the total number of ports in the system There is no advantage to setting the number higher than the number of ports 24 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options When configuring message waiting indicators there are some options that should rarely be changed The simultaneous event monitor s value controls the number of threads used to process mailbox events for the purpose of updating message waiting indicators The defa
463. splayed in the summary pane E Gl NetVanta UC Client r f a File Edit View Tools Help K g 4 hw Fe x e Tabs Admin John Roebuck Administration Display Name Identity Priority Answering Enabled Global Phone Servic Users ac ui Excluded e Et Phones Included Default Personal Bu Toni FY Paging Groups Gj John Roebuck 2005 100 Yes Included Not Applicable Pe Summary opics Gateways s i teve Jackson 2007 100 Yes Included Not Applicab Ports Pane e Classes of Service A Authentications Identities G Data Sources m r Servers Display name Absence Tracker Communication Systems Identity 3000 Navigation TA NetVants ECS Priority 100 Ko Active service Absences Tracker Pane C ication System NetVanta ECS Services ommunication System etanta 4 Associated user Admin Answering enabled Yes Services Dialed number 3000 Navigation Announcements Bars Distribution Lists 7 Faxes Detail ss Pane S Admin 2006 on NetVanta ECS B Number of rings 4 X E Default Personal Business Assistant r Identitites Absence Tracker 3000 on NetVanta ECS B Pane TE Absences Tracker For Help press F1 Connected as Admin User Identities A user identity is an extension number that is dialed by another telephone or automated attendant User identities are intended to be used with ucCompanion a softphone or a hardphone User identiti
464. ssign services in the user s service folder or in the Shared services folder to identities associated with a user Similarly administrators can only assign services in the administrator s services folder or the Shared services folder to identities associated with the administrator account Once created e The administrator can change the service attached to identities associated with the administrator account but cannot automatically change the services of an identity associated with a user account e Users can change the services attached to the identities associated with their own account through the NetVanta UC Client If an administrator wants to change the service associated with a user identity then they can temporarily add their user authentication to the authentications of the user account This allows the administrator to access the user account through a new tab in the NetVanta UC Client once they close and re launch the NetVanta UC Client The administrator can then modify the service associated with the user identity in the user tab and then subsequently remove their authentication from the user account The tab is removed when the NetVanta UC Client is restarted For more information about services and how to build and activate them refer to Managing Services on page 242 or Creating Custom Call Answering Services on page 241 Use an attendant identity to connect a caller directly to an auto attendant or to a service for example
465. st one failed it defaults to be the same as the Called Extension Access cancelled As Administrator you need to specify the mailbox that a caller can manage or insert a Select Extension element to allow NetVanta UC Servers to select a mailbox In the Mailbox drop down menu select Called Extension Make sure to include a Select Extension element before the Manage Mailbox element in the call flow so that callers can enter an extension number You can set up the next element in the call flow depending on whether callers enter a valid extension 296 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services number or cancel the management attempt Lu This element prompts callers for a mailbox password before allowing access Change Mailbox Password Element Ex a Mabox Mi The Change Mailbox Password element allows users to change their Password 1 al mailbox password The element prompts callers for a new password waits until they enter a Mailbox called Extension new password and then confirms it by playing it back to callers Callers must accept the change or reject it In the Mailbox drop down menu select Called Extension Make sure to include a Select Extension element before the Manage Mailbox element in the call flow so that callers can enter the desired extension number Called Extension refers to the identity originally called Selected E
466. steps 1 Inthe Identities pane select the value selector gt in the services list that corresponds to the identity that you want to change 2 Select Services 3 Select the desired service for the identity Creating Custom Call Answering Services on page 241 Wor For information about services and how to build and activate them refer to Configuring the Global Phone Directory The Global Phone Directory uses Polycom s Corporate Directory feature to enable users of Polycom and ADTRAN IP phones to use the GUI on their phones to search for identities included in the Global Phone Directory The Global Phone Directory feature is supported for all ADTRAN IP phones except the ADTRAN IP 706 and IP 712 and Polycom IP phones using firmware 3 1 8 and higher No other phone types are supported Phones associated with other communication systems such as the NetVanta 7100 are not provisioned by NetVanta UC Server and therefore are outside the scope of this document Users can search the Global Phone Directory database using simple and advanced searches In a simple search the user enters either the first name last name or phone number of the identity for which they are 140 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Extensions and Identities searching In the advanced search the user can search on one or more of the first name last name and phone number values Administra
467. t number to configure the gateway If your attached PBX does not have true answer supervision then enable the prompt for handset playback Without true answer supervision then the beginning of playback and recording using the handset may get cut off This affects message playback announcement playback and recording and greeting playback and recording using the handset To configure PBX options for a PBX connected through a gateway 1 Inthe Communication Systems summary pane right click the Generic PBX via Gateway that you want to change and select Open 2 Inthe Options menu enter the IP address or the FQDN 3 Enter the appropriate port number 5060 for a SIP PBX 4 Enable the Prompt for handset playback mode if you system does not have true answer supervision If the beginning of playback and recording using the handset is being cut off then this indicates that your attached PBX does not have true answer supervision and you should enable this check box 5 Select Change To add a new communication system 1 Right click anywhere in the Communication Systems summary pane 2 Select New to start the Communication System Wizard 3 Enter a name for the new communication system in the Pbx name field 4 Select the type of communication system from the Pbx type drop down menu 5 Select OK To change communication system information 1 Inthe Communication System summary pane right click the communication system that you
468. t OK Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc In the Dial Plan Entry menu enter any of the following information that you want to include in the dial plan entry 51 Routing and Restricting Calls ECS BAS Administrator Guide To edit an existing dial plan 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane under Communication Systems select the communication system for which you want to edit an existing dial plan 2 Select Routing 3 Double click the dial plan entry that you want to edit to open the Dial Plan Entry menu 4 Inthe Dial Plan Entry menu edit the dial plan information that you want to change 5 Select OK To delete a dial plan entry 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane under Communication Systems select the communication system from which you want to delete a dial plan entry 2 Select Routing 3 Select the dial plan entry that you want to delete 4 Select the trash can al Using regular expressions to route and restrict calls Dial plan and toll restriction digits are managed using regular expressions Regular expressions are a flexible way of delivering patterns that are a match For example if you specify the regular expression 0 9 7 the NetVanta UC Server recognizes any digits from zero to nine repeated a maximum of seven times in other words a standard local telephone number Routing incoming DID numbers to extensions Incoming direct inward dialing DID services offer a range of telephone numbers p
469. t OK to apply the settings and save the changes to the CoS Apply the CoS to Phones Once the phone CoS is created it can be applied to phones in a number of ways You can apply the CoS to multiple or individual phones already configured on the system or to phones as they are added to the system The following sections outline the different methods of applying a phone CoS Applying the CoS to Phones Already in the System You can apply a phone CoS to individual phones or multiple phones already existing on the NetVanta UC Server system To apply a configured phone CoS to existing phones follow these steps 1 Select the Phones topic from the list in the Administration navigation pane 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 163 Configuring Classes of Service ECS BAS Administrator Guide 2 Inthe Phone summary pane select the phone to which you want to apply the CoS To select multiple phones hold down the Shift key while making your selection Once you have selected the phones to which you want to apply the CoS right click in the highlighted area and select Change Class of Service from the drop down menu The Change Class of Service menu appears Change Class of Service Please select the class of service for the selected users Standard Phones car 3 From the Change Class of Service menu select the desired CoS from the drop down menu 4 Select OK The Class of service field in the Phones summary pane displays
470. t a caller to enter a four digit number to continue in the call flow Once the caller enters the number and it is stored by the Gather Digits element the Compare Data element can let you direct a specific Add match caller through the call flow based on that four digit number T Equals The Compare Data element executes as follows e The first comparison value is evaluated for a match against the comparison selected If the comparison is true then the call exits through the associated connector If the comparison is not true then the next comparison value is evaluated for a match e Ifno match is found when comparing data then the call proceeds to the element connected to the No match connector pin Note that if comparisons other than Equals are selected then the order of comparison values is important and can be used to match between two values For example if the Compare to value is a numeric value and the following comparisons are used e Less Than 5 e Greater Than 10 e Less Than Equal 10 Then the following results occur e Ifthe Compare to value is less than 5 then the first connector is taken e Ifthe Compare to value is greater than 10 then the second connector is taken Ifthe Compare to value is between 5 and 10 including 5 or 10 then the third connector is taken e Ifthe Compare to value had no value then the No match connector pin is taken To direct a caller using the Compare Data
471. t attempts to deliver messages 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 277 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to add more target numbers to the field The NetVanta UC Server calls each number in the field according to the order you specify until the call is answered Wor Refer to Selecting Values Within Elements Using the Value Selector on page 266 to select a dynamic value for the element To change the sequence of target phone numbers listed for Deliver Messages 1 Select the number whose ranking you want to change 2 Select an arrow tl na to arrange the order of the numbers in the field To delete a target phone number from the list for Deliver Messages 1 Select the telephone number that you want to delete 2 Select the trash can Ej Transfer Call element S e Cali 2l If the transfer fails the caller leaves the element through the Otherwise Transfer call to connector pin The NetVanta UC Server automatically adds a Voicemail This number amp element to the Otherwise connector pin if you do not add an element gt The Transfer Call element transfers calls to another number The operator The telephone number that you specify is subject to the outgoing call restrictions that are specified Otherwise To specify a transfer target for the Transfer Call element 1 Inthe Transfer call to section select one of the foll
472. t in the call flow to select the mailbox associated with the identity for which you want to verify the password If there was no selection or the last selection failed it defaults to be the same as the Called Extension A selected user 2 A password contained in a Data Source value If you select this mode then be sure to include a database element such as the Fetch Data Dial for Data Move Current Row or Prompt for Current Row elements that indexes the Data Source value that you wish to use to verify the password The database element must occur before the Verify Password element in the call flow so that you can reference it in the Verify Password element s Data Source selector Data Sources cannot be referenced directly so you must reference a filtered Data Source created by one of the database elements referenced above Ensure that the Data Source value that you use is a Number data type since only Data Source values that have this type can be selected The Otherwise connector pin is followed when e The password does not match the selection criteria after three sequential attempts or e The caller has not entered any digits after three sequential attempts You can set up the next element in the call flow depending on whether a caller enters a valid extension number or cancels the attempt Loop Counter Element gy The Loop Counter element allows you to limit the number of times the al dE al call flow mak
473. t of Office greetings are typically enabled when you are out of the office for an extended period of time Mailbox Identifier The mailbox identifier consists of your name This greeting is typically used when callers are transferred to your extension Several additional options are available in addition to the greeting type e The Play status message mode preempts the user s greeting message with a status message and cannot be interrupted The Stop when key pressed button allows a caller to stop the message by pressing a key The Play entire message button ensures that the caller listens to the message in its entirety before further action can be taken 270 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services To record an announcement for a Play Announcement element 1 On the Play Announcement element select The Select Announcement menu box appears 2 Inthe Select Announcement menu box enter a name for the announcement that you want to record 3 Select Select to start the NetVanta UC Client Audio Editor 4 In the tool bar at the top of the NetVanta UC Client Audio Editor select e The Record Audio menu box appears From the Insert new audio drop down menu select at the beginning i 6 Select the button for the computer audio device The button is enclosed by a dotted line 7 Select e and then record the message As you r
474. t they cannot create change and delete system objects e Restricted User authentications with capabilities typically associated with Personal Assistant and Personal Business Assistant users except that they cannot create or delete announcements and can only read services 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 123 Managing User Profiles ECS BAS Administrator Guide e Standard User authentications with capabilities typically associated with Personal Assistant and Personal Business Assistant users e Executive Assistant authentications are the same as Standard Users but can also manage objects that belong to other profiles to which they have access For other profiles their authorization does not allow them to create or delete announcements and allows them to only read services e Restricted Executive Assistant authentications that have Restricted User capabilities for their own profile and the same authorization for other profiles to which they have access e Power User authentications similar in capability to Executive Assistant except that they can also create or delete announcements for other profiles and have full authorization for services the Administrator role Lu If there is no custom store all Windows authentications are treated as if they belong to A user s authorization for a specific profile depends on the following e The role associated with a user s authentication e The user s profile
475. t you want to delete Note the marker s position in the Position indicator at the bottom of the menu Position 0 00 000 Position Indicator 8 Select the point in the waveform where you want to begin deleting and drag to the position you determined in Step 7 This will select the portion of the announcement that you want to delete After The Tone wav UC Client Audio Editor File Edit View Command Process PlayBack Tools Help Mo RAX Bh Kunne m o RARITAN Yim ew Connected as Sharon Doe Position 0 00 007 Selection 0 00 007 to 0 01 199 4 If you do not select part of the waveform the changes that you make affect the entire waveform 9 Select gt to review the selected portion of the announcement Wor After you select part of an announcement the audio commands apply only to the selected part 10 Select on the toolbar of the Audio Editor to delete the selection 11 From the menu bar select File gt Update to save the update to the announcement To add to an announcement 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Ifthe appropriate voice folder is not displayed in the Announcements navigation pane select the desired voice folder using the steps in Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 322 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Announcements in Call Answering Services 3 Inthe
476. t you want to modify and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user 2 3 4 Ensure that Enable Unified Communications Server for this user is checked 5 Select the Advanced button to open the User Details menu 6 On the General tab in the User Information section change any of the following options e First name e Last name e Display name 88 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Integrating with Active Directory 7 8 Enable the Include in dial by name directory check box if you want the user to be accessible by the dial by name mode Select OK To change the call answering mode for a user 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 In the Users summary pane right click the user name that you want to modify and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable Unified Communications Server for this user is checked Select the Advanced button to open the User Details menu On the General tab in the Call Answering section select one of the following answering modes for the user e Personal Assistant PA allows this user access to all the standard voicemail features This is the default call answering mode e Personal Business Assistant PBA allows this user access to more advanced features than the PA user This call answering mode is for users who w
477. tails menu On the General tab in the User Information section select a Time zone from the drop down menu Oy Ue Oe aN Select OK time zone setting is always the same as the time zone of the server oe You cannot change the time zone setting for the system profile The system profile For each user profile you can specify the email storage type mailbox and server which determines where voice fax and email messages are stored Select a server to handle contact information This functionality includes contact matching for messages and call routing based on contact It also applies to managing mailbox functionality including contact search for manage mailbox forwarding messages to contacts and reply or callback to contacts The Messaging tab is linked to the user profile mailbox selection The Messaging tab is not visible for Active Directory users where Use mailbox defined by Active Directory is enabled The Messaging tab is also not visible for Microsoft Exchange Server mailboxes For more information refer to Configuring a user s message storage on page 113 You can enable users to have access to integrated messaging Enabling integrated messaging adds a Mailboxes navigation bar to a user s NetVanta UC Client The user is then able to manage their voice and fax messages visually through the Inbox and Sent Items folders in the NetVanta UC Client To change messaging information for a user 1 Inthe Users sum
478. te a call flow for a new service 1 Double click the new service to start the Service Editor 2 Drag an element from the tool palette to the canvas to start the call flow The element is automatically positioned in the top left corner The Service Editor s default menu displays the Standard elements tab To view advanced or database elements select the Advanced or Database tab located at the bottom left corner of the menu TE Standard Advanced Database The Database tab is available only if the system is licensed for database integration To add an element to the call flow 1 Right click the connector pin of the first element that you put on the canvas and then select Insert 2 Inthe shortcut menu of standard elements select the element that you want to add The element is linked to the first one that you put on the canvas To access the shortcut menu of advanced or database elements select Advanced or Lu Database on the standard elements shortcut menu The Database tab is available only if your system is licensed for database integration You can also drag the element that you want from the tool palette to the canvas Position Lu the pointer over the connector pin of the existing element until a red box appears around the connector pin and then drop the new element onto the canvas Build a service by adding elements until the call flow is complete 260 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS B
479. tem distribution list 1 Right click the distribution list that you want to copy 2 Select Duplicate 234 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Advanced Features 14 Using Advanced Features This chapter explains how to use advanced features that require some custom configuration in order to use This chapter covers the following topics e Using the Outbound Dialer on page 235 e Customizing System Announcements on the Server on page 250 Using the Outbound Dialer The Outbound Dialer can be used to make outgoing calls and to run a service when a call connects You can customize the service to meet your organization s needs but typically it might play an announcement to notify the person of some information It could also request that the person enter a PIN or press a number to indicate that they have received the message or to input a response into a database Wor The Outbound Dialer is an advanced feature that requires some programming to customize for your business requirements The Outbound Dialer requires the following to run e A customized application that you create that may access a company database and that initiates the OutDial exe e The OutDial exe provided by the NetVanta UC Server that makes the call request to the NetVanta UC Server e A customized NetVanta UC Server service that runs when a call connects You can create the customized application script or NET a
480. th your service design a message box appears with information about the changes that you need to make To validate a service 1 On the toolbar select the check mark x B Check mark 2 Ifthe Service Editor message informs you that the service is valid select OK Otherwise follow the Service Editor s suggestions about how to change your service to make it valid Troubleshooting Services If you are having trouble running services note that particular issues may be noted in the log files The following is a list of potential service warnings that may be noted in the System Errors and Warning logs To troubleshoot a warning locate the log entry below and note the possible causes of and solutions for the 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 263 Creating Custom Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide warning Wor Not all errors and warnings necessarily require action For more information on logs refer to Using the NetVanta UC Server Logs on page 362 To view service warning logs 1 Select the Logs navigation bar to open the Logs menu All logs are presented in the Content menu 2 Ifthe logs are not already sorted into categories then double click the Logs folder 3 Select System Errors and Warnings to view the logs in that category 4 Verify whether either of the following entries appear Log Entry Possible Causes and Solutions Failed to update s s database There was a problem communicating
481. the cover page When designing the cover page you can edit a label s font style and content For example you can change the fax label so that it appears as facsimile number However you cannot change the actual content that is associated with the field This is because the content information is captured when a caller initiates a fax request using a service element The recipient information labels that you can insert include e Name Fax number e Company e Street Address e City e State Province e Zip Postal Code e Country e Title e Department e Office location 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 221 Faxing ECS BAS Administrator Guide e Home telephone number e Office telephone number The sender information labels that you can insert include Name e Fax number e Company e Address e Title e Department e Office location e Home telephone number e Office telephone number The message information labels that you can insert include e Note e Subject e Date sent e Number of pages Number of attachments To insert an information label 1 From the Insert menu choose one of the following label types e Recipient e Sender e Message In this example the choice is Recipient 2 From the submenu select the label that you want The label is added to the cover page canvas It appears in a dotted rectangle A field is inserted next to the label The word recipient s iden
482. the following NetVanta UC Server Personal Assistant features transferring calls using Active Message Delivery AMD using pager and email message notifications Also you can configure whether users are able to send bulletin voice messages These features can each be enabled or disabled for user CoS members in the Features tab when editing a user CoS profile using the check box next to the feature New User Class of Service General Local Mailbox Limits Security Features Personal Assistant features v Enable transferring of calls vV Enable Active Message Delivery v Enable pager notification v Enable e mail notification Mailbox features Enable bulletin voice messages core Personal Assistant Features In the Personal Assistant features section of the Features tab an administrator can allow user CoS members to transfer calls use Active Message Delivery and receive pager and email message notifications in the NetVanta UC Server Personal Assistant By default users have access to all Personal Assistant features To allow user CoS members access to a feature enable the check box next to the feature To deny user CoS members access to a feature remove the check from check box next to the feature Mailbox Features In the Mailbox features section of the Features tab you can allow users to create and send bulletin voice messages A bulletin message that has already been listened to completely played or marked heard w
483. the information pane Selecting an item in the navigation pane for example Users opens the information in the summary pane for example a list of users Selecting an item in the summary pane for example a particular user displays more information about the selection in the information pane The identities pane displays information about the identities associated with the administrator application From here you can change the default number of rings before a call is directed to voicemail locate and edit information about services and retrieve user login and password information for SIP authentication 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 15 Introducing the Administrator Application ECS BAS Administrator Guide When you select the Admin tab the following menu appears Net anta UC Client _ Ol x File Edit View Tools Help hastes erame gt 9B ele Tabs p Admin Eric wels Shaun Welt Phones pal Paging Groups Gateways Ports Ep classes of Service FA authentications Ay identities GX Data sources Gy Servers User name Admin Communication Systems Most recent GUI access 9 22 2010 12 30 18 PM TA Netvanta 7000 Series J options TA netvants UC Server J Routing J Services Display Name Identities Class of Service Locked Out Phones Moc Admin Eric welis 2003 General Voicemail Per Jane Doe 6010 General Voicemail Pers 3ohn Doe 6000 General Voicemail
484. the summary pane In the Identities summary pane right click the user identity to which you want to assign a phone In the Identity menu select the SIP Authentication button Take note of the User login name and 3 Using a barcode reader scan the MAC address barcode on the phone The phone will appear in the Phones summary pane To add a phone manually 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select the Phones topic 2 Right click anywhere in the Phones summary pane 3 Select New Phone from the right click menu 144 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Installing and Configuring SIP Phones 4 Inthe Phone menu enter the phone information The table below provides descriptions for the various settings Phone General information 8 MAC address lt IP address optional Description Phone type optional Polycom SoundPoint IP 320 Number of buttons 2 Number of lines Z Number of expansion module buttons 0 of 0 Maximum Phone class Advanced of service Standard Phones M connection options Enable secondary registration Proxy Assigned buttons Bu Type m a o Insert Value Description oK Cancel MAC address Enter the MAC address of the phone The MAC address is printed on a label attached to the phone IP address Leave this field blank if you do not know the IP address When you connect a SIP
485. then enter the user name and password for the user from which you want to send the fax and select OK If the Server menu box opens then select UC Server from the drop down menu enable the Save server as default check box and select OK to open the NetVanta UC Client Fax Printer menu box Enable the Save to file button Select the Browse button to open the Select Fax Name menu box E Browse Button 8 9 In the field enter a name for the file and then select Select On the Fax Printer menu box select OK The fax document is saved in your fax documents folder Changing users when sending a fax or saving a fax to send later When you send a fax from another application or when you save a document as a fax to send later you can change the user that you want to send or save the fax from This is useful if a user has several mailboxes or as part of the Fax on demand element If you are faxing from another application or saving a document as a fax then from the Print menu once you have selected the ADTRAN Fax Printer and selected Print then you are presented with the NetVanta UC Client Fax Printer menu 208 4 UC Client Fax Printer E xj LT Select an option below and click the OK button Send now C Save to file Faxi Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing To change users when sending or saving a fax 1 From the NetVanta UC Client Fax Printer menu box select the
486. ther your IMAP server supports the method selected 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 179 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide If this method is unsuccessful then select the second fastest method and test the results again If this method is unsuccessful then select the third method If an unsupported method is selected then the NetVanta UC Server automatically falls back to the No query optimization the slowest method and tries again For this reason the testing procedures described must be followed to determine the fastest supported method of filtering messages To optimize IMAP server performance and to minimize delay between when a user logs or into their telephone user interface TUI to check their messages and when the NetVanta UC Server can play mailbox and message information ensure that you select the fastest message retrieval method available that your IMAP server supports The steps below outline the general process used to determine the optimal method of filtering messages as detailed in the following sections 1 Select a query optimization method using the steps outlined in To configure IMAP for searching and retrieving messages on page 180 2 Test the query optimization method selected using the steps outlined in To test the selected method of filtering messages on page 181 3 Check for message retrieval failure using the steps outlined in To check the software logs for
487. therwise Allow dial by Extension 9 typ v pe S On fa re Play status message On 2 nal Stop when key pressed Play entire message Add Too many re v4 CETATIE dite Voice French Canada Female v Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 311 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services 312 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc ECS BAS Administrator Guide 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Announcements in Call Answering Services 17 Using Announcements in Call Answering Services Announcements are the outgoing messages that callers hear when using the auto attendant These announcements typically initiate the call flow in a service and are used to guide the caller through the call process Announcements can inform callers of your business hours explain menu options or provide instructions about how to leave messages or request information by fax This chapter provides information about how to select prerecorded announcements for the call answering services It also explains how to record personalized announcements using the Audio Editor In order for announcements to function in call answering services a sound card must be installed on the NetVanta UC Server computer This chapter covers the following topics e Using Prerecorded Announcements on page 313 e Recording Announcements on page 317 e Managing Announcements on page 325 Using Prerecorded Announcements
488. thin a specified time period the default is five minutes the call is routed to the service that is associated with the attendant identity that has the number that is used to access the queue in the dial plan The service determines the overflow path that the calls follow for example to the support voicemail For information about creating and managing services and activating them on attendants refer to Managing Services on page 254 For information about building services refer to Working with Elements to Build a Service on page 259 Routing calls to queues using dial plan entries Dial Plan ERP gt 000 0 0 ueue Suppo G f ve 5000 ort Hunt Grou Use a simple dial plan entry to direct calls into a queue by adding a prefix of queue to the called number in the dial plan such as in the example above In this example when the call is placed to number 5000 the dial plan entry routes the call to queue 5000 The dial plan entry does this by adding the prefix queue to the original called number 5000 If the call is not answered the call is forwarded to the overflow attendant For more information about overflow behavior refer to Configuring overflow calls to queues on page 63 To create a call queuing dial plan entry 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select Communication Systems to open the communication system options 2 Select the communication system to which you want to add a new dial plan 60 Copyright
489. ticast requests or packets across multiple subnets the network routers must be configured correctly Refer to the manufacturer s documentation for your particular router for instructions Paging all Users of Snom Phones If you are using multicast handset paging on snom phones then use the multicast IP address 224 6 9 2 and port number 2000 in order to page everyone using a snom phone This multicast address and port number have been added to the configuration files for snom phones 70 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring Paging Configuring Sound Card Paging Sound card or integrated paging uses analog speakers and a sound card installed in the server computer to connect with an external paging system Using this function you can send a live or recorded page over overhead speakers rg While this method of paging is supported SIP phones and VoIP paging devices are the recommended paging devices For instructions on paging refer to Paging on page 197 Sound card paging includes the following features e Supports sending pages to overhead speakers e Supports sending live and recorded pages Requirements for Sound Card Paging Ensure that your system has met the necessary requirements for sound card paging outlined below e A sound card must be installed on the computer where the NetVanta UC Server is installed e Analog speakers are required to be used as the output device
490. tifies the field that appears in a second dotted rectangle The label name appears in bold while the word recipient s is italicized and has a bracket in front of it The label name is included as content on the cover page but the word recipient s is not The application inserts the recipient name associated with a fax number when a caller initiates a fax request To reposition a label on the canvas 1 Select anywhere inside the label s dotted rectangle and then drag it to the desired position 2 Do the same with the dotted rectangle of the associated field 222 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing To change the font and style of a label or field 1 Select the label or field that you want to change 2 Do any of the following e Select a font from the font drop down menu arial X e Select a point size from the size drop down menu 12 e Select a style by selecting a style button BZU You can use the familiar standard font and text style commands from the toolbar to change the font and style of the cover page as described above Alternatively you can use the menu commands Format gt Font which also allow you to change the script and preview the font that you choose To change label content 1 Select the label content that you want to change 2 Enter the changes to the label content You can change label content but you cannot change associated field conte
491. ting Calls ECS BAS Administrator Guide Routing calls using attendant services You can use attendant services to intelligently route calls An attendant service can route calls based on information from the caller for example Caller ID or time of day Use for example a Transfer Call element to transfer calls to a queue from an attendant or Personal Business Assistant service Use NetVanta UC Server database integration to route calls For example if customers routinely call to find out the status of an order you can have different agent groups with agents who are trained to respond to questions regarding each status The service prompts the customer to enter an account number checks the database to determine the status of the order and routes the call to the agent group that has agents capable of answering the customer s specific questions A dial plan entry adds the prefix queue to the called number and sends the call to the queue specified in the Digits field of the dial plan The call is placed in the queue and answered by the first available agent logged into the agent group If the call is not answered an attendant service handles overflow behavior The service for overflow behavior can be as simple as a Voice mail element You can associate the attendant service with the administrator profile or any other user profile To route calls using attendant services 1 Create an attendant service to route calls to a queue based on cr
492. tings To enable mailbox monitoring and set the default for users to off 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select Servers 2 Double click on Exchange 3 Under Mailbox monitoring ensure that Enable mailbox monitoring is checked and set the Default setting for users to Off The default setting for users is to have mailbox monitoring turned off however individual users can have mailbox monitoring enabled To enable or disable mailbox monitoring for an individual user 1 Inthe Administration navigation pane select Users Right click on the user whose mailbox monitoring settings you want to change and select Open 2 3 Select the Messaging tab 4 Under mailbox monitoring select Enabled or Disabled to turn mailbox monitoring on or off for the user one For more information refer to Configuring a user s message storage on page 113 Using the NetVanta UC Server Logs This section explains how to manage alert notifications of errors and warnings logging statistics and logs and the information that they record Logs record events that occur in the system The administrator can 362 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Troubleshooting view logs for events on trunks and user extensions Four categories of events are recorded in logs events system errors and warnings sent items and received calls You can view logs and store them for future reference track activity that takes place an
493. tion provides information about how to create and manage fax cover pages A cover page is sent as the first page of your document and usually includes your name your company name and fax number as well as that of the recipient and some information relating to the subject of the fax There is a folder for fax cover pages in the navigation pane of the Faxes menu When you open the Cover Pages folder your fax cover pages are listed in the summary pane From there you can create new cover pages and manage those that already exist For information about sharing fax cover pages refer to Importing and Exporting on page 353 You can also send only a fax cover page using Quick Fax To create a new fax cover page 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the Cover Pages icon 3 Right click anywhere in the summary pane 4 Select New gt Fax Cover Page A new untitled cover page appears in the summary pane 5 Enter a name for the cover page You can use the Fax Cover Page Editor to design the appearance and content of the cover page that you created 6 Select File gt Save after you finish the design To use an existing fax cover page 1 Select the Faxes navigation bar to open the Faxes menu 2 Select the Cover Pages icon p Right click the cover page that you want to use You can use one of the cover pages that is included which are called FaxCoverPage 1 or FaxCoverPage 2 Select Duplicate to create a
494. tities This chapter introduces user extensions and identities and how to manage them It includes the following topics e Overview on page 127 e User Identities on page 130 e Auto Attendant Identities on page 133 e Ring and Hunt Group Identities on page 136 e Configuring Identities Using the Identities Pane on page 139 e Configuring the Global Phone Directory on page 140 Overview An identity which is defined as a dialable entity corresponds to any of the following user extension auto attendant or email address Using the Identities menu you can create a new user or attendant or group identity and you can edit or remove an identity The NetVanta UC Server uses the following categories of identities e User identity An extension number that is dialed by another telephone or automated attendant Call forwarding can be configured for the user Used on ucCompanion a softphone or a hardphone e Attendant identity Anentry in the dial plan that is typically used for an automated attendant or a service for example Interactive Voice Response pre screening etc Differs from a user identity because it cannot be associated with a telephone and no call forwarding is configured e Group identity A group of user identities Call forwarding behavior also referred to as overflow behavior can be configured for the group A user may have one or more identities by default For example when two identities
495. to ensure the call is answered using the p parameter or the Outgoing call control prompt delay Tools gt Options gt Message Delivery e Ifthe call is not completed the request is re queued for the number of minutes indicated in the d parameter or in the user s Active message delivery Delay mode Tools gt Options gt Message Delivery The next phone number on the list is then attempted Calls that were not initially successful are retried after the period of time has elapsed The call request is attempted until the maximum number of attempts have been made as per the r parameter or the Active message delivery Retry mode e Ifa call request is not completed successfully after the appropriate number of call attempts have been made then a log entry is written and can be viewed in the NetVanta UC Server Client The request is then removed from the queue e When a server receives an outbound call request this request is copied to disk as well as being entered in the processing queue When a request is removed from the queue because it has been completed or because it has not been able to execute the service on any of the phone numbers given the copy of the request on the disk is removed When a server starts up it reads any requests available and inserts them into the queue for processing This ensures that if a server is restarted any existing call requests are continued 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 247 Using
496. tool palette It does so until you select the Lock selector tool This disables the Selector tool To insert a shape 1 Select the Lock selector tool 2 Select the shape that you want to insert 3 Select on the canvas where you want to insert the shape and then drag down and to the right 4 Release the mouse button to create the shape To reposition a shape on the canvas 1 Select the shape to select it 2 Drag the shape to the position that you want canvas Wor You can turn on the gridlines The gridlines help you to position shapes with ease on the 224 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Faxing To change the shape and size of a shape e Select a handle and drag to change the size or shape of the selected object oe SSS C hy ae ao 4 X i NN Be ee e p oO a n n For example you can change the shape of a circle so that it becomes an ellipse by selecting the handle as indicated and dragging to the right To delete a shape 1 Select the shape that you want to delete 2 Press Delete To draw a line 1 Select the Lock selector tool 2 Select the Line tool 3 Select on the canvas where you want the line to begin and drag to draw the line 4 Release the mouse button to create the line 5 Select anywhere on the canvas to cancel the selection To change or reposition a line 1 Select the line that you want to change to select it 2
497. topics e Service Element Settings and Features on page 265 e Using Standard Elements on page 268 e Using Advanced Elements on page 288 If your system is licensed for database integration then you will also have a Database Lu elements tab available For more information refer to Using Database Elements on page 343 Service Element Settings and Features This section describes the settings that affect the behavior of certain service elements and some global features available in many service elements User Context and Service Elements When you start a service it begins by operating in the context of the user who owns the identity for example the extension that received the call The different service elements access mailboxes and objects that are related to this user context You can change the user context by modifying the service The user context of the service is characterized by an authentication and a user profile that is accessible from the authentication A service is associated with an identity When a service starts the identity is used to locate a user profile the one that owns the identity The user context is then established with the user profile that owns the identity and the authentication that owns that profile Elements cannot change the user context In particular Transfer Call Dial by Name Dial by Extension 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 265 Using Elements to Create Call Answering S
498. tor pin to the next element depending on their choice When you are finished setting selection keys you can connect an element for each selection key that you set To set selection keys on a Menu element 1 In the first On drop down menu select the number that you want The number one appears by default 2 Select Add to add an On drop down menu for setting additional keys The NetVanta UC Server enters the key in numerical sequence You can also select a key from the drop down menu You can set a maximum of 12 keys Keys range from one to nine then include zero and 3 To delete a selection key on a Menu element select the trash can to the left of the key that you want to delete Remember to change the announcement associated with the menu so that it reflects the changes dre For information about recording an announcement for the Menu element refer to To record an announcement for a Play Announcement element on page 271 272 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Flow Control Element The Flow Control element acts as a decision tree and allows for two different comparison methods matching based on phone numbers or on time of day and date The call will be routed to the next element based on a successful or failed match a failed match routes the call through ala the Otherwise connector pin You can select either Phone Number
499. tors can include or exclude identities from the Global Phone Directory using the Identities summary pane The inclusion status Included or Excluded of an identity is displayed in the Global Phone Directory column in the Identities summary pane E Netvanta UC Client File Edit View Tools Help K a Wt e A G E Display Name Identity Priority Answering Enabl Global Phone Directory Lal Paging Groups Oh Absence Tracker 3000 100 Yes Excluded Gateways G Admin 2006 100 Yes Included Ports G lohn Roebuck 2005 100 Yes Included GD Classes of Service tgl Ring Group 1 2555 100 Yes Included EZ Authentications Gh steve Jackson 2007 100 Yes Included Identities oat Data Sources Services Faxes Admin 2006 on Net anta ECS E W Number of rings r wv Default Personal Business Assista gt Absence Tracker 3000 on Netya B Absences Tracker r For Help press F1 Connected as Admin All newly created eligible identities are added to the Global Phone Directory with the exception of attendant service identities Eligible attendant service identities can be included after they are created Identities that are not associated with the NetVanta ECS communication system and phantom identities cannot be included in the Global Phone Directory Each Global Phone Directory entry contains a first name last name and phone number value The entry s phone number is the identity s address However
500. type for example System Personal Business Assistant or Personal Assistant To create a new authentication for an existing user profile 1 Right click anywhere in the Authentications summary pane and select New Enter a login name for the new authentication in the Login name field Make sure the Enabled check box is enabled Enter a password in the Password field Reenter the password in the Confirm field Select the Change button to select an owned user from the list of available user profiles Select the Add button to add accessible users to the new authentication COE NaN RS Er S Select OK To assign a Windows user to a role 1 Right click anywhere in the Authentications summary pane and select Enable Windows Authentication Select Browse Select a user from the Select User field Select OK ot pe pee ES In the Authorization section of the Enable Windows user section select a role from the Role drop down menu The drop down menu is disabled if there are no authorization roles available 124 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Managing User Profiles 6 Select OK To add an accessible user to an existing user profile 1 Inthe Authentications summary pane right click the Login Name of the user to which you want to allow another user access and select Open In the User associations section select the Add button In the Select accessible user profile section select t
501. u bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options Select the Fax Messages tab In the Fax transmission report options section select one of the following from the drop down menu e Entire fax only delivers the entire fax to the user s Sent Items folder without including the fax transmission report e Entire fax with fax transmission report delivers the entire fax including the fax transmission report to the user s Sent Items folder e Fax transmission report only delivers only the fax transmission report to the user s Sent Items folder If you select this mode the following warning appears Selecting Fax Transmission Report only will not include the original fax contents when delivering to individual mailboxes or the system defined mailbox for Message Archiving Ensure that delivering Fax Transmission Report only complies with your internal document retention policy and adherence to your industry legislative guidelines Lu Changes to the fax transmission options take effect immediately Select OK Setting Fax on demand Options For a Fax on demand element activated on a service you can specify the minimum and maximum number of digits that a fax number must have to initiate transmission You can also enable or disable the service for long distance callers Advanced Fax on demand options involve specifying the keys that callers press to 30 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D
502. u can assign an identity to a user and then assign that identity to a phone For example Jane Smith has a phone on her desk with two line buttons Line one has identity 201 which is Jane s personal phone line Line two has identity 301 which is a customer support line that is also assigned to Jane Smith and to other users You can assign or remove identities to phones from Active Directory dito When you assign an identity to a phone the phone immediately reboots 7 To assign an identity to a new phone 1 Inthe Users content pane right click the user to whom you want to assign a phone and select Properties 2 Select the UC Server tab 3 Select the server for which you want to configure this user 4 Ensure that Enable Unified Communications Server for this user is checked 5 Select the Advanced button 6 Select the Phones tab 7 Select Add 8 Inthe Property Page menu enter the information for the new phone and select Next 9 From the Select Identities menu select the identity that you want to assign to the new phone 10 Select Finish The identity that you assign to the phone appears in the Identities section of the Phone tab If the phone type has several buttons the identities are assigned to the buttons in Lu numerical order You can assign as many identities as there are buttons on the phone 11 Repeat steps 7 to 10 for all the identities that you want to assign to the new phone 92 Copyright 2013
503. uery optimization method Configuring SMTP Server To add an SMTP server 1 Right click anywhere in the Servers summary pane Select New gt SMTP to open the SMTP Server Configuration menu box Enter a server name in the Server name field Pe Enter a name for the SMTP server in the SMTP server name field For example mail yourcompany com Enter a port number in the Port number field The default port number is 25 Enter the Sender email display name Enter the Sender email address 2 ON oN Select OK 182 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server Managing Trusted UC Servers In order for NetVanta ucCompanion users to use desktop presence IM click to dial and other ucCompanion features with users of other NetVanta UC Server systems a trusted connection must be established between the systems When establishing a trusted connection between two NetVanta UC Server systems an invitation is sent from the local NetVanta UC Server to a remote NetVanta UC Server The remote NetVanta UC Server can either accept or decline this invitation Accepting the invitation establishes a trusted connection between the two servers Subsequently trusted connections between NetVanta UC Servers can be disabled or deleted if NetVanta ucCompanion interaction between the users of the trusted servers is no longer desired To add a Trusted UC Server entry 1 Right click anywhere
504. ule Other applications include e 1 800 numbers e Conference calls for the Host enter 7050 e ENUM ITSP prefix e Call queuing Allowing and Restricting Long Distance and Other Calls Use toll restrictions to restrict calls and to allow only certain types of calls For example you can restrict some users from making long distance calls or restrict all users from calling 1 900 numbers 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 53 Routing and Restricting Calls ECS BAS Administrator Guide There are two types of toll restrictions that you can manage The toll restrictions that you manage in the Routing configuration category apply to telephones and unified communications servers The NetVanta UC Server also includes toll restrictions that apply only to Personal Business Assistant and Personal Assistant Toll restrictions allow you to define rules that control access to particular ranges of dialed numbers such as long distance or 900 number services Toll restrictions are evaluated and executed from top to bottom as they appear in the table If the Toll Restrictions table is empty the system allows all calls The Toll Restrictions table uses the following information e Calling Number indicates individual extensions or ranges of extensions to which you want to control access uses regular expressions e Called Number indicates individual extensions or ranges of extensions or devices to which you want to restrict or al
505. ult value is 1 and this mode rarely requires changing Wor Only change the value of the simultaneous event monitors under the direction of the ADTRAN Technical Support team For message waiting indicators to update when messages are accessed in Microsoft Outlook Web Access or on a mobile device you can configure Microsoft Exchange Lu Server to monitor for changes in users mailboxes and for the NetVanta UC Server to adjust the waiting light accordingly For more information refer to Configuring Microsoft Exchange Server on page 170 For troubleshooting information refer to Troubleshooting Message Waiting Indicators on page 359 To disable the message waiting indicator mode 1 In the menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the Message Waiting Light tab 3 Enable the Never turn on or off button 4 Select OK To specify message waiting indicator options 1 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 2 Select the message waiting indicator tab 3 Enable the Turn on when new message arrives button 4 Enable either of the following Turn off when first message is accessed in mailbox the light turns off when the user accesses the first new message regardless of whether the user disconnects before listening to the message e Turn off when no more new messages in mailbox the light turns off when the user accesses the last new message 5 S
506. und music when a caller is on hold e Play warning prompts when an error occurs during a call e Allow overhead paging This mode is only applicable to sound card paging It does not apply to SIP paging or gateway paging 4 Enable park pickup call functionality if you wish to enable call park pickup e Type a URL in the Failover URL box e Type a timeout in the Failover Timeout box The time can range from 15 to 7200 seconds two hours If a caller places a call on hold and then parks the call the other party hears one background music regardless of whether play background music when a caller is on hold is enabled 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 47 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide 5 Enable auto logout agent if you wish to automatically log out agents after missing a call in a call 48 queue You must specify the number of missed calls from 1 to 99 before an agent is automatically logged out Specify the amount of time in seconds that a call is presented to available agents until the overflow timeout expires and the call is redirected to the overflow service This time can range from 15 to 7200 seconds two hours The default is five minutes Specify the duration of wrap up time that an agent is given after finishing a call This number can range from 1 to 7200 seconds two hours Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Routing and Restricting
507. unication Systems TA Netvanta 7000 Series J Options TA netvants UC Server J Routing J Services Navigation Pane Services Announcements N avigatio n Distribution Lists Bars eooo Fees logs ANA The Admin user profile does not have any associated Identitites Meee Pane For Help press F1 619510001 1D User name Most recent GUI access BEE Moc Admin Eric welis Jane Doe John Doe shaun wells General Voicemail General Voicemail General Voicemail Admin 9 22 2010 12 30 18 PM Connected as Admin Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc Summary Pane Detail Pane 167 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring ports for all types of communication system You can configure the NetVanta UC Server ports Ports are the physical connections on the telephony card that connect the NetVanta UC Server to the communication system indicators you must first delete the message waiting indicators status from the attached communication system If you remove a port that is responsible for activating or deactivating message waiting don If you integrate additional communication systems the hardware and software components must be installed before you can configure ports for the communication system If your system uses a traditional communication system you must configure a port for each configured communication system port If your system has an integrated
508. ures The following are some of the many NetVanta UC Server features e Support for Outlook 2010 32 bit and 64 bit voice form fax form contact system and click to dial integration e Support for Polycom Corporate Directory refer to Configuring the Global Phone Directory on page 140 and Using the Global Phone Directory on page 194 e Support for Windows Server 2008 e Support for Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 is available automatically through the Netvanta UC NetVanta UC Server Configuration Wizard e Client software supports Microsoft Windows Vista and Microsoft Office 2007 e Support for connecting existing PBXs to the NetVanta UC Server through a SIP gateway refer to To configure PBX options for a PBX connected through a gateway on page 188 e Ability to use a customized application and the OutDial executable to make outgoing calls and run services on connected calls refer to Using the Outbound Dialer on page 235 e When importing users from text files you can specify the call answering mode either Personal Assistant PA or Personal Business Assistant PBA e Automatically populates the Active Directory field with the primary identity address for example an extension number e Active Directory management of a user s phone e Interactive Voice Response IVR elements including Move Current Row element on page 350 for selecting information from multi record results from database searches and Prompt for Current Row element
509. user Pager access represents events in which NetVanta UC Server users send or receive a page Message delivered Voice Mail access represents user voicemail access for example users accessing their own mailbox to receive voice messages Log entry v be Z Managing logs To get the Logs menu select the Logs navigation bar You can retrieve and view remove and archive logs You can rename and delete log archives and export a call log using the Import Export wizard You can configure the NetVanta UC Server to automatically archive logs For more F information refer to Setting Administrative Maintenance and Diagnostic Options on page 42 To retrieve and view a log 1 Double click the log folder that you want to view The contents of the log are displayed in the summary pane When a log folder is open its icon appears as an open book Closed log folder Open log folder 2 Use the vertical scroll arrows to view the list of log entries 3 Select a log entry to view information about it in the details pane 366 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Troubleshooting To remove old log entries 1 Right click anywhere in the summary pane 2 Select Clear log 3 Select one of the following e Everything e Entries created before today e Entries created before the beginning of the month e Entries created before a specific date If there
510. ve Domains field select the active domain that you want to remove 46 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting System Wide Options 4 Select the lt lt Select button 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the active domains that you want are removed 6 Select OK Configuring System Call Options You can configure system wide call options such as playing background music when a caller is on hold and enabling overhead paging for sound card paging Wor For more information on sound card paging refer to Configuring Sound Card Paging on page 71 You can also configure what callers hear if an error occurs during a call When the Play warning prompts mode is enabled then a voice prompt plays to tell the caller that the system is unable to complete the call When this mode is disabled the caller hears a tone pattern when a call is not completed 1 You can enable the call park pickup Communication System feature which allows a user to park a caller on their phone and allows another user to pick up that caller on their phone This feature is also useful if you want to change phones during a call Communication Systems to open the Picking up Parked Calls Using Access Codes on page 198 Wor For more information on using the call park pickup feature refer to Parking Calls and Communication Systems options 2 Select Services 3 Enable any of the following check boxes e Play backgro
511. ver is not functioning properly If you cannot find the information you are looking for in this manual or in the online help then you can go to the ADTRAN website for further information such as training materials a quick reference card SIP phone user guides and technical notes If you are still unable to resolve the issue then you can contact your reseller or ADTRAN Technical Support if a support contract is in place For more information refer to the following sections e Troubleshooting Playback and Recording on page 357 e Troubleshooting Voicemail on page 358 e Troubleshooting Message Waiting Indicators on page 359 e Troubleshooting the NetVanta UC Server on page 360 e Troubleshooting Performance Issues with Exchange Server on page 361 e Using the NetVanta UC Server Logs on page 362 e Enabling Diagnostic Information on page 368 e Accessing Documentation and Training on page 369 e Accessing Technical Support on page 369 e Restoring NetVanta UC Server Files and Settings on page 369 Diagnostics System Options on page 43 Wor For information on configuring diagnostic system options refer to Configuring Troubleshooting Playback and Recording Symptoms The beginning of message playback announcement playback and recording and greeting playback and recording are being cut off when being played or recorded using the handset 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 357 Troubleshooting ECS BAS Administrator Guide Caus
512. vice That is when a service starts none of the temporary recordings exist If a caller records a temporary recording then the recording is stored in a temporary file that can be played by another element and the recording is discarded when the service ends Temporary recordings can be referenced by the following elements e Play Announcement element e Menu element e Send Email element custom e Page Recorded element e Add Data element e Update Data element re To use the Add Data and Update Data elements the system must be licensed for database integration For more information on temporary recordings refer to Allowing Callers to Make Temporary Recordings Within a Service on page 267 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 293 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide To enable callers to create a temporary recording using a remote telephone 1 Enable the Specific button 2 Select the value selector gt select Temporary Recordings and select the temporary recording that you want The name of the temporary recording appears in the Specific field Record the announcement to a database by selecting a Data Source and specifying the filtering information ore To access database information the system must be licensed for database integration To enable callers to change an announcement in a database 1 Enable the Database button 2 Select the Data Source Selector
513. vior of the system by setting system wide options System wide options fall under the following categories e Setting User Options on page 22 e Setting Auto Attendant and System Announcement Options on page 33 e Setting Outbound Calls and Dialing Options on page 38 e Setting Administrative Maintenance and Diagnostic Options on page 42 To access the NetVanta UC Client administrator options 1 Log into NetVanta UC Client as a user with administrator privileges 2 Select the Admin tab 3 Inthe menu bar of the Administrator application select Tools gt Options 4 Select from the tabs available to change system wide options Options x Message Buffering Message Archiving Fax on demand Fax Messages Message Waiting Light Active Domains Diagnostics System Options Error Reporting Mailbox Management TUI Voices General Dialing Message Delivery Operator Definition Voice Mail Identity Automatic log archiving eS IV Enable automatic archiving Automatically archive the logs when log file size is greater than 1000 4 KBytes Do not allow log file writing when disk storage available is less than 50 MBytes Auditing cs IV Enable auditing Keep audit records for 30 days Dial by name behavior A Please select which order callers will enter names when using EE dial by name functionality First name last name Last name first name Assisted transfer Set the maximum time to
514. w Open element Collapsed element Icon only Voice Mail L Voice Mail ad 2 ty 2 Mailbox Called Extension M Play status message Add Menu Item Select the Help button to access the appropriate help page The Connector Pin on the element is used to make a connection to the next element in the call flow An element might have more than one connector pin depending on its function If you do not connect at least one pin to another element the call is terminated Working with Elements to Build a Service To build a call flow for incoming calls you need to create a service and then open the Service Editor To begin the call flow drag elements one by one from the tool palette and link them using the connector pins Repeat this procedure with as many elements as you need until the service is complete 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 259 Creating Custom Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide To create a service 1 Open the Services menu 2 Right click anywhere in the summary pane 3 Select New gt Service to add a new service to the list in the summary pane The service icon denotes the new service and the default name is Service S Service icon 4 Enter a name for the service If you are unable to enter the name right click the service and then select Rename Enter the new name and then select the icon next to the service name to make the change To initia
515. w access to the profile from other authentications and provision additional phones To start the NetVanta UC Server MMC snap in 1 From the lists of users right click the user that you want to modify 2 Select Properties 3 Select the UC Server tab 86 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Integrating with Active Directory When you enable a NetVanta UC Server user profile in Active Directory then the NetVanta UC Server is To create a new user it is recommended that you use the New User Wizard in the NetVanta UC Server When using the New User Wizard you create an identity for that user at the same time and then assign a temporary PIN to that user If you enable a user one profile in Active Directory rather than through the New User Wizard then an identity is not created for the user and therefore a PIN number cannot be assigned and this could create security issues For information on creating NetVanta UC Server user profiles refer to Creating User Profiles on page 99 able to identify and authenticate a Windows user logon using Microsoft credentials and allow Windows users specific privileges and permissions based on their system defined roles User profile information is available from the UC Server tab For more information on user profiles select the Advanced button to open the User Details menu To enable NetVanta UC Server user profiles from Active Directory 1 From the drop
516. wait for answer before recalling an assisted Sa transfer attempt 20 seconds Defaults 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 21 Setting System Wide Options ECS BAS Administrator Guide Setting User Options There are a number of system wide user options that can be set to define the default user behavior e Setting Message Delivery Options on page 22 e Configuring Message Waiting Indicator Options on page 24 e Setting the Message Playback Order on page 26 e Setting Voicemail Options on page 27 e Setting Assisted Transfer Options on page 29 e Setting Fax Message Delivery Options on page 29 e Setting Fax on demand Options on page 30 e Message Archiving Options on page 32 Setting Message Delivery Options Message delivery options apply to the Active Message Delivery and Pager Notification features that are available to Personal Assistant PA users When Active Message Delivery is in use you can specify the maximum number of concurrent calls and the number of seconds to wait after connecting before prompting the caller The default value for the maximum number of concurrent calls is 1 Increasing this value increases the number of simultaneous calls that can made However setting the value too high reduces the number of ports available for other activities such as auto attendants calls forwarded to voicemail outgoing Active Message Delivery and on some PBX integrations message waiting indicators You must als
517. want to change 2 Select Open 3 Change the information about the communication system that you want 4 Select OK 188 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Configuring the NetVanta UC Server To delete a communication system 1 Inthe Communication Systems summary pane right click the communication system that you want to delete 2 Select Delete 3 Select Yes to confirm the deletion 4 Select OK Configuring NetVanta UC Server communication systems For each NetVanta UC Server communication system on the system you can configure the following Routing Including e Routing calls using the dial plan on page 49 e Allowing local and toll free calls on page 54 e Restricting long distance calls on page 55 Services Configuring System Call Options on page 47 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 189 Configuring the NetVanta UC Server ECS BAS Administrator Guide Arf Zima X lew KEJ 8Beesesesss F Toll Restrictions d 127604 4 g p Liia GE DAE E aema 100001001210 payne servies Opaja 5 Spagngiers V ee FF Mary Deckgroured rase n e coder s on hold FT May wanting prompts when an error eccurs during call F aion verte paging Services Configuring Licenses The licensing section provides information on how to manage the license keys on the NetVanta UC Server ADTRAN has defined the NetVanta UC Server license system using the following
518. want to store and drag it to the appropriate folder Lu Double click a folder to view its contents On the toolbar use the Go back arrow to return to the list previously displayed in the summary pane To duplicate an announcement 1 Select the Announcements navigation bar to open the Announcements navigation pane 2 Ifthe appropriate voice folder is not displayed in the Announcements navigation pane select the desired voice folder using the steps in Changing the Voice Folder in the Announcements Navigation Pane on page 314 3 In the Announcements summary pane right click the announcement that you want to duplicate 4 Select Duplicate A copy of the announcement will appear in the summary pane 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 325 Using Announcements in Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide To duplicate an announcement in another voice To streamline the process of creating multiple versions of the same announcement in different languages one corresponding to each voice configured on the system NetVanta UC Server allows you to duplicate announcement objects from an announcement directory of the voice currently being managed to the corresponding directory of another voice For example after creating and recording a new announcement in the English U S Male Shared folder you can use Duplicate in other Voice to duplicate the recorded file into the English U S Female Shared folder You can then rec
519. whose messages you have instructed the NetVanta UC Server to deliver and other callers to the paging system For example you can use a prefix such as 123 or 000 to signal deliveries 4 Enable the Add Caller ID check box if you want to have caller ID sent with your messages 5 Inthe Append to message field enter information that is part of the messages sent following any caller ID information displayed on your pager Send Email element Using the Send Email element you can specify the NetVanta UC Server to notify you or someone else by email when a caller moves successfully through the Send Email element For example you could have an email sent to your personal email address when a caller leaves a voice message for you after hours or when you receive a fax You can specify the type of message that you want to send and the address where you want to send it including multiple email addresses You can also send attachments with the email notification For example you could attach a fax of a property listing or audio describing a property or some other type of fax or audio specific 280 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services to your particular business SMTP Server configured Wor To use the Send Email element ensure that you have a Microsoft Exchange Server or Selecting a Custom notification allows you to enter or select in
520. with the database defined in with the received fax The fax will the Receive Fax element be saved instead to the default Check your database connection parameters and ensure that the mailbox database is available The data source s referenced in ServiceStateMachine when an element refers to a data source that the element s is unknown no longer exists Verify the following 1 The ODBC data source if applicable is correctly configured 2 The fields in the reference data source may have been changed or deleted Verify the data source configuration 264 Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 619510001 1D ECS BAS Administrator Guide Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services 16 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services Elements are the building blocks of the services that you create for identities By combining elements on the canvas of the Service Editor you design a call flow that routes incoming calls Elements are on the tool palette of the Service Editor They are divided into three groups standard advanced and database Each group has its own tab To access database information the system must be licensed for database integration If Lu you are not licensed for database integration the Database tab is unavailable For more information refer to Using Database Elements on page 343 This chapter presents information about the individual elements that you use to build a service This chapter covers the following
521. xtension refers to the identity selected in the last successful Select Extension element in the service If there was none or the last one failed it defaults to be the same as the Called Extension For added security you might want to put a Verify Password element before this element Verify Password Element ra The Verify Password element enables the service to request a numeric Verify Password 1 T al password from a caller and verifies that a given password matches a specified password the password for a particular mailbox or the If entered password matches password from a Data Source The Verify Password element would Password for mailbox typically be used to access or to change information based on authentication Called Extension e Otherwise Administrators may use any of the following sources to verify the password provided 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 297 Using Elements to Create Call Answering Services ECS BAS Administrator Guide 1 The password associated with any of the following mailboxes Called Extension This refers to the mailbox associated with the identity originally called Selected Extension This refers to the mailbox associated with the identity selected in the last successful Select Extension element executed in the service If you choose this mode ensure that you include a Select Extension element somewhere before the Verify Password elemen
522. y called Selected Extension refers to the identity selected in the last successful Select Extension element in the service If there was none or the last one failed it defaults to be the same as the Called Extension This element can receive voicemail messages and store them in a specific mailbox ie The Take Message element records an incoming message Called A Take Message 1 F Called Extension z Record for at most 240 1 secs N Stop recording after 8 0 seconds silence First select Called Extension from the drop down menu Make sure to include a Select Extension element before the Take Message element in M Stop when key pressed im gi ui the call flow so that callers can enter the extension number that they IV Beep before recording want If you do not include a Select Extension element in the service JV Review message menu the message goes to the Administrator s mailbox This element can receive voicemail messages and store them in a specific mailbox First select Called Extension from the drop down menu Make sure to include a Select Extension element before the Take Message element in the call flow so that callers can enter the extension number that they want If you do not include a Select Extension element in the service the message goes to the Administrator s mailbox You can limit the length of the message that can be recorded and avoid recording silence Enable the corresponding check boxes to allow calle
523. you through the process of creating a new identity The New Identity Wizard is dynamic and prompts you to enter different information depending on the configuration options that you choose for example configuring an identity type associating a user with an extension number or defining call answering behavior The procedures below are only a few of the possible wizard menus that you might view when creating an identity You can create the following types of identities using the wizard s User Identity This identity type belongs to a user and is typically associated with ucCompanion a softphone or a hardphone oO Attendant Identity This identity type allows calls to route directly to an auto attendant or to a service for example Interactive Voice Response pre screening etc Group Identity This identity type allows you to create either a ring group or hunt group extension which distributes calls to members of these group types vt Ring Group A ring group creates an identity that distributes calls to all members of the ring group at the same time 664 Hunt Group A hunt group creates an identity that distributes calls to members of the hunt group sequentially based on availability To access identities In the Admin tab in the Administration navigation pane select the Identities topic Identities are 619510001 1D Copyright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 129 Managing User Extensions and Identities ECS BAS Administrator Guide di
524. you would like to include in the paging group If you have already selected an identity associated with a phone you do not need to select the corresponding phone MAC address Select Next In the Enter Multicast IP Addresses menu select Add to add a multicast IP address to the paging group In the Mulsticast IP Address Details menu that appears enter the multicast IP address of the paging equipment in the Multicast address field and enter the corresponding port number in the Port field Select OK to add the multicast IP address After you have added all of the desired multicast IP addresses select Next In the Enter Dialable Numbers menu select Add to add a feature access code for a NetVanta UC Server sound card or gateway paging device In the Dialable Number Details menu that appears enter the feature access code for the paging device in the field and select OK After you have entered all desired feature access codes for paging devices select Next Review the paging group summary If there are any changes you wish to make then select the Back button and make the changes When you are satisfied with the paging group summary then select Submit Select Next Select Finish Removing a Member from a Paging Group Once you have created your paging groups you can remove users from the paging groups as needed To remove a user from a paging group 1 2 3 76 In the Administration navigation pane double click on Paging Groups
525. yright 2013 ADTRAN Inc 87 Integrating with Active Directory ECS BAS Administrator Guide by pressing a button in a voicemail greeting typically 0 e A System operator is the general operator and the call is typically transferred to the extension of the company receptionist e A Personal operator is an alternative to the System operator and callers are directed to a different extension for example to a personal receptionist or to an individual in a particular department or location Each user profile has a time zone setting that indicates in which time zone the user is located The time zone setting affects the times and dates that appear on voice fax and email messages when users access their mailbox using the telephone user interface For workers who travel or are relocating to another site for a period of time you can change each user s time zone settings To reset a user s PIN 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name for which you want to reset the PIN and select Properties Select the UC Server tab Select the server for which you want to configure this user Ensure that Enable UC Server for this user is checked Select PIN Enter a new number in the New PIN field Reenter the new number in the Confirm new PIN field OO eels SOW SS SE en RD Select OK Lu The new PIN takes effect immediately To change general user information 1 Inthe Users summary pane right click the user name tha

View - ADTRAN Support Community

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents